SMC Networks SMC7824M/FSW Switch User manual

community strings that suit your specific security requirements (see page

\Write to FLASH finish.

Success.

2-8

NITIAL

ONFIGURATION

Enabling SNMP Management Access

The switch can be configured to accept management commands from

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) applications such as HP

OpenView. You can configure the switch to (1) respond to SNMP requests or (2) generate SNMP traps.

When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch (either to return information or to set a parameter), the switch provides the requested data or sets the specified parameter. The switch can also be configured to send information to SNMP managers (without being requested by the managers) through trap messages, which inform the manager that certain events have occurred.

The switch includes an SNMP agent that supports SNMP version 1, 2c, and 3 clients. To provide management access for version 1 or 2c clients, you must specify a community string. The switch provides a default MIB

View (i.e., an SNMPv3 construct) for the default “public” community string that provides read access to the entire MIB tree, and a default view for the “private” community string that provides read/write access to the entire MIB tree. However, you may assign new views to version 1 or 2c

5-24).

Community Strings

(for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients)

Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP version 1 and 2c stations, as well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from the switch. You therefore need to assign community strings to specified users, and set the access level.

The default strings are:

• public - with read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects.

• private - with read-write access. Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.

2-9

ASIC

ONFIGURATION

To prevent unauthorized access to the switch from SNMP version 1 or 2c clients, it is recommended that you change the default community strings.

To configure a community string, complete the following steps:

1. From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt, type “snmp-server community string mode ,” where “string” is the community access string and “mode” is rw (read/write) or ro (read only). Press <Enter>. (Note that the default mode is read only.)

2. To remove an existing string, simply type “no snmp-server community string ,” where “string” is the community access string to remove. Press

<Enter>.

Console(config)#snmp-server community admin rw

Console(config)#snmp-server community private

Console(config)#

20-4

Note: If you do not intend to support access to SNMP version 1 and 2c clients, we recommend that you delete both of the default community strings. If there are no community strings, then SNMP management access from SNMP v1 and v2c clients is disabled.

Trap Receivers

You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive traps from the switch. To configure a trap receiver, use the “snmp-server host” command.

From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt, type:

“snmp-server host host-address community-string

[version {1 | 2c | 3 {auth | noauth | priv}}]” where “host-address” is the IP address for the trap receiver,

“community-string” specifies access rights for a version 1/2c host, or is the user name of a version 3 host, “version” indicates the SNMP client version, and “auth | noauth | priv” means that authentication, no authentication, or authentication and privacy is used for v3 clients.

2-10

NITIAL

ONFIGURATION

Then press <Enter>. For a more detailed description of these parameters,

see “snmp-server host” on page 20-6. The following example creates a

trap host for each type of SNMP client.

Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.23 batman

Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.98 robin version 2c

20-6

Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.34 barbie version 3 auth

Console(config)#

Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients

To configure management access for SNMPv3 clients, you need to first create a view that defines the portions of MIB that the client can read or write, assign the view to a group, and then assign the user to a group. The following example creates one view called “mib-2” that includes the entire

MIB-2 tree branch, and then another view that includes the IEEE 802.1d bridge MIB. It assigns these respective read and read/write views to a group call “r&d” and specifies group authentication via MD5 or SHA. In the last step, it assigns a v3 user to this group, indicating that MD5 will be used for authentication, provides the password “greenpeace” for authentication, and the password “einstien” for encryption.

Console(config)#snmp-server view mib-2 1.3.6.1.2.1 included

20-13

Console(config)#snmp-server view 802.1d 1.3.6.1.2.1.17 included

Console(config)#snmp-server group r&d v3 auth mib-2 802.1d

Console(config)#snmp-server user steve group r&d v3 auth md5

20-15

greenpeace priv des56 einstien

20-18

Console(config)#

For a more detailed explanation on how to configure the switch for access

from SNMP v3 clients, refer to “Simple Network Management Protocol” on page 5-1, or refer to the specific CLI commands for SNMP starting on

page 20-1.

2-11

ANAGING

YSTEM

ILES

Managing System Files

The switch’s flash memory supports three types of system files that can be managed by the CLI program, web interface, or SNMP. The switch’s file system allows files to be uploaded and downloaded, copied, deleted, and set as a start-up file.

The three types of files are:

• Configuration — This file type stores system configuration information and is created when configuration settings are saved.

Saved configuration files can be selected as a system start-up file or can be uploaded via TFTP to a server for backup. The file named

“Factory_Default_Config.cfg” contains all the system default settings and cannot be deleted from the system. If the system is booted with the factory default settings, the master unit will also create a file named

“startup1.cfg” that contains system settings for initialization, including information about the unit identifier, MAC address, and installed module type. The configuration settings from the factory defaults configuration file are copied to this file, which is then used to boot the

switch. See “Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings” on page 4-18

for more information.

• Operation Code — System software that is executed after boot-up, also known as run-time code. This code runs the switch operations and

provides the CLI and web management interfaces. See “Managing

Firmware” on page 4-15 for more information.

• Diagnostic Code — Software that is run during system boot-up, also known as POST (Power On Self-Test).

Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the switch supports only two operation code files. However, you can have as many diagnostic code files and configuration files as available flash memory space allows. The switch has a total of 32 Mbytes of flash memory for system files.

2-12

NITIAL

ONFIGURATION

In the system flash memory, one file of each type must be set as the start-up file. During a system boot, the diagnostic and operation code files set as the start-up file are run, and then the start-up configuration file is loaded.

Note that configuration files should be downloaded using a file name that reflects the contents or usage of the file settings. If you download directly to the running-config, the system will reboot, and the settings will have to be copied from the running-config to a permanent file.

Saving Configuration Settings

Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not saved when the switch is rebooted. To save all your configuration changes in nonvolatile storage, you must copy the running configuration file to the start-up configuration file using the “copy” command.

New startup configuration files must have a name specified. File names on the switch are case-sensitive, can be from 1 to 31 characters, must not contain slashes (\ or /), and the leading letter of the file name must not be a period (.). (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)

There can be more than one user-defined configuration file saved in the switch’s flash memory, but only one is designated as the “startup” file that is loaded when the switch boots. The copy running-config startup-config command always sets the new file as the startup file. To select a previously saved configuration file, use the boot system config: < filename > command.

The maximum number of saved configuration files depends on available flash memory, with each configuration file normally requiring less than 20 kbytes. The amount of available flash memory can be checked by using the dir command.

2-13

ANAGING

YSTEM

ILES

To save the current configuration settings, enter the following command:

1. From the Privileged Exec mode prompt, type “copy running-config startup-config” and press <Enter>.

2. Enter the name of the start-up file. Press <Enter>.

Configuring the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Console#copy running-config startup-config

Startup configuration file name []: startup

\Write to FLASH Programming.

\Write to FLASH finish.

Success.

Console#

2-14

ECTION

WITCH

ANAGEMENT

This section describes the basic switch features, along with a detailed description of how to configure each feature via a web browser, and a brief example for the Command Line Interface.

Basic Management Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Simple Network Management Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

User Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Client Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Access Control Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Address Table Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Spanning Tree Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Quality of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Multicast Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Domain Name Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

WITCH

ANAGEMENT

HAPTER

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Using the Web Interface

This switch provides an embedded HTTP web agent. Using a web browser you can configure the switch and view statistics to monitor network activity. The web agent can be accessed by any computer on the network using a standard web browser (Internet Explorer 5.0 or above, or Netscape

Navigator 6.2 or above).

Note: You can also use the Command Line Interface (CLI) to manage the switch over a serial connection to the console port or via

Telnet. For more information on using the CLI, refer to Chapter

17 “Overview of Command Line Interface.”

Prior to accessing the switch from a web browser, be sure you have first performed the following tasks:

1. Configure the switch with a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway using an out-of-band serial connection, BOOTP or DHCP

protocol. (See “Setting an IP Address” on page 2-6.)

2. Set user names and passwords using an out-of-band serial connection.

Access to the web agent is controlled by the same user names and

passwords as the onboard configuration program. (See “Setting

Passwords” on page 2-5.)

3. After you enter a user name and password, you will have access to the system configuration program.

3-1

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Notes: 1.

You are allowed three attempts to enter the correct password; on the third failed attempt the current connection is terminated.

If you log into the web interface as guest (Normal Exec level), you can view the configuration settings or change the guest password. If you log in as “admin” (Privileged Exec level), you can change the settings on any page.

If the path between your management station and this switch does not pass through any device that uses the Spanning Tree

Algorithm, then you can set the switch port attached to your management station to fast forwarding (i.e., enable Admin

Edge Port) to improve the switch’s response time to management commands issued through the web interface. See

“Configuring Interface Settings” on page 11-17.

3-2

AVIGATING THE

ROWSER

NTERFACE

Navigating the Web Browser Interface

To access the web-browser interface you must first enter a user name and password. The administrator has Read/Write access to all configuration parameters and statistics. The default user name and password “admin” is used for the administrator.

Home Page

When your web browser connects with the switch’s web agent, the home page is displayed as shown below. The home page displays the Main Menu on the left side of the screen and System Information on the right side.

The Main Menu links are used to navigate to other menus, and display configuration parameters and statistics.

Figure 3-1 Home Page

3-3

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Configuration Options

Configurable parameters have a dialog box or a drop-down list. Once a configuration change has been made on a page, be sure to click on the

Apply button to confirm the new setting. The following table summarizes the web page configuration buttons.

Button

Apply

Revert

Help

Table 3-1 Web Page Configuration Buttons

Action

Sets specified values to the system.

Cancels specified values and restores current values prior to pressing “Apply.”

Links directly to web help.

Notes: 1.

To ensure proper screen refresh, be sure that Internet Explorer

5.x is configured as follows: Under the menu “Tools / Internet

Options / General / Temporary Internet Files / Settings,” the setting for item “Check for newer versions of stored pages” should be “Every visit to the page.”

When using Internet Explorer 5.0, you may have to manually refresh the screen after making configuration changes by pressing the browser’s refresh button.

Panel Display

The web agent displays an image of the switch’s ports. The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports, including Active (i.e., up or down), Duplex (i.e., half or full duplex), or Flow Control (i.e., with or without flow control). Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port

Configuration page as described on page 9-4.

Figure 3-2 Front Panel Indicators

3-4

AVIGATING THE

ROWSER

NTERFACE

Main Menu

Using the onboard web agent, you can define system parameters, manage and control the switch, and all its ports, or monitor network conditions.

The following table briefly describes the selections available from this program.

Menu

System

System Information

System Mode

System MTU

Switch Information

Bridge Extension

IP Configuration

Jumbo Frames

File Management

Copy Operation

Delete

Set Startup

Line

Console

Telnet

Log

Logs

System Logs

Table 3-2 Switch Main Menu

Description

Provides basic system description, including contact information

Configures the switch to operate in normal mode or

QinQ tunneling mode

Sets the maximum transfer unit for traffic crossing the switch

Shows the number of ports, hardware/firmware version numbers, and power status

Page

Shows the bridge extension parameters

Sets the IP address for management access

Enables support for jumbo frames

Allows the transfer and copying files

Allows deletion of files from the flash memory

Sets the startup file

Sets console port connection parameters

Sets Telnet connection parameters

Sends error messages to a logging process

Stores and displays error messages

3-5

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Table 3-2 Switch Main Menu (Continued)

Menu

Remote Logs

SMTP

Description

Configures the logging of messages to a remote logging process

Sends an SMTP client message to a participating server

Restarts the switch Reset

SNTP

Configuration Configures SNTP client settings, including a specified list of servers

Sets the local time zone for the system clock Clock Time Zone

SNMP

Configuration

Agent Status

SNMPv3

Engine ID

Remote Engine ID

Users

Remote Users

Groups

Views

Security

Configures community strings and related trap functions

Enables or disables SNMP

Sets the SNMP v3 engine ID

Sets the SNMP v3 engine ID on a remote device

Configures SNMP v3 users

Configures SNMP v3 users on a remote device

Configures SNMP v3 groups

Configures SNMP v3 views

User Accounts Configures user names, passwords, and access levels

Authentication Settings Configures authentication sequence, RADIUS and

TACACS

Page

HTTPS Settings Configures secure HTTP settings

6-7

SSH 6-10

Settings

Host-Key Settings

Configures Secure Shell server settings

Generates the host key pair (public and private)

6-16

6-13

3-6

AVIGATING THE

ROWSER

NTERFACE

Table 3-2 Switch Main Menu (Continued)

Menu

Port Security

802.1X

Information

Configuration

Port Configuration

Description

Configures per port security, including status, response for security breach, and maximum allowed

MAC addresses

Page

7-2

Port authentication

Displays global configuration settings

Configures global configuration parameters

Sets the authentication mode for individual ports

Statistics

ACL

Displays protocol statistics for the selected port

Configuration Configures packet filtering based on IP or MAC addresses

Mask Configuration Controls the order in which ACL rules are checked

Port Binding

IP Filter

Binds a port to the specified ACL

Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access

Port

Port Information

Trunk Information

Port Configuration

Displays port connection status

Displays trunk connection status

Configures port connection settings

Trunk Configuration Configures trunk connection settings

Trunk Membership Specifies ports to group into static trunks

9-1

9-4

9-9

LACP

Configuration

Aggregation Port

Allows ports to dynamically join trunks

Configures parameters for link aggregation group members

Displays statistics for LACP protocol messages

9-11

9-13

9-17

Port Counters

Information

Port Internal

Information

Displays settings and operational state for the local side

9-18

3-7

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Table 3-2 Switch Main Menu (Continued)

Menu

Port Neighbors

Information

Description

Displays settings and operational state for the remote side

Page

9-21

Port Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each port

Trunk Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each trunk

Mirror Port

Configuration

Sets the source and target ports for mirroring

9-23

9-25

Sets the input rate limit for each port

9-26

Rate Limit

Input

Port Configuration

Input

Trunk Configuration

Output

Port Configuration

Output

Trunk Configuration

Port Statistics

Address Table

Sets the input rate limit for each trunk

Sets the output rate limit for each port

Sets the output rate limit for each trunk

Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics

9-26

Static Addresses

Dynamic Addresses

Address Aging

Spanning Tree

STA

Information

Displays entries for interface, address or VLAN

Displays or edits static entries in the Address Table

Sets timeout for dynamically learned entries

Displays STA values used for the bridge

Configuration

Port Information

Configures global bridge settings for STP, RSTP and

MSTP

Displays individual port settings for STA

Trunk Information Displays individual trunk settings for STA

Port Configuration Configures individual port settings for STA

Trunk Configuration Configures individual trunk settings for STA

3-8

AVIGATING THE

ROWSER

NTERFACE

Table 3-2 Switch Main Menu (Continued)

Menu

MSTP

Description Page

VLAN Configuration Configures priority and VLANs for a spanning tree instance

Port Information

Trunk Information

Displays port settings for a specified MST instance

Displays trunk settings for a specified MST instance

11-21

11-24

Port Configuration

Configures port settings for a specified MST instance 11-26

Trunk Configuration Configures trunk settings for a specified MST

VLAN instance

11-26

12-1

802.1Q VLAN

GVRP Status

Basic Information

Enables GVRP VLAN registration protocol

Displays information on the VLAN type supported by this switch

Current Table

Static List

Static Table

Static Membership by

Port

Shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or not the port is tagged or untagged

Used to create or remove VLAN groups

Modifies the settings for an existing VLAN

Configures membership type for interfaces, including tagged, untagged or forbidden

12-8

12-10

12-13

Port Configuration Specifies default PVID and VLAN attributes

Trunk Configuration Specifies default trunk VID and VLAN attributes

Private VLAN

Status

Link Status

Protocol VLAN

Configuration

Enables or disables the private VLAN

Configures the private VLAN

Port Configuration

Creates a protocol group, specifying the supported protocols

Maps a protocol group to a VLAN

3-9

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

Table 3-2 Switch Main Menu (Continued)

Menu

Priority

Description

Default Port Priority Sets the default priority for each port

Default Trunk Priority Sets the default priority for each trunk

Traffic Classes

Traffic Classes Status

Maps IEEE 802.1p priority tags to output queues

Enables/disables traffic class priorities (not implemented)

Queue Mode

Queue Scheduling

Sets queue mode to strict priority or Weighted

Round-Robin

Configures Weighted Round Robin queueing

IP Precedence/

DSCP Priority Status

Globally selects IP Precedence or DSCP Priority, or disables both.

IP Precedence Priority Sets IP Type of Service priority, mapping the precedence tag to a class-of-service value

IP DSCP Priority Sets IP Differentiated Services Code Point priority, mapping a DSCP tag to a class-of-service value

IP Port Priority Status Globally enables or disables IP Port Priority

IP Port Priority Sets TCP/UDP port priority, defining the socket number and associated class-of-service value

QoS

DiffServ Configure QoS classification criteria and service policies

Class Map

Policy Map

Service Policy

IGMP Snooping

IGMP Configuration

Creates a class map for a type of traffic

Creates a policy map for multiple interfaces

Applies a policy map defined to an ingress port

Multicast Router

Port Information

Enables multicast filtering; configures parameters for multicast query

Displays the ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast router for each VLAN ID

Page

3-10

AVIGATING THE

ROWSER

NTERFACE

Table 3-2 Switch Main Menu (Continued)

Menu

Static Multicast Router

Port Configuration

Description

Assigns ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast router

IP Multicast Registration

Table

Displays all multicast groups active on this switch, including multicast IP addresses and VLAN ID

IGMP Member

Port Table

Indicates multicast addresses associated with the selected VLAN

MVR

Configuration

Port Information

Trunk Information

Globally enables MVR, sets the MVR VLAN, adds multicast stream addresses

Displays MVR interface type, MVR operational and activity status, and immediate leave status

Group IP Information Displays the ports attached to an MVR multicast stream

Port Configuration Configures MVR interface type and immediate leave status

Trunk Configuration

Group Member

Configuration

Configures MVR interface type and immediate leave status

Statically assigns MVR multicast streams to an interface

DNS

General Configuration Enables DNS; configures domain name and domain list; and specifies IP address of name servers for dynamic lookup

Static Host Table

Cache

Configures static entries for domain name to address mapping

Displays cache entries discovered by designated name servers

Page

3-11

ONFIGURING THE

WITCH

3-12

HAPTER

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

This chapter describes the basic functions required to set up management access to the switch, display or upgrade operating software, or reset the system.

Displaying System Information

You can easily identify the system by displaying the device name, location and contact information.

Field Attributes

• System Name – Name assigned to the switch system.

• Object ID – MIB II object ID for switch’s network management subsystem.

• Location – Specifies the system location.

• Contact – Administrator responsible for the system.

• System Up Time – Length of time the management agent has been up.

These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI.

• System Description – Brief description of device type.

• MAC Address – The physical layer address for this switch.

• Web Server – Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled.

• Web Server Port – Shows the TCP port number used by the web interface.

• Web Secure Server – Shows if management access via HTTPS is enabled.

4-1

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

• Web Secure Server Port – Shows the TCP port used by the HTTPS interface.

• Telnet Server – Shows if management access via Telnet is enabled.

• Telnet Server Port – Shows the TCP port used by the Telnet interface.

• Authentication Login – Shows the user login authentication sequence.

• Jumbo Frame – Shows if jumbo frames are enabled.

• Power Module Status – Shows the power module status.

• Power Module Type – Shows the power module type.

• Fan – Shows the power fan status.

• POST Result – Shows results of the power-on self-test

Web – Click System, System Information. Specify the system name, location, and contact information for the system administrator, then click

Apply. (This page also includes a Telnet button that allows access to the

Command Line Interface via Telnet.)

Figure 4-1 System Information

4-2

ISPLAYING

YSTEM

NFORMATION

CLI – Specify the hostname, location and contact information.

Console(config)#hostname R&D 5

Console(config)#snmp-server location WC 9

Console(config)#snmp-server contact Ted

Console(config)#exit

Console#show system

19-2

20-5

19-7

System Description: 24 port 100FX FTTH Metro Access Switch with 2 Combo ports and 2 module slots

System OID String: 1.3.6.1.4.1.202.20.64

System Information

System Up Time: 0 days, 0 hours, 4 minutes, and 7.84 seconds

System Name: R&D 5

System Location: WC 9

System Contact: Ted

MAC Address (Unit1): 00-12-CF-21-DC-E0

Web Server: Enabled

Web Server Port: 80

Web Secure Server: Enabled

Web Secure Server Port: 443

Telnet Server: Enable

Telnet Server Port: 23

Jumbo Frame: Disabled

Power Module A Status : UP

Power Module B Status : Not present

Power Module A Type :

Power Module B Type : [None]

Fan(1) : OK

Fan(2) : OK

Fan(3) : OK

POST Result:

DUMMY Test 1 ................. PASS

UART Loopback Test ........... PASS

DRAM Test .................... PASS

Timer Test ................... PASS

I2C Bus Initialization ....... PASS

Switch Int Loopback Test ..... PASS

Console#

4-3

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

Configuring the Switch for

Normal Operation or Tunneling Mode

The system can be configured to operate in normal mode or IEEE 802.1Q

(QinQ) tunneling mode which is used for passing Layer 2 traffic across a service provider’s metropolitan area network.

Command Attributes

System Mode – Sets the switch to operate in one of the following modes:

• Normal Mode – The switch functions in normal operating mode. (This is the default operating mode.)

• QinQ Mode – Sets the switch to QinQ mode, and allows the QinQ tunnel port to be configured. For an explanation of QinQ see

“Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling” on page 12-17.

Web – Click System, System Mode. Select the required system mode, and click Apply.

Figure 4-2 System Mode

4-4

ONFIGURING THE

AXIMUM

RAME

IZE

CLI – This example sets the switch to operate in QinQ mode.

Console(config)#system mode qinq

Console(config)#exit

Console#show system mode

System mode is QinQ mode

Console#

19-10

19-11

Configuring the Maximum Frame Size

The maximum transfer unit (or frame size) for traffic crossing the switch should be set to minimize unnecessary fragmentation and maximize the transfer of large sequential data streams.

Command Usage

• Fast Ethernet ports are only affected by the System MTU setting.

• Gigabit Ethernet ports are only affected by the Jumbo frame size setting.

• The switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data transfers by supporting jumbo frames on Gigabit Ethernet ports of up to 9216 bytes. Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1.5 KB, using jumbo frames for Gigabit Ethernet significantly reduces the per-packet overhead required to process protocol encapsulation fields.

• Frame sizes for Fast Ethernet ports can be extended up to 1546 bytes, and are used primarily to allow for additional header fields – not to significantly increase the per-packet data size. These Fast Ethernet extended fames and are more often called “baby jumbo frames.”

• To use jumbo frames, both the source and destination end nodes (such as a computer or server) must support this feature. Also, when the connection is operating at full duplex, all switches in the network between the two end nodes must be able to accept the extended frame size. And for half-duplex connections, all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo frames.

• After setting the jumbo frame size, remember to implement the new setting by enabling jumbo frames as described in the next section.

4-5

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

Command Attributes

• System MTU (1500-1548) – Specifies the MTU size for Fast Ethernet ports. (Range: 1500-1548 bytes)

• Jumbo (1500-9216) – Specifies the jumbo frame size (MTU) for Gigabit

Ethernet ports. (Range: 1500-9216 bytes)

Web – Click System, System MTU. Set the maximum frame size for Fast

Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ports, then click Apply.

Figure 4-3 System MTU

CLI – This example sets the MTU for Fast Ethernet ports to 1528 bytes

Console(config)#system mtu 1528

Console(config)#exit

Console#show system mtu

System MTU size is 1528 Bytes

System Jumbo MTU size is 1518 Bytes

Console#

19-13

19-14

4-6

ONFIGURING

UPPORT FOR

UMBO

RAMES

Configuring Support for Jumbo Frames

The switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 9216 bytes for Gigabit

Ethernet. Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1.5

KB, using jumbo frames significantly reduces the per-packet overhead required to process protocol encapsulation fields. Frame sizes for Fast

Ethernet ports can be extended up to 1546 bytes, and are used primarily to allow for additional header fields – not to significantly increase the per-packet data size.

Command Usage

To use jumbo frames, both the source and destination end nodes (such as a computer or server) must support this feature. Also, when the connection is operating at full duplex, all switches in the network between the two end nodes must be able to accept the extended frame size. And for half-duplex connections, all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo frames.

Command Attributes

Jumbo Packet Status – Configures support for jumbo frames.

(Default: Disabled)

Web – Click System, Jumbo Frames. Enable or disable support for jumbo frames, and click Apply.

Figure 4-4 Configuring Support for Jumbo Frames

CLI – This example enables jumbo frames globally for the switch.

Console(config)#jumbo frame

Console(config)#

19-12

4-7

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

Displaying Switch Hardware/Software Versions

Use the Switch Information page to display hardware/firmware version numbers for the main board and management software, as well as the power status of the system.

Field Attributes

Main Board

• Serial Number – The serial number of the switch.

• Hardware Version – Hardware version of the main board.

• EPLD Version – Version number of EEPROM Programmable Logic

Device.

• Number of Ports – Number of built-in ports.

• Main Power Status – Displays the status of the primary power supply.

• Redundant Power Status – Displays the status of the redundant power supply.

Management Software

• Unit ID – Unit number in stack.

• Loader Version – Version number of loader code.

• Boot-ROM Version – Version of Power-On Self-Test (POST) and boot code.

• Operation Code Version – Version number of runtime code.

• Role – Shows that this switch is operating as Master.

4-8

ISPLAYING

WITCH

ARDWARE

OFTWARE

ERSIONS

Web – Click System, Switch Information.

Figure 4-5 Switch Information

CLI – Use the following command to display version information.

Console#show version

Unit 1

Serial Number: 0000E8900000

Hardware Version: R01

EPLD Version: 0.01

Number of Ports: 29

19-9

Agent (Master)

Unit ID: 1

Loader Version: 1.0.0.1

Boot ROM Version: 1.0.0.7

Operation Code Version: 1.0.1.5

Console#

4-9

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities

The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support

Multicast Filtering, Traffic Classes, and Virtual LANs. You can access these extensions to display default settings for the key variables.

Field Attributes

• Extended Multicast Filtering Services – This switch does not support the filtering of individual multicast addresses based on GMRP (GARP

Multicast Registration Protocol).

• Traffic Classes – This switch provides mapping of user priorities to

multiple traffic classes. (Refer to “Class of Service” on page 13-1.)

• Static Entry Individual Port – This switch allows static filtering for

unicast and multicast addresses. (Refer to “Setting Static Addresses” on page 10-1.)

• VLAN Learning – This switch uses Independent VLAN Learning

(IVL), where each port maintains its own filtering database.

• Configurable PVID Tagging – This switch allows you to override the default Port VLAN ID (PVID used in frame tags) and egress status

(VLAN-Tagged or Untagged) on each port. (Refer to “VLAN

Configuration” on page 12-1.)

• Local VLAN Capable – This switch does not support multiple local bridges outside of the scope of 802.1Q defined VLANs.

• GMRP – GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP) allows network devices to register endstations with multicast groups. This switch does not support GMRP; it uses the Internet Group Management

Protocol (IGMP) to provide automatic multicast filtering.

4-10

ISPLAYING

RIDGE

XTENSION

APABILITIES

Web – Click System, Bridge Extension.

Figure 4-6 Displaying Bridge Extension Configuration

CLI – Enter the following command.

Console#show bridge-ext

Max support VLAN numbers: 256

Max support VLAN ID: 4094

Extended multicast filtering services: No

Static entry individual port: Yes

VLAN learning: IVL

Configurable PVID tagging: Yes

Local VLAN capable: No

Traffic classes: Enabled

Global GVRP status: Disabled

GMRP: Disabled

Console#

30-3

4-11

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

Setting the Switch’s IP Address

This section describes how to configure an IP interface for management access over the network. The IP address for this switch is obtained via

DHCP by default. To manually configure an address, you need to change the switch’s default settings to values that are compatible with your network. You may also need to a establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another network segment.

You can manually configure a specific IP address, or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server. Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program.

Command Attributes

• Management VLAN – ID of the configured VLAN (1-4093). By default, all ports on the stack are members of VLAN 1. However, the management station can be attached to a port belonging to any VLAN, as long as that VLAN has been assigned an IP address.

• IP Address Mode – Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via manual configuration (Static), Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

(DHCP), or Boot Protocol (BOOTP). If DHCP/BOOTP is enabled, IP will not function until a reply has been received from the server.

Requests will be broadcast periodically by the switch for an IP address.

(DHCP/BOOTP values can include the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.)

• IP Address – Address of the VLAN to which the management station is attached. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. (Default: 0.0.0.0)

• Subnet Mask – This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets. (Default: 255.0.0.0)

• Gateway IP Address – IP address of the gateway router between the stack and management stations that exist on other network segments.

(Default: 0.0.0.0)

4-12

ETTING THE

WITCH

’

IP A

DDRESS

• MAC Address – The physical layer address for this switch.

Manual Configuration

Web – Click System, System, IP Configuration. Select the VLAN through which the management station is attached. Enter the IP address, subnet mask and gateway, then click Apply.

Figure 4-7 IP Interface Configuration - Manual

CLI – Specify the management interface, IP address and default gateway.

Console#config

Console(config)#interface vlan 1

Console(config-if)#ip address 10.1.0.253 255.255.255.0

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#ip default-gateway 10.1.0.254

Console(config)#

24-2

35-2

35-3

4-13

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

Using DHCP/BOOTP

If your network provides DHCP/BOOTP services, you can configure the stack to be dynamically configured by these services.

Web – Click System, IP Configuration. Specify the VLAN to which the management station is attached, set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or

BOOTP. Click Apply to save your changes. Then click Restart DHCP to immediately request a new address. Note that the stack will also broadcast a request for IP configuration settings on each power reset.

4-14

Figure 4-8 IP Interface Configuration - DHCP

Note: If you lose your management connection, make a console connection to the Master unit and enter “show ip interface” to determine the new stack address.

CLI – Specify the management interface, and set the IP address mode to

DHCP or BOOTP, and then enter the “ip dhcp restart” command.

Console#config

Console(config)#interface vlan 1

Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp

Console(config-if)#end

24-2

35-2

Console#ip dhcp restart

Console#show ip interface

IP Address and Netmask: 192.168.0.100 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,

Address Mode: DHCP

Console#

35-4

35-5

ANAGING

IRMWARE

Renewing DCHP – DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a specific period of time. If the address expires or the stack is moved to another network segment, you will lose management access to the stack. In this case, you can reboot the stack or submit a client request to restart

DHCP service via the CLI.

Web – If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning, you will not be able to renew the IP settings via the web interface. You can only restart DHCP service via the web interface if the current address is still available.

CLI – Enter the following command to restart DHCP service.

Console#ip dhcp restart

Console#

35-4

Managing Firmware

You can upload/download firmware to or from a TFTP server, or copy files to and from switch units in a stack. By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server, that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation. You can also set the switch to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version. You must specify the method of file transfer, along with the file type and file names as required.

Command Attributes

• File Transfer Method – The firmware copy operation includes these options:

- file to file – Copies a file within the switch directory, assigning it a new name.

- file to tftp – Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server.

- tftp to file – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch.

• TFTP Server IP Address – The IP address of a TFTP server.

• File Type – Specify opcode (operational code) to copy firmware.

4-15

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

• File Name – The file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or

31 characters for files on the switch. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”,

“-”, “_”)

Note: Up to two copies of the system software (i.e., the runtime firmware) can be stored in the file directory on the switch. The currently designated startup version of this file cannot be deleted.

Downloading System Software from a Server

When downloading runtime code, you can specify the destination file name to replace the current image, or first download the file using a different name from the current runtime code file, and then set the new file as the startup file.

Web – Click System, File Management, Copy Operation. Select “tftp to file” as the file transfer method, enter the IP address of the TFTP server, set the file type to “opcode,” enter the file name of the software to download, select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name, then click Apply. If you replaced the current firmware used for startup and want to start using the new operation code, reboot the system via the System/Reset menu.

4-16

Figure 4-9 Copy Firmware

ANAGING

IRMWARE

If you download to a new destination file, go to the File Management, Set

Start-Up menu, mark the operation code file used at startup, and click

Apply. To start the new firmware, reboot the system via the System/Reset menu.

Figure 4-10 Setting the Startup Code

To delete a file select System, File Management, Delete. Select the file name from the given list by checking the tick box and click Apply. Note that the file currently designated as the startup code cannot be deleted.

Figure 4-11 Deleting Files

4-17

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

CLI – To download new firmware form a TFTP server, enter the IP address of the TFTP server, select “config” as the file type, then enter the source and destination file names. When the file has finished downloading, set the new file to start up the system, and then restart the switch.

To start the new firmware, enter the “reload” command or reboot the system.

Console#copy tftp file

TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.19

Choose file type:

1. config: 2. opcode: <1-2>: 2

Source file name: V1.0.0.6.bix

Destination file name: V1006

\Write to FLASH Programming.

-Write to FLASH finish.

Success.

Console#config

Console(config)#boot system opcode:V1006

Console(config)#exit

Console#reload

19-22

18-5

Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings

You can upload/download configuration settings to/from a TFTP server, or copy files to and from switch units in a stack. The configuration file can be later downloaded to restore the switch’s settings.

Command Attributes

• File Transfer Method – The configuration copy operation includes these options:

- file to file – Copies a file within the switch directory, assigning it a new name.

- file to running-config – Copies a file in the switch to the running configuration.

- file to startup-config – Copies a file in the switch to the startup configuration.

- file to tftp – Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server.

- running-config to file – Copies the running configuration to a file.

4-18

AVING OR

ESTORING

ONFIGURATION

ETTINGS

- running-config to startup-config – Copies the running config to the startup config.

- running-config to tftp – Copies the running configuration to a TFTP server.

- startup-config to file – Copies the startup configuration to a file on the switch.

- startup-config to running-config – Copies the startup config to the running config.

- startup-config to tftp – Copies the startup configuration to a TFTP server.

- tftp to file – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch.

- tftp to running-config – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the running config.

- tftp to startup-config – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the startup config.

• TFTP Server IP Address – The IP address of a TFTP server.

• File Type – Specify config (configuration) to copy configuration settings.

• File Name — The configuration file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9,

“.”, “-”, “_”)

Note: The maximum number of user-defined configuration files is limited only by available flash memory space.

4-19

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server

You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the startup file, or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination file to directly replace it. Note that the file “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” can be copied to the TFTP server, but cannot be used as the destination on the switch.

Web – Click System, File Management, Copy Operation. Choose “tftp to startup-config” or “tftp to file,” and enter the IP address of the TFTP server. Specify the name of the file to download, select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name, and then click Apply.

Figure 4-12 Downloading Configuration Settings for Start-Up

4-20

AVING OR

ESTORING

ONFIGURATION

ETTINGS

If you download to a new file name using “tftp to startup-config” or “tftp to file,” the file is automatically set as the start-up configuration file. To use the new settings, reboot the system via the System/Reset menu. You can also select any configuration file as the start-up configuration by using the

System/File Management/Set Start-Up page.

Figure 4-13 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings

CLI – Enter the IP address of the TFTP server, specify the source file on the server, set the startup file name on the switch, and then restart the switch.

– Sets the syslog severity threshold level (see table on page 4-27)

Console#copy tftp startup-config

TFTP server ip address: 192.168.1.19

Source configuration file name: config-1

Startup configuration file name [] : startup

\Write to FLASH Programming.

-Write to FLASH finish.

Success.

Console#reload

To select another configuration file as the start-up configuration, use the boot system command and then restart the switch.

Console#config

Console(config)#boot system config: startup

Console(config)#exit

Console#reload

19-22

18-5

4-21

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

Console Port Settings

You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the switch’s serial console port. Management access through the console port is controlled by various parameters, including a password, timeouts, and basic communication settings. These parameters can be configured via the web or CLI interface.

4-22

Command Attributes

• Login Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI. If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the connection is terminated for the session.

(Range: 0 - 300 seconds; Default: 0)

• Exec Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected. If user input is not detected within the timeout interval, the current session is terminated. (Range: 0 - 65535 seconds; Default: 0 seconds)

• Password Threshold – Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the number of failed logon attempts. When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time (set by the Silent Time parameter) before allowing the next logon attempt. (Range: 0-120; Default: 3 attempts)

• Silent Time – Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts has been exceeded. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 0)

• Data Bits – Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port. If parity is being generated, specify 7 data bits per character. If no parity is required, specify 8 data bits per character. (Default: 8 bits)

• Parity – Defines the generation of a parity bit. Communication protocols provided by some terminals can require a specific parity bit setting. Specify Even, Odd, or None. (Default: None)

• Speed – Sets the terminal line’s baud rate for transmit (to terminal) and receive (from terminal). Set the speed to match the baud rate of the

ONSOLE

ORT

ETTINGS device connected to the serial port. (Range: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 baud, Auto; Default: Auto)

• Stop Bits – Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte.

(Range: 1-2; Default: 1 stop bit)

• Password 1 – Specifies a password for the line connection. When a connection is started on a line with password protection, the system prompts for the password. If you enter the correct password, the system shows a prompt. (Default: No password)

•

– Enables password checking at login. You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the

Password parameter, or by passwords set up for specific user-name accounts. (Default: Local)

Web – Click System, Line, Console. Specify the console port connection parameters as required, then click Apply.

1. CLI only.

Figure 4-14 Configuring the Console Port

4-23

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

CLI – Enter Line Configuration mode for the console, then specify the connection parameters as required. To display the current console port settings, use the show line command from the Normal Exec level.

Console(config)#line console

Console(config-line)#login local

Console(config-line)#password 0 secret

Console(config-line)#timeout login response 0

Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 0

Console(config-line)#password-thresh 5

Console(config-line)#silent-time 60

Console(config-line)#databits 8

Console(config-line)#parity none

Console(config-line)#speed auto

Console(config-line)#stopbits 1

Console(config-line)#end

Console#show line console

Console configuration:

Password threshold: 5 times

Interactive timeout: Disabled

Silent time: 60

Baudrate: auto

Databits: 8

Parity: none

Stopbits: 1

Console#

19-24

19-25

19-26

19-27

19-28

19-29

19-30

19-31

19-32

19-33

19-34

Telnet Settings

You can access the onboard configuration program over the network using

Telnet (i.e., a virtual terminal). Management access via Telnet can be enabled/disabled and other various parameters set, including the TCP port number, timeouts, and a password. These parameters can be configured via the web or CLI interface.

Command Attributes

• Telnet Status – Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch.

(Default: Enabled)

• Telnet Port Number – Sets the TCP port number for Telnet on the switch. (Range: 1 - 65535; Default: 23)

4-24

ELNET

ETTINGS

(Range: 0 - 300 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)

• Password 2 – Specifies a password for the line connection. When a connection is started on a line with password protection, the system prompts for the password. If you enter the correct password, the system shows a prompt. (Default: No password)

•

– Enables password checking at login. You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the

Password parameter, or by passwords set up for specific user-name accounts. (Default: Local)

2. CLI only.

4-25

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

Web – Click System, Line, Telnet. Specify the connection parameters for

Telnet access, then click Apply.

Figure 4-15 Configuring the Telnet Interface

CLI – Enter Line Configuration mode for a virtual terminal, then specify the connection parameters as required. To display the current virtual terminal settings, use the show line command from the Normal Exec level.

Console(config)#line vty

Console(config-line)#login local

Console(config-line)#password 0 secret

Console(config-line)#timeout login response 300

Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 600

Console(config-line)#password-thresh 3

Console(config-line)#end

Console#show line vty

VTY configuration:

Password threshold: 3 times

Interactive timeout: 600 sec

Console#

19-24

19-25

19-26

19-27

19-28

19-29

19-34

4-26

ONFIGURING

VENT

OGGING

Configuring Event Logging

The switch allows you to control the logging of error messages, including the type of events that are recorded in switch memory, logging to a remote

System Log (syslog) server, and displays a list of recent event messages.

System Log Configuration

The system allows you to enable or disable event logging, and specify which levels are logged to RAM or flash memory.

Severe error messages that are logged to flash memory are permanently stored in the switch to assist in troubleshooting network problems. Up to

4096 log entries can be stored in the flash memory, with the oldest entries being overwritten first when the available log memory (256 kilobytes) has been exceeded.

The System Logs page allows you to configure and limit system messages that are logged to flash or RAM memory. The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to flash and levels 0 to 7 to be logged to RAM.

Command Attributes

• System Log Status – Enables/disables the logging of debug or error messages to the logging process. (Default: Enabled)

• Flash Level – Limits log messages saved to the switch’s permanent flash memory for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 3 is specified, all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be logged to flash.

(Range: 0-7, Default: 3)

Level Severity Name

7 Debug

Informational

Notice

Table 4-1 Logging Levels

Description

Debugging messages

Informational messages only

Normal but significant condition, such as cold start

4-27

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

Table 4-1 Logging Levels (Continued)

Level Severity Name

Warning

Error

Critical

Description

Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)

Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)

Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory error - resource exhausted)

Alert

Emergency

Immediate action needed

System unusable

* There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release.

• RAM Level – Limits log messages saved to the switch’s temporary RAM memory for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 7 is specified, all messages from level 0 to level 7 will be logged to RAM.

(Range: 0-7, Default: 7)

Note: The Flash Level must be equal to or less than the RAM Level.

Web – Click System, Logs, System Logs. Specify System Log Status, set the level of event messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory, then click

Apply.

Figure 4-16 System Logs

4-28

ONFIGURING

VENT

OGGING

CLI – Enable system logging and then specify the level of messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory. Use the show logging command to display the current settings.

19-36

19-37

Console(config)#logging on

Console(config)#logging history ram 0

Console(config)#

Console#show logging ram

Syslog logging: Disabled

History logging in RAM: level emergencies

Console#

19-42

Remote Log Configuration

The Remote Logs page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are sent to syslog servers or other management stations. You can also limit the event messages sent to only those messages at or above a specified level.

Command Attributes

• Remote Log Status – Enables/disables the logging of debug or error messages to the remote logging process. (Default: Disabled)

• Logging Facility – Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages. There are eight facility types specified by values of 16 to 23.

The facility type is used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service.

The attribute specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages. (See

RFC 3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch. However, it may be used by the syslog server to process messages, such as sorting or storing messages in the corresponding database. (Range: 16-23, Default: 23)

• Logging Trap – Limits log messages that are sent to the remote syslog server for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 3 is specified, all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be sent to the remote server. (Range: 0-7, Default: 7)

• Host IP List – Displays the list of remote server IP addresses that will receive syslog messages. The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five.

4-29

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

• Host IP Address – Specifies a new server IP address to add to the Host

IP List.

Web – Click System, Logs, Remote Logs. To add an IP address to the Host

IP List, type the new IP address in the Host IP Address box, and then click

Add. To delete an IP address, click the entry in the Host IP List, and then click Remove.

Figure 4-17 Remote Logs

4-30

ONFIGURING

VENT

OGGING

CLI – Enter the syslog server host IP address, choose the facility type and set the logging trap.

Console(config)#logging host 10.1.0.9

Console(config)#logging facility 23

Console(config)#logging trap 4

Console(config)#logging trap

Console(config)#exit

Console#show logging trap

Syslog logging: Enabled

REMOTELOG status: Disabled

REMOTELOG facility type: local use 7

REMOTELOG level type: Warning conditions

REMOTELOG server ip address: 10.1.0.9

REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0

Console#

19-38

19-39

19-40

19-42

Displaying Log Messages

Use the Logs page to scroll through the logged system and event messages.

The switch can store up to 2048 log entries in temporary random access memory (RAM; i.e., memory flushed on power reset) and up to 4096 entries in permanent flash memory.

Web – Click System, Log, Logs.

Figure 4-18 Displaying Logs

4-31

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

CLI – This example shows the event message stored in RAM.

Console#show log ram

[1] 00:01:30 2001-01-01

"VLAN 1 link-up notification."

level: 6, module: 5, function: 1, and event no.: 1

[0] 00:01:30 2001-01-01

"Unit 1, Port 1 link-up notification."

level: 6, module: 5, function: 1, and event no.: 1

Console#

19-42

Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts

To alert system administrators of problems, the switch can use SMTP

(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) to send email messages when triggered by logging events of a specified level. The messages are sent to specified

SMTP servers on the network and can be retrieved using POP or IMAP clients.

Command Attributes

• Admin Status – Enables/disables the SMTP function. (Default:

Enabled)

• Email Source Address – Sets the email address used for the “From” field in alert messages. You may use a symbolic email address that identifies the switch, or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch.

• Severity

used to trigger alert messages. All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients. For example, using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0. (Default: Level 7)

• SMTP Server List – Specifies a list of up to three recipient SMTP servers. The switch attempts to connect to the other listed servers if the first fails. Use the New SMTP Server text field and the Add/Remove buttons to configure the list.

• Email Destination Address List – Specifies the email recipients of alert messages. You can specify up to five recipients. Use the New Email

Destination Address text field and the Add/Remove buttons to configure the list.

4-32

ONFIGURING

VENT

OGGING

Web – Click System, Log, SMTP. Enable SMTP, specify a source email address, and select the minimum severity level. To add an IP address to the

SMTP Server List, type the new IP address in the SMTP Server field and click Add. To delete an IP address, click the entry in the SMTP Server List and click Remove. Specify up to five email addresses to receive the alert messages, and click Apply.

Figure 4-19 Enabling and Configuring SMTP Alerts

4-33

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

CLI – Enter the IP address of at least one SMTP server, set the syslog severity level to trigger an email message, and specify the switch (source) and up to five recipient (destination) email addresses. Enable SMTP with the logging sendmail command to complete the configuration. Use the show logging sendmail command to display the current SMTP configuration.

Console(config)#logging sendmail host 192.168.1.4

Console(config)#logging sendmail level 3

Console(config)#logging sendmail source-email [email protected]

Console(config)#logging sendmail destination-email [email protected]

Console(config)#logging sendmail

Console(config)#exit

Console#show logging sendmail

SMTP servers

-----------------------------------------------

1. 192.168.1.4

SMTP minimum severity level: 4

SMTP destination email addresses

-----------------------------------------------

1. [email protected]

SMTP source email address: [email protected]

SMTP status: Enabled

Console#

19-45

19-46

19-47

19-48

19-49

Resetting the System

Web – Click System, Reset. Click the Reset button to restart the switch.

When prompted, confirm that you want reset the switch.

Figure 4-20 Resetting the System

4-34

ETTING THE

YSTEM

LOCK

CLI – Use the reload command to restart the switch.

Console#reload

System will be restarted, continue <y/n>?

Note: When restarting the system, it will always run the Power-On

Self-Test.

18-5

Setting the System Clock

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) allows the switch to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server (SNTP or NTP).

Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries. You can also manually

set the clock using the CLI. (See “calendar set” on page 19-55.) If the clock

is not set, the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup.

When the SNTP client is enabled, the switch periodically sends a request for a time update to a configured time server. You can configure up to three time server IP addresses. The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence.

Configuring SNTP

You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to time servers.

Command Attributes

• SNTP Client – Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client.

This requires at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP Server field. (Default: Disabled)

• SNTP Poll Interval – Sets the interval between sending requests for a time update from a time server. (Range: 16-16384 seconds; Default: 16 seconds)

4-35

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

• SNTP Server – Sets the IP address for up to three time servers. The switch attempts to update the time from the first server, if this fails it attempts an update from the next server in the sequence.

Web – Select SNTP, Configuration. Modify any of the required parameters, and click Apply.

Figure 4-21 SNTP Configuration

CLI – This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client and then displays the current time and settings.

Console(config)#sntp client

Console(config)#sntp poll 16

Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19 137.82.140.80

128.250.36.2

Console(config)#exit

Console#show sntp

Current time: Jan 6 14:56:05 2004

Poll interval: 60

Current mode: unicast

SNTP status : Enabled

SNTP server 10.1.0.19 137.82.140.80 128.250.36.2

Current server: 128.250.36.2

Console#

19-50

19-52

19-51

19-53

4-36

ETTING THE

YSTEM

LOCK

Setting the Time Zone

SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time (or UTC, formerly Greenwich

Mean Time, or GMT) based on the time at the Earth’s prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to your local time, you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east

(before) or west (after) of UTC.

Command Attributes

• Current Time – Displays the current time.

• Name – Assigns a name to the time zone. (Range: 1-29 characters)

• Hours (0-13) – The number of hours before/after UTC.

• Minutes (0-59) – The number of minutes before/after UTC.

• Direction – Configures the time zone to be before (east) or after (west)

UTC.

Web – Select SNTP, Clock Time Zone. Set the offset for your time zone relative to the UTC, and click Apply.

Figure 4-22 Clock Time Zone

CLI - This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock.

Console(config)#clock timezone Dhaka hours 6 minute 0 after-UTC

Console#

19-54

4-37

ASIC

ANAGEMENT

ASKS

4-38

HAPTER

IMPLE

ETWORK

ANAGEMENT

ROTOCOL

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network.

Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches, routers and host computers. SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network environment, as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential problems.

Managed devices supporting SNMP contain software, which runs locally on the device and is referred to as an agent. A defined set of variables, known as managed objects, is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device. These objects are defined in a Management

Information Base (MIB) that provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the agent. SNMP defines both the format of the

MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information over the network.

The switch includes an onboard agent that supports SNMP versions 1, 2c, and 3. This agent continuously monitors the status of the switch hardware, as well as the traffic passing through its ports. A network management station can access this information using software such as HP OpenView.

Access to the onboard agent from clients using SNMP v1 and v2c is controlled by community strings. To communicate with the switch, the management station must first submit a valid community string for authentication.

5-1

IMPLE

ETWORK

ANAGEMENT

ROTOCOL

Access to the switch using from clients using SNMPv3 provides additional security features that cover message integrity, authentication, and encryption; as well as controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree.

The SNMPv3 security structure consists of security models, with each model having it’s own security levels. There are three security models defined, SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3. Users are assigned to

“groups” that are defined by a security model and specified security levels.

Each group also has a defined security access to set of MIB objects for reading and writing, which are known as “views.” The switch has a default view (all MIB objects) and default groups defined for security models v1 and v2c. The following table shows the security models and levels available and the system default settings.

Table 5-1 SNMPv3 Security Models and Levels

Model Level v1 v1 v1 v2c

Group noAuthNoPriv public

(read only) noAuthNoPriv private

(read/write)

Read View Write

View defaultview none

Notify

View none defaultview defaultview none

Security

Community string only

Community string only noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Community string only noAuthNoPriv public

(read only) defaultview none none Community string only v2c v2c v3 noAuthNoPriv private

(read/write) defaultview defaultview none Community string only noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Community string only noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined A user name match only

5-2

Table 5-1 SNMPv3 Security Models and Levels (Continued)

Model Level v3 v3

Group Security

AuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Provides user authenticati on via MD5 or SHA algorithms

AuthPriv

Read View Write

View

Notify

View user defined user defined user defined user defined Provides user authenticati on via MD5 or SHA algorithms and data privacy using DES

56-bit encryption

Note: The predefined default groups and view can be deleted from the system. You can then define customized groups and views for the

SNMP clients that require access.

5-3

IMPLE

ETWORK

ANAGEMENT

ROTOCOL

Enabling the SNMP Agent

Enables SNMPv3 service for all management clients (i.e., versions 1, 2c, 3).

Command Attributes

SNMP Agent Status – Enables SNMP on the switch.

Web – Click SNMP, Agent Status. Enable the SNMP Agent by marking the Enabled checkbox, and click Apply.

Figure 5-1 Enabling the SNMP Agent

CLI – The following example enables SNMP on the switch.

Console(config)#snmp-server

Console(config)#

20-2

Setting Community Access Strings

You may configure up to five community strings authorized for management access by clients using SNMP v1 and v2c. All community strings used for IP Trap Managers should be listed in this table. For security reasons, you should consider removing the default strings.

Command Attributes

• SNMP Community Capability – The switch supports up to five community strings.

• Current – Displays a list of the community strings currently configured.

5-4

ETTING

OMMUNITY

CCESS

TRINGS

• Community String – A community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol.

Default strings: “public” (read-only access), “private” (read/write access)

Range: 1-32 characters, case sensitive

• Access Mode – Specifies the access rights for the community string:

Read-Only – Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects.

Read/Write – Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.

Web – Click SNMP, Configuration. Add new community strings as required, select the access rights from the Access Mode drop-down list, then click Add.

Figure 5-2 Configuring SNMP Community Strings

CLI – The following example adds the string “spiderman” with read/write access.

Console(config)#snmp-server community spiderman rw

Console(config)#

20-4

5-5

IMPLE

ETWORK

ANAGEMENT

ROTOCOL

Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types

Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to specified trap managers. You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to your management station (using network management platforms such as HP OpenView). You can specify up to five management stations that will receive authentication failure messages and other trap messages from the switch.

Command Usage

• If you specify an SNMP Version 3 host, then the “Trap Manager

Community String” is interpreted as an SNMP user name. If you use V3 authentication or encryption options (authNoPriv or authPriv), the user

name must first be defined in the SNMPv3 Users page (page 5-12).

Otherwise, the authentication password and/or privacy password will not exist, and the switch will not authorize SNMP access for the host.

However, if you specify a V3 host with the no authentication (noAuth) option, an SNMP user account will be automatically generated, and the switch will authorize SNMP access for the host.

• Notifications are issued by the switch as trap messages by default. The recipient of a trap message does not send a response to the switch. Traps are therefore not as reliable as inform messages, which include a request for acknowledgement of receipt. Informs can be used to ensure that critical information is received by the host. However, note that informs consume more system resources because they must be kept in memory until a response is received. Informs also add to network traffic. You should consider these effects when deciding whether to issue notifications as traps or informs.

To send an inform to a SNMPv2c host, complete these steps:

1. Enable the SNMP agent (page 5-4).

2. Enable trap informs as described in the following pages.

3. Create a view with the required notification messages (page 5-24).

4. Create a group that includes the required notify view (page 5-18).

5-6

PECIFYING

RAP

ANAGERS AND

RAP

YPES

To send an inform to a SNMPv3 host, complete these steps:

1. Enable the SNMP agent (page 5-4).

2. Enable trap informs as described in the following pages.

3. Create a view with the required notification messages (page 5-24).

4. Create a group that includes the required notify view (page 5-18).

5. Specify a remote engine ID where the user resides (page 5-11).

6. Then configure a remote user (page 5-15).

Command Attributes

• Trap Manager Capability – This switch supports up to five trap managers.

• Current – Displays a list of the trap managers currently configured.

• Trap Manager IP Address – IP address of a new management station to receive notification messages.

• Trap Manager Community String – Specifies a valid community string for the new trap manager entry. Though you can set this string in the Trap Managers table, we recommend that you define this string in the

SNMP Configuration page (for Version 1 or 2c clients), or define a corresponding “User Name” in the SNMPv3 Users page (for Version 3 clients). (Range: 1-32 characters, case sensitive)

• Trap UDP Port – Specifies the UDP port number used by the trap manager.

• Trap Version – Indicates if the user is running SNMP v1, v2c, or v3.

(Default: v1)

• Trap Security Level – When trap version 3 is selected, you must specify one of the following security levels. (Default: noAuthNoPriv)

noAuthNoPriv – There is no authentication or encryption used in

SNMP communications.

AuthNoPriv – SNMP communications use authentication, but the data is not encrypted (only available for the SNMPv3 security model).

AuthPriv – SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption (only available for the SNMPv3 security model).

5-7

IMPLE

ETWORK

ANAGEMENT

ROTOCOL

• Trap Inform – Notifications are sent as inform messages. Note that this option is only available for version 2c and 3 hosts. (Default: traps are used)

Timeout – The number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment before resending an inform message. (Range: 0-2147483647 centiseconds; Default: 1500 centiseconds)

Retry times – The maximum number of times to resend an inform message if the recipient does not acknowledge receipt. (Range: 0-255;

Default: 3)

• Enable Authentication Traps 3 – Issues a notification message to specified IP trap managers whenever authentication of an SNMP request fails. (Default: Enabled)

•

Enable Link-up and Link-down Traps 3 – Issues a notification

message whenever a port link is established or broken. (Default:

Enabled)

3. These are legacy notifications and therefore when used for SNMP Version 3 hosts, they must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding entries in the Notification View

(page 5-18).

5-8

PECIFYING

RAP

ANAGERS AND

RAP

YPES

Web – Click SNMP, Configuration. Enter the IP address and community string for each management station that will receive trap messages, specify the UDP port, SNMP trap version, trap security level (for v3 clients), trap inform settings (for v2c/v3 clients), and then click Add. Select the trap types required using the check boxes for Authentication and Link-up/ down traps, and then click Apply.

Figure 5-3 Configuring SNMP Trap Managers

CLI – This example adds a trap manager and enables authentication traps.

Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.23 private version 2c udp-port 162

20-6

Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps authentication

20-9

5-9

IMPLE

ETWORK

ANAGEMENT

ROTOCOL

Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access

To configure SNMPv3 management access to the switch, follow these steps:

1. If you want to change the default engine ID, do so before configuring other SNMP parameters.

2. Specify read and write access views for the switch MIB tree.

3. Configure SNMP user groups with the required security model (i.e.,

SNMP v1, v2c or v3) and security level (i.e., authentication and privacy).

4. Assign SNMP users to groups, along with their specific authentication and privacy passwords.

Setting a Local Engine ID

An SNMPv3 engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides on the switch. This engine protects against message replay, delay, and redirection.

The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets.

A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch.

This is referred to as the default engine ID. If the local engineID is deleted or changed, all SNMP users will be cleared. You will need to reconfigure all existing users.

A new engine ID can be specified by entering 10 to 64 hexadecimal characters. If less than 64 characters are specified, trailing zeroes are added to the value. For example, the value “0123456789” is equivalent to

“0123456789” followed by 54 zeroes.

5-10

ONFIGURING

SNMP

3 M

ANAGEMENT

CCESS

Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Engine ID. Enter an ID of up to 64 hexadecimal characters and then click Save.

Figure 5-4 Setting the SNMPv3 Engine ID

CLI – This example sets an SNMPv3 engine ID.

Console(config)#snmp-server engine-id local 12345abcdef

Console(config)#exit

Console#show snmp engine-id

Local SNMP engineID: 8000002a8000000000e8666672

Local SNMP engineBoots: 1

Console#

20-10

20-12

Specifying a Remote Engine ID

To send inform messages to an SNMPv3 user on a remote device, you must first specify the engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the user resides. The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host.

SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent. For informs, the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent. You therefore need to configure the remote agent’s SNMP engine ID before

you can send proxy requests or informs to it. (See “Specifying Trap

Managers and Trap Types” on page 5-6 and “Configuring Remote

SNMPv3 Users” on page 5-15.)

The engine ID can be specified by entering 10 to 64 hexadecimal characters. If less than 64 characters are specified, trailing zeroes are added to the value. For example, the value “0123456789” is equivalent to

“0123456789” followed by 54 zeroes.

5-11

IMPLE

ETWORK

ANAGEMENT

ROTOCOL

Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Remote Engine ID. Enter an ID of up to

64 hexadecimal characters and then click Save.

Configuring SNMPv3 Users

Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name. Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group. The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read, write, or notify view.

Command Attributes

• User Name – The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent.

(Range: 1-32 characters)

• Group Name – The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned. (Range: 1-32 characters)

• Security Model – The user security model; SNMP v1, v2c or v3.

• Security Level – The security level used for the user:

- noAuthNoPriv – There is no authentication or encryption used in

SNMP communications. (This is the default for SNMPv3.)

- AuthNoPriv – SNMP communications use authentication, but the data is not encrypted (only available for the SNMPv3 security model).

5-12

Figure 5-5 Setting an Engine ID

CLI – This example specifies a remote SNMPv3 engine ID.

Console(config)#snmp-server engine-id remote 54321 192.168.1.19

Console(config)#exit

Console#show snmp engine-id

Local SNMP engineID: 8000002a8000000000e8666672

Local SNMP engineBoots: 1

20-10

20-12

Remote SNMP engineID IP address

80000000030004e2b316c54321 192.168.1.19

Console#

ONFIGURING

SNMP

3 M

ANAGEMENT

CCESS

- AuthPriv – SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption (only available for the SNMPv3 security model).

• Authentication Protocol – The method used for user authentication.

(Options: MD5, SHA; Default: MD5)

• Authentication Password – A minimum of eight plain text characters is required.

• Privacy Protocol – The encryption algorithm use for data privacy; only

56-bit DES is currently available.

• Privacy Password – A minimum of eight plain text characters is required.

• Actions – Enables the user to be assigned to another SNMPv3 group.

5-13

IMPLE

ETWORK

ANAGEMENT

ROTOCOL

Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Users. Click New to configure a user name.

In the New User page, define a name and assign it to a group, then click

Add to save the configuration and return to the User Name list. To delete a user, check the box next to the user name, then click Delete. To change the assigned group of a user, click Change Group in the Actions column of the users table and select the new group.

5-14

Figure 5-6 Configuring SNMPv3 Users

ONFIGURING

SNMP

3 M

ANAGEMENT

CCESS

CLI – Use the snmp-server user command to configure a new user name and assign it to a group.

Console(config)#snmp-server user chris group r&d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien

20-18

Console(config)#exit

Console#show snmp user

20-20

EngineId: 80000034030001f488f5200000

User Name: chris

Authentication Protocol: md5

Privacy Protocol: des56

Storage Type: nonvolatile

Row Status: active

Console#

Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users

Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name. Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group. The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read and a write view.

on the remote host. (See “Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types” on

page 5-6 and “Specifying a Remote Engine ID” on page 5-11.)

Command Attributes

• User Name – The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent.

(Range: 1-32 characters)

• Group Name – The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned. (Range: 1-32 characters)

• Engine ID – The engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the remote user resides. Note that the remote engine identifier must be specified before you configure a remote user. (See

“Specifying a Remote Engine ID” on page 5-11.)

• Remote IP – The Internet address of the remote device where the user resides.

5-15

IMPLE

ETWORK

ANAGEMENT

ROTOCOL

• Security Model – The user security model; SNMP v1, v2c or v3.

(Default: v1)

• Security Level – The security level used for the user:

- noAuthNoPriv – There is no authentication or encryption used in

SNMP communications. (This is the default for SNMPv3.)

- AuthNoPriv – SNMP communications use authentication, but the data is not encrypted (only available for the SNMPv3 security model).

- AuthPriv – SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption (only available for the SNMPv3 security model).

• Authentication Protocol – The method used for user authentication.

(Options: MD5, SHA; Default: MD5)

• Authentication Password – A minimum of eight plain text characters is required.

• Privacy Protocol – The encryption algorithm use for data privacy; only

56-bit DES is currently available.

• Privacy Password – A minimum of eight plain text characters is required.

5-16

ONFIGURING

SNMP

3 M

ANAGEMENT

CCESS

Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Remote Users. Click New to configure a user name. In the New User page, define a name and assign it to a group, then click Add to save the configuration and return to the User Name list.

To delete a user, check the box next to the user name, then click Delete.

Figure 5-7 Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users

5-17

IMPLE

ETWORK

ANAGEMENT

ROTOCOL

CLI – Use the snmp-server user command to configure a new user name and assign it to a group.

Console(config)#snmp-server user mark group r&d remote 192.168.1.19 v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien

20-18

Console(config)#exit

Console#show snmp user

No user exist.

20-20

SNMP remote user

EngineId: 80000000030004e2b316c54321

User Name: mark

Authentication Protocol: none

Privacy Protocol: none

Storage Type: nonvolatile

Row Status: active

Console#

Configuring SNMPv3 Groups

An SNMPv3 group sets the access policy for its assigned users, restricting them to specific read, write, and notify views. You can use the pre-defined default groups or create new groups to map a set of SNMP users to SNMP views.

Command Attributes

• Group Name – The name of the SNMP group. (Range: 1-32 characters)

• Model – The group security model; SNMP v1, v2c or v3.

• Level – The security level used for the group:

- noAuthNoPriv – There is no authentication or encryption used in

SNMP communications.

- AuthNoPriv – SNMP communications use authentication, but the data is not encrypted (only available for the SNMPv3 security model).

- AuthPriv – SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption (only available for the SNMPv3 security model).

• Read View – The configured view for read access. (Range: 1-64 characters)

• Write View – The configured view for write access. (Range: 1-64 characters)

5-18

ONFIGURING

SNMP

3 M

ANAGEMENT

CCESS

• Notify View – The configured view for notifications. (Range: 1-64 characters)

Table 5-2 Supported Notification Messages

Object ID Description Object Label

RFC 1493 Traps newRoot 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1

topologyChange 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.2

The newRoot trap indicates that the sending agent has become the new root of the Spanning Tree; the trap is sent by a bridge soon after its election as the new root, e.g., upon expiration of the

Topology Change Timer immediately subsequent to its election.

A topologyChange trap is sent by a bridge when any of its configured ports transitions from the Learning state to the

Forwarding state, or from the

Forwarding state to the

Discarding state. The trap is not sent if a newRoot trap is sent for the same transition.

SNMPv2 Traps coldStart 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1

warmStart 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2

A coldStart trap signifies that the

SNMPv2 entity, acting in an agent role, is reinitializing itself and that its configuration may have been altered.

A warmStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity, acting in an agent role, is reinitializing itself such that its configuration is unaltered.

5-19

IMPLE

ETWORK

ANAGEMENT

ROTOCOL

Table 5-2 Supported Notification Messages (Continued)

Object Label linkDown *

linkUp *

Object ID

1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3

1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4

authenticationFailure

1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5

Description

A linkDown trap signifies that the SNMP entity, acting in an agent role, has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links is about to enter the down state from some other state (but not from the notPresent state). This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus.

A linkUp trap signifies that the

SNMP entity, acting in an agent role, has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links left the down state and transitioned into some other state (but not into the notPresent state). This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus.

An authenticationFailure trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity, acting in an agent role, has received a protocol message that is not properly authenticated.

While all implementations of the

SNMPv2 must be capable of generating this trap, the snmpEnableAuthenTraps object indicates whether this trap will be generated.

5-20

ONFIGURING

SNMP

3 M

ANAGEMENT

CCESS

Table 5-2 Supported Notification Messages (Continued)

Object Label

RMON Events (V2) risingAlarm

Object ID Description fallingAlarm

1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.1

1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.2

The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entry crosses its rising threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps.

The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entry crosses its falling threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps.

Private Traps - swPowerStatus

ChangeTrap swFanFailureTrap

1.3.6.1.4.1.202.20.64.90.2.1.0.1 This trap is sent when the power state changes.

1.3.6.1.4.1.202.20.64.90.2.1.0.17 This trap is sent when the fan fails.

swFanRecoverTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.202.20.64.90.2.1.0.18 This trap is sent when the fan failure has recovered.

swIpFilterRejectTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.202.20.64.90.2.1.0.40 This trap is sent when an incorrect IP address is rejected by the IP Filter.

swSmtpConnFailure

Trap

1.3.6.1.4.1.202.20.64.90.2.1.0.41 This trap is triggered if the SMTP system cannot open a connection to the mail server successfully.

swMainBoardVer

MismatchNotificaiton swModuleVer

MismatchNotificaiton

1.3.6.1.4.1.202.20.64.90.2.1.0.56 This trap is sent when the slave board version is mismatched with the master board version. This trap binds two objects, the first object indicates the master version, whereas the second represents the slave version.

1.3.6.1.4.1.202.20.64.90.2.1.0.57 This trap is sent when the slide-in module version is mismatched with the main board version.

5-21

IMPLE

ETWORK

ANAGEMENT

ROTOCOL

Table 5-2 Supported Notification Messages (Continued)

Object Label swThermalRising

Notification swThermalFalling

Notification swModuleInsertion

Notificaiton swModuleRemoval

Notificaiton

Object ID Description

1.3.6.1.4.1.202.20.64.90.2.1.0.58 This trap is sent when the temperature exceeds the switchThermalActionRisingThre shold.

1.3.6.1.4.1.202.20.64.90.2.1.0.59 This trap is sent when the temperature falls below the switchThermalActionFallingThre shold.

1.3.6.1.4.1.202.20.64.90.2.1.0.60 This trap is sent when a module is inserted.

1.3.6.1.4.1.202.20.64.90.2.1.0.61 This trap is sent when a module is removed.

* These are legacy notifications and therefore must be enabled in conjunction with the

corresponding traps on the SNMP Configuration menu (page 5-9).

5-22

ONFIGURING

SNMP

3 M

ANAGEMENT

CCESS

Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Groups. Click New to configure a new group. In the New Group page, define a name, assign a security model and level, and then select read, write, and notify views. Click Add to save the new group and return to the Groups list. To delete a group, check the box next to the group name, then click Delete.

Figure 5-8 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups

5-23

IMPLE

ETWORK

ANAGEMENT

ROTOCOL

CLI – Use the snmp-server group command to configure a new group, specifying the security model and level, and restricting MIB access to defined read and write views.

Console(config)#snmp-server group secure-users v3 priv read defaultview write defaultview notify defaultview

Console(config)#exit

Group Name: secure-users

Security Model: v3

Read View: defaultview

Write View: defaultview

Notify View: defaultview

Storage Type: nonvolatile

Row Status: active

20-15

20-16

Console#

Setting SNMPv3 Views

SNMPv3 views are used to restrict user access to specified portions of the

MIB tree. The predefined view “defaultview” includes access to the entire

MIB tree.

Command Attributes

• View Name – The name of the SNMP view. (Range: 1-64 characters)

• View OID Subtrees – Shows the currently configured object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree that define the SNMP view.

• Edit OID Subtrees – Allows you to configure the object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree. Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string.

• Type – Indicates if the object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree is included or excluded from the SNMP view.

5-24

ONFIGURING

SNMP

3 M

ANAGEMENT

CCESS

Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Views. Click New to configure a new view.

In the New View page, define a name and specify OID subtrees in the switch MIB to be included or excluded in the view. Click Back to save the new view and return to the SNMPv3 Views list. For a specific view, click on View OID Subtrees to display the current configuration, or click on

Edit OID Subtrees to make changes to the view settings. To delete a view, check the box next to the view name, then click Delete.

Figure 5-9 Configuring SNMPv3 Views

5-25

IMPLE

ETWORK

ANAGEMENT

ROTOCOL

CLI – Use the snmp-server view command to configure a new view. This example view includes the MIB-2 interfaces table, and the wildcard mask selects all index entries.

Console(config)#snmp-server view ifEntry.a 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.*

included

20-13

Console(config)#exit

Console#show snmp view

20-14

View Name: ifEntry.a

Subtree OID: 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.*

View Type: included

Storage Type: nonvolatile

Row Status: active

View Name: readaccess

Subtree OID: 1.3.6.1.2

View Type: included

Storage Type: nonvolatile

Row Status: active

View Name: defaultview

Subtree OID: 1

View Type: included

Storage Type: nonvolatile

Row Status: active

Console#

5-26

HAPTER

SER

UTHENTICATION

You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods.

Port-based authentication using IEEE 802.1X can also be configured to control either management access to the uplink ports or client access 4 to the data ports. This switch provides secure network management access using the following options:

• User Accounts – Manually configure management access rights for users.

• Authentication Settings – Use remote authentication to configure access rights.

• HTTPS Settings – Provide a secure web connection.

• SSH Settings – Provide a secure shell (for secure Telnet access).

• 802.1X – Use IEEE 802.1X port authentication to control access to specific ports.

• IP Filter – Filters management access to the web, SNMP or Telnet interface.

Configuring User Accounts

The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters.

However, the administrator has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent. You should therefore assign a new administrator password as soon as possible, and store it in a safe place.

The default guest name is “guest” with the password “guest.” The default administrator name is “admin” with the password “admin.”

4. For other methods of controlling client access, see “Client Security” on page 7-1.

6-1

SER

UTHENTICATION

Command Attributes

• Account List – Displays the current list of user accounts and associated access levels. (Defaults: admin, and guest)

• New Account – Displays configuration settings for a new account.

User Name – The name of the user.

(Maximum length: 8 characters; maximum number of users: 16)

Access Level – Specifies the user level.

(Options: Normal and Privileged)

Password – Specifies the user password.

(Range: 0-8 characters plain text, case sensitive)

• Change Password – Sets a new password for the specified user.

Web – Click Security, User Accounts. To configure a new user account, enter the user name, access level, and password, then click Add. To change the password for a specific user, enter the user name and new password, confirm the password by entering it again, then click Apply.

6-2

Figure 6-1 User Accounts

ONFIGURING

OCAL

EMOTE

OGON

UTHENTICATION

CLI – Assign a user name to access-level 15 (i.e., administrator), then specify the password.

21-2

Console(config)#username bob access-level 15

Console(config)#username bob password 0 smith

Console(config)#

Configuring Local/Remote Logon

Authentication

Use the Authentication

Settings menu to restrict management access based on specified user names and passwords.

You can manually configure access rights on the switch, or you can

Web

Telnet

RADIUS/

TACACS+ server console

1. Client attempts management access.

2. Switch contacts authentication server.

3. Authentication server challenges client.

4. Client responds with proper password or key.

5. Authentication server approves access.

6. Switch grants management access.

use a remote access authentication server based on RADIUS or TACACS+ protocols.

Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) and Terminal

Access Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+) are logon authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS-aware or TACACS- aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the switch.

RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access-request packet from the client to the server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.

6-3

SER

UTHENTICATION

Command Usage

• By default, management access is always checked against the authentication database stored on the local switch. If a remote authentication server is used, you must specify the authentication sequence and the corresponding parameters for the remote authentication protocol. Local and remote logon authentication control management access via the console port, web browser, or Telnet.

• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assign a specific privilege level for each user name/password pair. The user name, password, and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server. The encryption methods used for the authentication process must also be configured or negotiated between the authentication server and logon client. This switch can pass authentication messages between the server and client that have been encrypted using MD5 (Message-Digest 5), TLS

(Transport Layer Security), or TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer

Security).

• You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to indicate the authentication sequence. For example, if you select (1)

RADIUS, (2) TACACS and (3) Local, the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is attempted using the TACACS+ server, and finally the local user name and password is checked.

Command Attributes

• Authentication – Select the authentication, or authentication sequence required:

Local – User authentication is performed only locally by the switch.

Radius – User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only.

TACACS – User authentication is performed using a TACACS+ server only.

- [authentication sequence] – User authentication is performed by up to three authentication methods in the indicated sequence.

6-4

ONFIGURING

OCAL

EMOTE

OGON

UTHENTICATION

• RADIUS Settings

Global – Provides globally applicable RADIUS settings.

ServerIndex – Specifies one of five RADIUS servers that may be configured. The switch attempts authentication using the listed sequence of servers. The process ends when a server either approves or denies access to a user.

Server IP Address – Address of authentication server.

(Default: 10.1.0.1)

Server Port Number – Network (UDP) port of authentication server used for authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 1812)

Secret Text String – Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 48 characters)

Number of Server Transmits – Number of times the switch tries to authenticate logon access via the authentication server. (Range: 1-30;

Default: 2)

Timeout for a reply – The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the RADIUS server before it resends the request. (Range:

1-65535; Default: 5)

• TACACS Settings

Server IP Address – Address of the TACACS+ server.

(Default: 10.11.12.13)

Server Port Number – Network (TCP) port of TACACS+ server used for authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 49)

Secret Text String – Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 48 characters)

Note: The local switch user database has to be set up by manually

entering user names and passwords using the CLI. (See

“username” on page 21-2.)

6-5

SER

UTHENTICATION

Web – Click Security, Authentication Settings. To configure local or remote authentication preferences, specify the authentication sequence

(i.e., one to three methods), fill in the parameters for RADIUS or

TACACS+ authentication if selected, and click Apply.

6-6

Figure 6-2 Authentication Server Settings

CLI – Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication.

Console(config)#authentication login radius

Console(config)#radius-server port 181

Console(config)#radius-server key green

Console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5

Console(config)#radius-server timeout 10

Console(config)#radius-server 1 host 192.168.1.25

Console(config)#exit

21-5

21-10

21-11

21-13

21-12

Console#show radius-server

Remote RADIUS server configuration:

Global settings:

Communication key with RADIUS server: *****

Server port number: 181

Retransmit times: 5

Request timeout: 10

ONFIGURING

HTTPS

Server 1:

Server IP address: 192.168.1.25

Communication key with RADIUS server: *****

Server port number: 181

Retransmit times: 5

Request timeout: 10

Console#config

Console(config)#authentication login tacacs

Console(config)#tacacs-server host 10.20.30.40

Console(config)#tacacs-server port 200

Console(config)#tacacs-server key green

Console(config)#exit

Console#show tacacs-server

Server IP address: 10.20.30.40

Communication key with tacacs server: *****

Server port number: 200

Console(config)#

21-5

21-13

21-14

21-15

Configuring HTTPS

You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer

Protocol (HTTPS) over the Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an encrypted connection) to the switch’s web interface.

Command Usage

• Both the HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch. However, you cannot configure both services to use the same

UDP port.

• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser: https:// device [: port_number ]

• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:

- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.

- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection.

- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data.

• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.

A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5.x or above and Netscape Navigator 6.2 or above.

6-7

SER

UTHENTICATION

• The following web browsers and operating systems currently support

HTTPS:

Table 6-1 HTTPS System Support

Web Browser

Internet Explorer 5.0 or later

Operating System

Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a), Windows 2000, Windows XP

Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a), Windows 2000, Windows XP,

Solaris 2.6

• To specify a secure-site certificate, see “Replacing the Default Secure-site

Certificate” on page 6-9.

Command Attributes

• HTTPS Status – Allows you to enable/disable the HTTPS server feature on the switch. (Default: Enabled)

• Change HTTPS Port Number – Specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS/SSL connection to the switch’s web interface. (Default: Port

443)

Web – Click Security, HTTPS Settings. Enable HTTPS and specify the port number, then click Apply.

6-8

Figure 6-3 HTTPS Settings

CLI – This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the port number.

Console(config)#ip http secure-server

Console(config)#ip http secure-port 441

Console(config)#

21-17

21-18

ONFIGURING

HTTPS

Replacing the Default Secure-site Certificate

When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS (for secure access), a

Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate appears for the switch. By default, the certificate that Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be associated with a warning that the site is not recognized as a secure site.

This is because the certificate has not been signed by an approved certification authority. If you want this warning to be replaced by a message confirming that the connection to the switch is secure, you must obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password from a recognized certification authority.

Note: For maximum security, we recommend you obtain a unique Secure

Sockets Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity. This is because the default certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware you have purchased.

When you have obtained these, place them on your TFTP server, and use the following command at the switch's command-line interface to replace the default (unrecognized) certificate with an authorized one:

Console#copy tftp https-certificate

TFTP server ip address: < server ip-address >

Source certificate file name: < certificate file name >

Source private file name: < private key file name >

Private password: < password for private key >

page (page 6-3). If public key authentication is

Note: The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated. To reset the switch, type “reload” at the command prompt:

Console#reload

6-9

SER

UTHENTICATION

Configuring the Secure Shell

The Berkley-standard includes remote access tools originally designed for

Unix systems. Some of these tools have also been implemented for

Microsoft Windows and other environments. These tools, including commands such as rlogin (remote login), rsh (remote shell), and rcp (remote copy), are not secure from hostile attacks.

The Secure Shell (SSH) includes server/client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools. SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet. When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol, the switch generates a public-key that the client uses along with a local user name and password for access authentication. SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH-enabled management station clients, and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered.

Note that you need to install an SSH client on the management station to access the switch for management via the SSH protocol.

Note: The switch supports both SSH Version 1.5 and 2.0 clients.

Command Usage

The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication. If password authentication is specified by the SSH client, then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or

TACACS+ remote authentication server, as specified on the

Authentication Settings

specified by the client, then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section. Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication, you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch (SSH Host Key

Settings) and enable the SSH server (Authentication Settings).

6-10

ONFIGURING THE

ECURE

HELL

To use the SSH server, complete these steps:

Generate a Host Key Pair – On the SSH Host Key Settings page, create a host public/private key pair.

Provide Host Public Key to Clients – Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch. Otherwise, you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it.

An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example:

10.1.0.54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254

15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233

76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206

51941746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545240839

71752646358058176716709574804776117

Import Client’s Public Key to the Switch – Use the copy tftp public-key

command (page 19-16) to copy a file containing the public key for all

the SSH client’s granted management access to the switch. (Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch via the User

Accounts page as described on page 6-1.) The clients are subsequently

authenticated using these keys. The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA key:

1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880

05553616163105177594083868631109291232226828519254374603100937187721199696317

81366277414168985132049117204830339254324101637997592371449011938006090253948

40848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671316294325328189150

45306393916643 [email protected]

Set the Optional Parameters – On the SSH Settings page, configure the optional parameters, including the authentication timeout, the number of retries, and the server key size.

Enable SSH Service – On the SSH Settings page, enable the SSH server on the switch.

6-11

SER

UTHENTICATION

6. Authentication – One of the following authentication methods is employed:

Password Authentication (for SSH v1.5 or V2 Clients) a. The client sends its password to the server.

b. The switch compares the client's password to those stored in memory. c. If a match is found, the connection is allowed.

Note: To use SSH with only password authentication, the host public key must still be given to the client, either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file. However, you do not need to configure the client’s keys.

Public Key Authentication – When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch, the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method. Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can access it.

The following exchanges take place during this process:

Authenticating SSH v1.5 Clients a. The client sends its RSA public key to the switch. b. The switch compares the client's public key to those stored in memory. c. If a match is found, the switch uses its secret key to generate a random 256-bit string as a challenge, encrypts this string with the user’s public key, and sends it to the client. d. The client uses its private key to decrypt the challenge string, computes the MD5 checksum, and sends the checksum back to the switch. e. The switch compares the checksum sent from the client against that computed for the original string it sent. If the two checksums match, this means that the client's private key corresponds to an authorized public key, and the client is authenticated.

6-12

ONFIGURING THE

ECURE

HELL

Authenticating SSH v2 Clients a. The client first queries the switch to determine if DSA public key authentication using a preferred algorithm is acceptable. b. If the specified algorithm is supported by the switch, it notifies the client to proceed with the authentication process. Otherwise, it rejects the request. c. The client sends a signature generated using the private key to the switch.

d. When the server receives this message, it checks whether the supplied key is acceptable for authentication, and if so, it then checks whether the signature is correct. If both checks succeed, the client is authenticated.

Note: The SSH server supports up to four client sessions. The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions.

Generating the Host Key Pair

A host public/private key pair is used to provide secure communications between an SSH client and the switch. After generating this key pair, you must provide the host public key to SSH clients and import the client’s public key to the switch as described in the preceding section (Command

Usage).

Field Attributes

• Public-Key of Host-Key – The public key for the host.

- RSA: The first field indicates the size of the host key (e.g., 1024), the second field is the encoded public exponent (e.g., 65537), and the last string is the encoded modulus.

- DSA: The first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard (DSS). The last string is the encoded modulus.

6-13

SER

UTHENTICATION

• Host-Key Type – The key type used to generate the host key pair (i.e., public and private keys). (Range: RSA, DSA, Both: Default: Both)

The SSH server uses RSA or DSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch, and then negotiates with the client to select either DES (56-bit) or 3DES (168-bit) for data encryption.

Note: The switch uses only RSA Version 1 for SSHv1.5 clients and

DSA Version 2 for SSHv2 clients.

• Save Host-Key from Memory to Flash – Saves the host key from

RAM (i.e., volatile memory to flash memory). Otherwise, the host key pair is stored to RAM by default. Note that you must select this item prior to generating the host-key pair.

• Generate – This button is used to generate the host key pair. Note that you must first generate the host key pair before you can enable the SSH server on the SSH Server Settings page.

• Clear – This button clears the host key from both volatile memory

(RAM) and non-volatile memory (Flash).

6-14

ONFIGURING THE

ECURE

HELL

Web – Click Security, SSH, Host-Key Settings. Select the host-key type from the drop-down box, select the option to save the host key from memory to flash (if required) prior to generating the key, and then click

Generate.

Figure 6-4 SSH Host-Key Settings

6-15

SER

UTHENTICATION

CLI – This example generates a host-key pair using both the RSA and

DSA algorithms, stores the keys to flash memory, and then displays the host’s public keys.

Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate

Console#ip ssh save host-key

Console#show public-key host

Host:

21-28

21-30

21-32

RSA:

1024 65537

127250922544926402131336514546131189679055192360076028653006761

8240969094744832010252487896597759216832222558465238779154647980739

6314033869257931051057652122430528078658854857892726029378660892368

4142327591212760325919683697053439336438445223335188287173896894511

729290510813919642025190932104328579045764891

DSA: ssh-dss AAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAN6zwIqCqDb3869jYVXlME1sHL0EcE/Re6hlas fEthIwmj hLY4O0jqJZpcEQUgCfYlum0Y2uoLka+Py9ieGWQ8f2gobUZKIICuKg6v jO9XTs7XKc05xfzkBiKviDa+2OrIz6UK+6vFOgvUDFedlnixYTVo+h5v8r0ea2rpnO6

DkZAAAAFQCNZn/x17dwpW8RrVDQnSWw4Qk+6QAAAIEAptkGeB6B5hwagH4gUOCY6i1

TmrmSiJgfwO9OqRPUMbCAkCC+uzxatOo7drnIZypMx+Sx5RUdMGgKS+9ywsa1cWqHeF

Y5ilc3lDCNBueeLykZzVS+RS+azTKIk/zrJh8GLG Nq375R55yRxFvmcGIn/Q7Iph

PqyJ3o9MK8LFDfmJEAAACAL8A6tESiswP2OFqX7VGoEbzVDSOIRTMFy3iUXtvGyQAOV

Sy67Mfc3lMtgqPRUOYXDiwIBp5NXgilCg5z7VqbmRm28mWc5a//f8TUAgPNWKV6W

0hqmshQdotVzDR1e+XKNTZj0uTwWfjO5Kytdn4MdoTHgrbl/DMdAfjnte8MZZs=

Console#

Configuring the SSH Server

The SSH server includes basic settings for authentication.

Field Attributes

• SSH Server Status – Allows you to enable/disable the SSH server on the switch. (Default: Disabled)

• Version – The Secure Shell version number. Version 2.0 is displayed, but the switch supports management access via either SSH Version 1.5 or 2.0 clients.

• SSH Authentication Timeout – Specifies the time interval in seconds that the SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt.

(Range: 1 to 120 seconds; Default: 120 seconds)

6-16

ONFIGURING THE

ECURE

HELL

• SSH Authentication Retries – Specifies the number of authentication attempts that a client is allowed before authentication fails and the client has to restart the authentication process. (Range: 1-5 times; Default: 3)

• SSH Server-Key Size – Specifies the SSH server key size. (Range:

512-896 bits; Default: 768)

- The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch.

- The host key is shared with the SSH client, and is fixed at 1024 bits.

Web – Click Security, SSH, Settings. Enable SSH and adjust the authentication parameters as required, then click Apply. Note that you must first generate the host key pair on the SSH Host-Key Settings page before you can enable the SSH server.

Figure 6-5 SSH Server Settings

6-17

SER

UTHENTICATION

CLI – This example enables SSH, sets the authentication parameters, and displays the current configuration. It shows that the administrator has made a connection via SHH, and then disables this connection.

Console(config)#ip ssh server

Console(config)#ip ssh timeout 100

Console(config)#ip ssh authentication-retries 5

Console(config)#ip ssh server-key size 512

Console(config)#end

Console#show ip ssh

SSH Enabled - version 2.0

Negotiation timeout: 120 secs; Authentication retries: 3

Server key size: 768 bits

Console#show ssh

Information of secure shell

Session Username Version Encrypt method Negotiation state

------- -------- ------- -------------- -----------------

0 admin 2.0 cipher-3des session-started

Console#disconnect 0

Console#

21-24

21-25

21-26

21-27

21-31

19-33

6-18

ONFIGURING

802.1X P

ORT

UTHENTICATION

Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication

Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources by simply attaching a client PC. Although this automatic configuration and access is a desirable feature, it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and possibly gain access to sensitive network data.

The IEEE 802.1X (dot1x) standard defines a port-based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication. Access to all switch ports in a network can be centrally controlled from a server, which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network.

This switch uses the

Extensible

Authentication

802.1x

client

Protocol over LANs

(EAPOL) to exchange authentication protocol messages with the client, and a

RADIUS server

1. Client attempts to access a switch port.

2. Switch sends client an identity request.

3. Client sends back identity information.

4. Switch forwards this to authentication server.

5. Authentication server challenges client.

6. Client responds with proper credentials.

7. Authentication server approves access.

8. Switch grants client access to this port.

remote RADIUS authentication server to verify user identity and access rights. When a client (i.e., Supplicant) connects to a switch port, the switch

(i.e., Authenticator) responds with an EAPOL identity request. The client provides its identity (such as a user name) in an EAPOL response to the switch, which it forwards to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server verifies the client identity and sends an access challenge back to the client.

The EAP packet from the RADIUS server contains not only the challenge, but the authentication method to be used. The client can reject the authentication method and request another, depending on the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server. The encryption method used to pass authentication messages can be MD5

(Message-Digest 5), TLS (Transport Layer Security), or TTLS (Tunneled

6-19

SER

UTHENTICATION

Transport Layer Security). PEAP will be supported in future releases. The client responds to the appropriate method with its credentials, such as a password or certificate. The RADIUS server verifies the client credentials and responds with an accept or reject packet. If authentication is successful, the switch allows the client to access the network. Otherwise, network access is denied and the port remains blocked.

The operation of dot1x on the switch requires the following:

• The switch must have an IP address assigned.

• The IP address of the RADIUS server must be specified.

• 802.1X must be enabled globally for the switch.

• Each switch port that will be used must be set to dot1x “Auto” mode.

• Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1x client software installed and properly configured.

• The RADIUS server and 802.1X client support EAP. (The switch only supports EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client.)

• The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP encryption method for passing authentication messages – MD5, TLS or

TTLS. Native support for these encryption methods is provided in

Windows XP, and in Windows 2000 with Service Pack 4. To support these encryption methods in Windows 95 and 98, you can use the

AEGIS dot1x client or other comparable client software.

6-20

ONFIGURING

802.1X P

ORT

UTHENTICATION

Displaying 802.1X Global Settings

The 802.1X protocol provides port authentication.

Command Attributes

802.1X System Authentication Control – The global setting for

802.1X.

Web – Click Security, 802.1X, Information.

Figure 6-6 802.1X Global Information

CLI – This example shows the default global setting for 802.1X.

Console#show dot1x

Global 802.1X Parameters

system-auth-control: enable

21-41

802.1X Port Summary

Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized

1/1 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a

1/2 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a

802.1X Port Details

802.1X is disabled on port 26

Console#

6-21

SER

UTHENTICATION

Configuring 802.1X Global Settings

The 802.1X protocol provides port authentication. The 802.1X protocol must be enabled globally for the switch system before port settings are active.

Command Attributes

802.1X System Authentication Control – Sets the global setting for

802.1X. (Default: Disabled)

Web – Select Security, 802.1X, Configuration. Enable 802.1X globally for the switch, and click Apply.

Figure 6-7 802.1X Global Configuration

CLI – This example enables 802.1X globally for the switch.

Console(config)#dot1x system-auth-control

Console(config)#

21-35

6-22

ONFIGURING

802.1X P

ORT

UTHENTICATION

Configuring Port Settings for 802.1X

When 802.1X is enabled, you need to configure the parameters for the authentication process that runs between the client and the switch (i.e., authenticator), as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication server. These parameters are described in this section.

Command Attributes

• Status – Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port.

(Default: Disabled)

• Operation Mode – Allows single or multiple hosts (clients) to connect to an 802.1X-authorized port. (Range: Single-Host, Multi-Host;

Default: Single-Host)

• Max Count – The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port when the Multi-Host operation mode is selected. (Range: 1-1024;

Default: 5)

• Mode – Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options:

Auto – Requires a dot1x-aware client to be authorized by the authentication server. Clients that are not dot1x-aware will be denied access.

Force-Authorized – Forces the port to grant access to all clients, either dot1x-aware or otherwise. (This is the default setting.)

Force-Unauthorized – Forces the port to deny access to all clients, either dot1x-aware or otherwise.

• Re-authentication – Sets the client to be re-authenticated after the interval specified by the Re-authentication Period. (Default: Disabled)

• Max Request – Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session. (Range: 1-10; Default 2)

• Quiet Period – Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max

Request count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client. (Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 60 seconds)

6-23

SER

UTHENTICATION

• Re-authentication Period – Sets the time period after which a connected client must be re-authenticated. (Range: 1-65535 seconds;

Default: 3600 seconds)

• TX Period – Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet. (Range: 1-65535;

Default: 30 seconds)

• Authorized –

Yes – Connected client is authorized.

No – Connected client is not authorized.

Blank – Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port.

• Supplicant – Indicates the MAC address of a connected client.

• Trunk – Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port.

Web – Click Security, 802.1X, Port Configuration. Modify the parameters required, and click Apply.

Figure 6-8 802.1X Port Configuration

6-24

ONFIGURING

802.1X P

ORT

UTHENTICATION

CLI – This example sets the 802.1X parameters on port 2. For a

description of the additional fields displayed in this example, see “show dot1x” on page 21-41.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto

Console(config-if)#dot1x re-authentication

Console(config-if)#dot1x max-req 5

Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 40

Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout re-authperiod 5

Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout tx-period 40

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show dot1x

24-2

21-36

21-39

21-36

21-39

21-40

21-41

Global 802.1X Parameters

system-auth-control: enable

802.1X Port Summary

Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized

1/1 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized yes

1/27 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a

1/28 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a

802.1X Port Details

802.1X is disabled on port 1/1

802.1X is enabled on port 1/2 reauth-enabled: Disable reauth-period: 3600 quiet-period: 60 tx-period: 30 supplicant-timeout: 30 server-timeout: 10 reauth-max: 2 max-req: 2

Status Authorized

Operation mode Single-Host

Max count 5

Port-control Auto

Supplicant 00-e0-29-94-34-65

Current Identifier 7

Authenticator State Machine

State Authenticated

Reauth Count 0

6-25

SER

UTHENTICATION

Backend State Machine

State Idle

Request Count 0

Identifier(Server) 6

Reauthentication State Machine

802.1X is disabled on port 1/28

Console#

Displaying 802.1X Statistics

This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port.

Parameter

Table 6-2 802.1X Statistics

Description

Rx EAPOL Start The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator.

Rx EAPOL Logoff The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator.

Rx EAPOL Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized.

Rx EAPOL Total The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this Authenticator.

Rx EAP Resp/Id The number of EAP Resp/Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator.

Rx EAP Resp/Oth The number of valid EAP Response frames (other than Resp/

Id frames) that have been received by this Authenticator.

Rx EAP LenError The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid.

Rx Last

EAPOLVer

Rx Last

EAPOLSrc

The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.

The source MAC address carried in the most recently received

EAPOL frame.

Tx EAPOL Total The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this Authenticator.

6-26

ONFIGURING

802.1X P

ORT

UTHENTICATION

Table 6-2 802.1X Statistics (Continued)

Parameter Description

Tx EAP Req/Id The number of EAP Req/Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator.

Tx EAP Req/Oth The number of EAP Request frames (other than Rq/Id frames) that have been transmitted by this Authenticator.

Web – Select Security, 802.1X, Statistics. Select the required port and then click Query. Click Refresh to update the statistics.

Figure 6-9 802.1X Port Statistics

CLI – This example displays the dot1x statistics for port 4.

Console#show dot1x statistics interface ethernet 1/4

21-41

Eth 1/4

Rx: EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAP EAP EAP

Start Logoff Invalid Total Resp/Id Resp/Oth LenError

2 0 0 1007 672 0 0

Last Last

EAPOLVer EAPOLSrc

1 00-00-E8-98-73-21

Tx: EAPOL EAP EAP

Total Req/Id Req/Oth

2017 1005 0

Console#

6-27

SER

UTHENTICATION

Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access

You can create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that are allowed management access to the switch through the web interface,

SNMP, or Telnet.

Command Usage

• The management interfaces are open to all IP addresses by default. Once you add an entry to a filter list, access to that interface is restricted to the specified addresses.

• If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address, the switch will reject the connection, enter an event message in the system log, and send a trap message to the trap manager.

• IP address can be configured for SNMP, web and Telnet access respectively. Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses, either individual addresses or address ranges.

• When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web or Telnet), the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges. When entering addresses for different groups, the switch will accept overlapping address ranges.

• You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You must delete the entire range, and reenter the addresses.

• You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by specifying both the start address and end address.

Command Attributes

• Web IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the web group.

• SNMP IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the SNMP group.

• Telnet IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the Telnet group.

• IP Filter List – IP address which are allowed management access to this interface.

• Start IP Address – A single IP address, or the starting address of a range.

6-28

ILTERING

IP A

DDRESSES FOR

ANAGEMENT

CCESS

• End IP Address – The end address of a range.

Web – Click Security, IP Filter. Enter the IP addresses or range of addresses that are allowed management access to an interface, and click

Add IP Filtering Entry.

Figure 6-10 IP Filter

CLI – This example restricts management access for Telnet clients.

Console(config)#management telnet-client 192.168.1.19

21-45

Console(config)#management telnet-client 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30

Console(config)#exit

Console#show management all-client

21-46

Management IP Filter

HTTP-Client:

Start IP address End IP address

-----------------------------------------------

SNMP-Client:

Start IP address End IP address

-----------------------------------------------

TELNET-Client:

Start IP address End IP address

-----------------------------------------------

1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19

2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30

Console#

6-29

SER

UTHENTICATION

6-30

HAPTER

LIENT

ECURITY

This switch supports many methods of segregating traffic for clients attached to each of the data ports, and for ensuring that only authorized clients gain access to the network. Private VLANs and port-based authentication using IEEE 802.1X are commonly used for these purposes.

In addition to these methods, several other options of providing client security are supported by this switch. These include port-based authentication, which can be configured for network client access by specifying a fixed set of MAC addresses (either by freezing a set of dynamically learned entries or through static configuration), or by statically configured MAC/IP address pairs. The addresses assigned to DHCP clients can also be carefully controlled using static or dynamic bindings with the IP Source Guard and DHCP Snooping commands.

This switch provides client security using the following options:

• Private VLANs – Provide port-based security and isolation between

ports within the assigned VLAN. (See “Configuring Private VLANs” on page 12-25.)

• 802.1X – Use IEEE 802.1X port authentication to control access to

specific ports. (See “Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication” on page

6-19.)

• Port Security – Configure secure addresses for individual ports.

• IP Source Guard 5 – Filters untrusted DHCP messages on unsecure ports

by building and maintaining a DHCP snooping binding table. (See “IP

Source Guard Commands” on page 22-4.)

5. These functions can only be configured through the Command Line Interface.

7-1

LIENT

ECURITY

• DHCP Snooping

– Filters IP traffic on unsecure ports for which the source address cannot be identified via DHCP snooping nor static

source bindings. (See “DHCP Snooping Commands” on page 22-10.)

Configuring Port Security

Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port.

When port security is enabled on a port, the switch stops learning new

MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number. Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted as authorized to access the network through that port. If a device with an unauthorized

MAC address attempts to use the switch port, the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message.

To use port security, specify a maximum number of addresses to allow on the port and then let the switch dynamically learn the <source MAC address, VLAN> pair for frames received on the port. Note that you can also manually add secure addresses to the port using the Static Address

Table (page 10-1). When the port has reached the maximum number of

MAC addresses the selected port will stop learning. The MAC addresses already in the address table will be retained and will not age out. Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the switch.

Command Usage

• A secure port has the following restrictions:

- It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk.

- It should not be connected to a network interconnection device.

7-2

ONFIGURING

ORT

ECURITY

• The default maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a secure port is zero. You must configure a maximum address count from 1 -

1024 for the port to allow access.

• If a port is disabled (shut down) due to a security violation, it must be

manually re-enabled from the Port/Port Configuration page (page 9-4).

Command Attributes

• Port – Port number.

• Name

– Descriptive text (page 24-3).

• Action – Indicates the action to be taken when a port security violation is detected:

None : No action should be taken. (This is the default.)

Trap : Send an SNMP trap message.

Shutdown : Disable the port.

Trap and Shutdown : Send an SNMP trap message and disable the port.

• Security Status – Enables or disables port security on the port.

(Default: Disabled)

• Max MAC Count – The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port. (Range: 0 - 1024, where 0 means disabled)

• Trunk

– Trunk number if port is a member (page 9-9 and 9-11).

7-3

LIENT

ECURITY

Web – Click Security, Port Security. Set the action to take when an invalid address is detected on a port, mark the checkbox in the Status column to enable security for a port, set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a port, and click Apply.

7-4

Figure 7-1 Port Security

CLI – This example selects the target port, sets the port security action to send a trap and disable the port, specifies a maximum address count, and then enables port security for the port.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#port security action trap-and-shutdown

Console(config-if)#port security max-mac-count 20

Console(config-if)#port security

Console(config-if)#

22-3

HAPTER

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

Access Control Lists (ACL) provide packet filtering for IP frames (based on address, protocol, Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code), or any frames (based on MAC address or Ethernet type). To filter incoming packets, first create an access list, add the required rules, specify a mask to modify the precedence in which the rules are checked, and then bind the list to a specific port.

Configuring Access Control Lists

An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses, MAC addresses, or other more specific criteria. This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one. A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule, or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule. If no rules match for a list of all permit rules, the packet is dropped; and if no rules match for a list of all deny rules, the packet is accepted.

You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule. This is done by specifying masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked. The switch includes two system default masks that pass/filter packets matching the permit/deny rules specified in an ingress ACL. You can also configure up to seven user-defined masks for an ingress or egress

ACL. A mask must be bound exclusively to one of the basic ACL types

(that is, Ingress IP ACL, Egress IP ACL, Ingress MAC ACL, or Egress

MAC ACL), but a mask can be bound to up to four ACLs of the same type.

8-1

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

The following filtering modes are supported:

• Standard IP ACL mode (STD-ACL) filters packets based on the source

IP address.

• Extended IP ACL mode (EXT-ACL) filters packets based on source or destination IP address, as well as protocol type and protocol port number. If the TCP protocol is specified, packets can also be filtered based on the TCP control code.

• MAC ACL mode (MAC-ACL) filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type (RFC 1060).

Command Usage

The following restrictions apply to ACLs:

• The switch supports ACLs for both ingress and egress filtering.

However, only one IP ACL and one MAC ACL can be bound to any port for ingress filtering, and one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for egress filtering. In other words, only four ACLs can be bound to an interface – Ingress IP ACL, Egress IP ACL, Ingress MAC ACL and

Egress MAC ACL.

• When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter, all entries in the ACL must be deny rules. Otherwise, the bind operation will fail.

• The maximum number of ACLs is:

Fast Ethernet ports - 157 rules, 4 masks shared by 8-port groups

Gigabit Ethernet ports - 29 rules, 4 masks

• Each ACL can have up to 32 rules. However, due to resource restrictions, the average number of rules bound to the ports should not exceed 20.

• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule.

• The switch does not support the explicit “deny any any” rule for the egress IP ACL or the egress MAC ACLs. If these rules are included in an

ACL, and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking, the bind operation will fail.

8-2

ONFIGURING

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

• Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination-mac-known packets, not for multicast, broadcast, or destination-mac-unknown packets.

The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows:

1. User-defined rules in the Egress MAC ACL for egress ports.

2. User-defined rules in the Egress IP ACL for egress ports.

3. User-defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.

4. User-defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.

5. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.

6. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.

7. If no explicit rule is matched, the implicit default is permit all.

Setting the ACL Name and Type

Use the ACL Configuration page to designate the name and type of an

ACL.

Command Attributes

• Name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)

• Type – There are three filtering modes:

Standard : IP ACL mode that filters packets based on the source IP address.

Extended : IP ACL mode that filters packets based on source or destination IP address, as well as protocol type and protocol port number. If the “TCP” protocol is specified, then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code.

MAC : MAC ACL mode that filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type (RFC 1060).

8-3

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

Web – Click Security, ACL, Configuration. Enter an ACL name in the

Name field, select the list type (IP Standard, IP Extended, or MAC), and click Add to open the configuration page for the new list.

Figure 8-1 Selecting ACL Type

CLI – This example creates a standard IP ACL named bill.

Console(config)#access-list ip standard bill

Console(config-std-acl)#

23-3

Configuring a Standard ACL

Command Attributes

• Action – An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules.

• Address Type – Specifies the source IP address. Use “Any” to include all possible addresses, “Host” to specify a specific host address in the

Address field, or “IP” to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields. (Options: Any, Host, IP; Default: Any)

• IP Address – Source IP address.

• Subnet Mask – A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255, each separated by a period. The mask uses 1 bits to indicate “match” and

0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The mask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address, and compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port(s) to which this ACL has been assigned.

8-4

ONFIGURING

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Select the address type

(Any, Host, or IP). If you select “Host,” enter a specific address. If you select “IP,” enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range. Then click Add.

Figure 8-2 ACL Configuration - Standard IPv4

CLI – This example configures one permit rule for the specific address

10.1.1.21 and another rule for the address range 168.92.16.x – 168.92.31.x using a bitmask.

23-4

Console(config-std-acl)#permit host 10.1.1.21

Console(config-std-acl)#permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0

Console(config-std-acl)#

Configuring an Extended ACL

Command Attributes

• Action – An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules.

• Source/Destination Address Type – Specifies the source or destination IP address. Use “Any” to include all possible addresses,

“Host” to specify a specific host address in the Address field, or “IP” to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields.

(Options: Any, Host, IP; Default: Any)

8-5

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

• Source/Destination IP Address – Source or destination IP address.

• Source/Destination Subnet Mask – Subnet mask for source or

destination address. (See the description for SubMask on page 8-4.)

• Service Type – Packet priority settings based on the following criteria:

Precedence – IP precedence level. (Range: 0-8, where 8 means any)

TOS – Type of Service level. (Range: 0-16, where 16 means any)

DSCP – DSCP priority level. (Range: 0-64, where 64 means any)

• Protocol – Specifies the protocol type to match as TCP, UDP or Others, where others indicates a specific protocol number (0-255). (Options:

TCP, UDP, Others; Default: TCP)

• Source/Destination Port – Source/destination port number for the specified protocol type. (Range: 0-65535)

• Source/Destination Port Bit Mask – Decimal number representing the port bits to match. (Range: 0-65535)

• Control Code – Decimal number (representing a bit string) that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header. (Range: 0-63)

• Control Code Bit Mask – Decimal number representing the code bits to match.

The control bitmask is a decimal number (for an equivalent binary bit mask) that is applied to the control code. Enter a decimal number, where the equivalent binary bit “1” means to match a bit and “0” means to ignore a bit. The following bits may be specified:

- 1 (fin) – Finish

- 2 (syn) – Synchronize

- 4 (rst) – Reset

- 8 (psh) – Push

- 16 (ack) – Acknowledgement

- 32 (urg) – Urgent pointer

For example, use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set:

- SYN flag valid, use control-code 2, control bitmask 2

- Both SYN and ACK valid, use control-code 18, control bitmask 18

- SYN valid and ACK invalid, use control-code 2, control bitmask 18

8-6

ONFIGURING

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Specify the source and/or destination addresses. Select the address type (Any, Host, or IP). If you select “Host,” enter a specific address. If you select “IP,” enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range. Set any other required criteria, such as service type, protocol type, or TCP control code. Then click Add.

Figure 8-3 ACL Configuration - Extended IPv4

CLI – This example adds three rules:

1. Accept any incoming packets if the source address is in subnet 10.7.1.x.

For example, if the rule is matched; i.e., the rule (10.7.1.0 &

255.255.255.0) equals the masked address (10.7.1.2 & 255.255.255.0), the packet passes through.

2. Allow TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 (i.e., HTTP).

8-7

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

3. Permit all TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 with the

TCP control code set to “SYN.”

Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any

23-5

Console(config-ext-acl)#permit tcp 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any destination-port 80

Console(config-ext-acl)#permit tcp 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any control-flag 2 2

Console(config-std-acl)#

Configuring a MAC ACL

Command Attributes

• Action – An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules.

• Source/Destination Address Type – Use “Any” to include all possible addresses, “Host” to indicate a specific MAC address, or “MAC” to specify an address range with the Address and Bitmask fields. (Options:

Any, Host, MAC; Default: Any)

• Source/Destination MAC Address – Source or destination MAC address.

• Source/Destination MAC Bit Mask – Hexidecimal mask for source or destination MAC address.

• VID – VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4093)

• VID Bit Mask – VLAN bitmask. (Range: 1-4093)

• Ethernet Type – This option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets. (Range: 600-fff hex.)

A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060.

A few of the more common types include 0800 (IP), 0806 (ARP), 8137

(IPX).

• Ethernet Type Bit Mask – Protocol bitmask. (Range: 600-fff hex.)

• Packet Format – This attribute includes the following packet types:

Any – Any Ethernet packet type.

Untagged-eth2 – Untagged Ethernet II packets.

Untagged-802.3 – Untagged Ethernet 802.3 packets.

Tagged-eth2 – Tagged Ethernet II packets.

Tagged-802.3 – Tagged Ethernet 802.3 packets.

8-8

ONFIGURING

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

Command Usage

Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination-mac-known packets, not for multicast, broadcast, or destination-mac-unknown packets.

Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Specify the source and/or destination addresses. Select the address type (Any, Host, or MAC). If you select “Host,” enter a specific address (e.g., 11-22-33-44-55-66). If you select “MAC,” enter a base address and a hexidecimal bitmask for an address range. Set any other required criteria, such as VID, Ethernet type, or packet format. Then click Add.

Figure 8-4 ACL Configuration - MAC

CLI – This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00-e0-29-94-34-de where the Ethernet type is 0800.

Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de ethertype 0800

Console(config-mac-acl)#

23-17

8-9

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

Configuring ACL Masks

You must specify masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked. ACL rules matching the first entry in the mask are checked first.

Rules matching subsequent entries in the mask are then checked in the specified order.

The switch includes two system default masks that pass/filter packets matching the permit/deny rules specified in an ingress ACL. You can also configure up to seven user-defined masks for an ingress or egress ACL. A mask must be bound exclusively to one of the basic ACL types (i.e., Ingress

IP ACL, Egress IP ACL, Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL), but a mask can be bound to up to four ACLs of the same type.

Command Usage

• Up to seven entries can be assigned to an ACL mask.

• Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found. The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask, and not the order in which the ACL rules are entered.

• First create the required ACLs and the ingress or egress masks before mapping an ACL to an interface.

• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule.

8-10

ONFIGURING

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

Specifying the Mask Type

Use the ACL Mask Configuration page to edit the mask for the Ingress IP

ACL, Egress IP ACL, Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL.

Web – Click Security, ACL, Mask Configuration. Click Edit for one of the basic mask types to open the configuration page.

Figure 8-5 Selecting ACL Mask Types

CLI – This example creates an IP ingress mask, and then adds two rules.

Each rule is checked in order of precedence to look for a match in the

ACL entries. The first entry matching a mask is applied to the inbound packet.

Console(config)#access-list ip mask-precedence in

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask host any

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask 255.255.255.0 any

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#

23-8

23-9

8-11

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

Configuring an IP ACL Mask

This mask defines the fields to check in the IP header.

Command Usage

• Masks that include an entry for a Layer 4 protocol source port or destination port can only be applied to packets with a header length of exactly five bytes.

Command Attributes

• Source/Destination Address Type – Specifies the source or destination IP address. Use “Any” to match any address, “Host” to specify a host address (not a subnet), or “IP” to specify a range of addresses. (Options: Any, Host, IP; Default: Any)

• Source/Destination Subnet Mask – Source or destination address of rule must match this bitmask. (See the description for SubMask on

page 8-4.)

• Protocol Mask – Check the protocol field.

• Service Type Mask – Check the rule for the specified priority type.

(Options: Precedence, TOS, DSCP; Default: TOS)

• Source/Destination Port Bit Mask – Protocol port of rule must match this bitmask. (Range: 0-65535)

• Control Code Bit Mask – Control flags of rule must match this bitmask. (Range: 0-63)

8-12

ONFIGURING

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

Web – Configure the mask to match the required rules in the IP ingress or egress ACLs. Set the mask to check for any source or destination address, a specific host address, or an address range. Include other criteria to search for in the rules, such as a protocol type or one of the service types. Or use a bitmask to search for specific protocol port(s) or TCP control code(s).

Then click Add.

Figure 8-6 ACL Mask Configuration - IP

8-13

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

CLI – This shows that the entries in the mask override the precedence in which the rules are entered into the ACL. In the following example, packets with the source address 10.1.1.1 are dropped because the “deny

10.1.1.1 255.255.255.255” rule has the higher precedence according the

“mask host any” entry.

23-3

23-4

Console(config)#access-list ip standard A2

Console(config-std-acl)#permit 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0

Console(config-std-acl)#deny 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.255

Console(config-std-acl)#exit

Console(config)#access-list ip mask-precedence in

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask host any

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask 255.255.255.0 any

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#

23-8

23-9

Configuring a MAC ACL Mask

This mask defines the fields to check in the packet header.

Command Usage

You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port.

Command Attributes

• Source/Destination Address Type – Use “Any” to match any address, “Host” to specify the host address for a single node, or “MAC” to specify a range of addresses. (Options: Any, Host, MAC;

Default: Any)

• Source/Destination Bit Mask – Address of rule must match this bitmask.

• VID Bitmask – VLAN ID of rule must match this bitmask.

• Ethernet Type Bit Mask – Ethernet type of rule must match this bitmask.

• Packet Format Mask – A packet format must be specified in the rule.

8-14

ONFIGURING

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

Web – Configure the mask to match the required rules in the MAC ingress or egress ACLs. Set the mask to check for any source or destination address, a host address, or an address range. Use a bitmask to search for specific VLAN ID(s) or Ethernet type(s). Or check for rules where a packet format was specified. Then click Add.

Figure 8-7 ACL Mask Configuration - MAC

8-15

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

CLI – This example shows how to create an Ingress MAC ACL and bind it to a port. You can then see that the order of the rules have been changed by the mask.

Console(config)#access-list mac M4

Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any any

Console(config-mac-acl)#deny tagged-eth2 00-11-11-11-11-11 ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff any vid 3

Console(config-mac-acl)#end

Console#show access-list

MAC access-list M4:

permit any any

deny tagged-eth2 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any vid 3

Console(config)#access-list mac mask-precedence in

Console(config-mac-mask-acl)#mask pktformat ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff any vid

Console(config-mac-mask-acl)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/12

Console(config-if)#mac access-group M4 in

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show access-list

MAC access-list M4:

deny tagged-eth2 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any vid 3

permit any any

MAC ingress mask ACL:

mask pktformat host any vid

Console#

23-16

23-17

23-25

23-20

23-21

24-2

23-23

Binding a Port to an Access Control List

After configuring the Access Control Lists (ACL), you should bind them to the ports that need to filter traffic. You can only bind a port to one ACL for each basic type – IP ingress, IP egress, MAC ingress and MAC egress.

Command Usage

• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port.

• This switch supports ACLs for both ingress and egress filtering.

However, you can only bind one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for ingress filtering, and one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for egress filtering. In other words, only four ACLs can be bound to an interface – Ingress IP ACL, Egress IP ACL, Ingress MAC ACL and

Egress MAC ACL.

8-16

INDING A

ORT TO AN

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

• When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter, all entries in the ACL must be deny rules. Otherwise, the bind operation will fail.

• The switch does not support the explicit “deny any any” rule for the egress IP ACL or the egress MAC ACLs. If these rules are included in an

ACL, and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking, the bind operation will fail.

Command Attributes

• Port – Fixed port or SFP module. (Range: 1-28)

• IP – Specifies the IP ACL to bind to a port.

• MAC – Specifies the MAC ACL to bind to a port.

• IN – ACL for ingress packets.

• OUT – ACL for egress packets. (Egress filtering is not supported.)

• ACL Name – Name of the ACL.

Web – Click Security, ACL, Port Binding. Mark the Enable field for the port you want to bind to an ACL for ingress traffic, select the required

ACL from the drop-down list, then click Apply.

Figure 8-8 ACL Port Binding

8-17

CCESS

ONTROL

ISTS

CLI – This examples assigns an IP and MAC ingress ACL to port 1, and an IP ingress ACL to port 2.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#ip access-group tom in

Console(config-if)#mac access-group jerry in

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#ip access-group tom in

Console(config-if)#

24-2

23-14

23-23

8-18

HAPTER

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Displaying Connection Status

You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current connection status, including link state, speed/duplex mode, flow control, and auto-negotiation.

Field Attributes

(Web)

• Name – Interface label.

• Type – Indicates the port type. (100BASE-BX, 1000BASE-T, or SFP)

• Admin Status – Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled.

• Oper Status – Indicates if the link is Up or Down.

• Speed Duplex Status – Shows the current speed and duplex mode.

(Auto, or fixed choice)

• Flow Control Status – Indicates the type of flow control currently in use. (IEEE 802.3x, Back-Pressure or None)

• Autonegotiation – Shows if auto-negotiation is enabled or disabled.

• Media Type 6 – Shows the forced/preferred port type to use for combination ports 25-28. (Copper-Forced, SFP-Forced,

SFP-Preferred-Auto)

• Trunk Member

– Shows if port is a trunk member.

• Creation 7 – Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via LACP.

6. Port Information only.

7. Trunk Information only.

9-1

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Web – Click Port, Port Information or Trunk Information.

9-2

Figure 9-1 Port - Port Information

Field Attributes

(CLI)

Basic information:

• Port type – Indicates the port type. (100BASE-BX, 1000BASE-T, or

SFP)

• MAC address – The physical layer address for this port. (To access this

item on the web, see “Setting the Switch’s IP Address” on page 4-12.)

Configuration:

• Name – Interface label.

• Port admin – Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled (i.e., up or down).

• Speed-duplex – Shows the current speed and duplex mode. (Auto, or fixed choice)

• Capabilities – Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port during auto-negotiation. (To access this item on the web, see

“Configuring Interface Connections” on page 3-48.) The following capabilities are supported.

10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation

10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation

100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation

ISPLAYING

ONNECTION

TATUS

100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation

1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation

Sym - Transmits and receives pause frames for flow control

FC - Supports flow control

• Broadcast storm – Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled.

• Broadcast storm limit – Shows the broadcast storm threshold. (500 -

262143 packets per second)

• Flow control – Shows if flow control is enabled or disabled.

• LACP – Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled.

• Port security – Shows if port security is enabled or disabled.

• Max MAC count – Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be learned by a port. (0 - 1024 addresses)

• Port security action – Shows the response to take when a security violation is detected. (shutdown, trap, trap-and-shutdown)

• Media Type – Shows the forced or preferred port type to use for combination ports 25-28. (copper forced, SFP forced, SFP preferred auto)

Current status:

• Link status – Indicates if the link is up or down.

• Port operation status – Provides detailed information on port state.

(Displayed only when the link is up.).

• Operation speed-duplex – Shows the current speed and duplex mode.

• Flow control type – Indicates the type of flow control currently in use.

(IEEE 802.3x, Back-Pressure or none)

9-3

ORT

ONFIGURATION

CLI – This example shows the connection status for Port 5.

Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/5

Information of Eth 1/13

Basic information:

Port type: 100TX

Mac address: 00-30-F1-D4-73-A5

Configuration:

Name:

Port admin: Up

Speed-duplex: Auto

Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full

Broadcast storm: Enabled

Broadcast storm limit: 500 packets/second

Flow control: Disabled

LACP: Disabled

Port security: Disabled

Max MAC count: 0

Port security action: None

Media type: None

Current status:

Link status: Down

Operation speed-duplex: 100full

Flow control type: None

Console#

24-13

Configuring Interface Connections

You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable/disable an interface, set auto-negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise, or manually fix the speed and duplex mode, and flow control.

Command Attributes

• Name – Allows you to label an interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)

• Admin – Allows you to manually disable an interface. You can disable an interface due to abnormal behavior (e.g., excessive collisions), and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved. You may also disable an interface for security reasons.

• Speed/Duplex – Allows you to manually set the port speed and duplex mode (i.e., with auto-negotiation disabled).

9-4

ONFIGURING

NTERFACE

ONNECTIONS

Note: 100BASE-BX ports are fixed at 100 Mbps, full-duplex.

The 1000BASE-T standard does not support forced mode.

Always use auto-negotiation to establish a connection over any

1000BASE-T port or trunk.

• Flow Control – Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control.

• Autonegotiation (Port Capabilities) – Allows auto-negotiation to be enabled/disabled. When auto-negotiation is enabled, you need to specify the capabilities to be advertised. When auto-negotiation is disabled, you can force the settings for speed, duplex mode, and flow control. The following capabilities are supported.

10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation

10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation

100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation

100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation

1000full - Supports 1 Gbps full-duplex operation

Sym (Gigabit only) - Check this item to transmit and receive pause frames, or clear it to auto-negotiate the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames. ( The current switch chip only supports symmetric pause frames.

)

FC - Supports flow control

Flow control can eliminate frame loss by “blocking” traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill. When enabled, back pressure is used for half-duplex operation and IEEE 802.3x for full-duplex operation. (Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem. Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub.)

(Default: Autonegotiation enabled; Advertised capabilities for

RJ-45: 100BASE-TX – 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full;

1000BASE-T – 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full;

SFP: 1000BASE-BX/SX/LX/ZX – 1000full)

• Media Type – Configures the forced/preferred port type to use for the combination ports. (Ports 25-28)

Copper-Forced - Always uses the built-in RJ45 port.

9-5

ORT

ONFIGURATION

SFP-Forced - Always uses the SFP port (even if module is not installed).

SFP-Preferred-Auto - Uses SFP port if both combination types are functioning and the SFP port has a valid link. (This is the default.)

• Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To create trunks and

select port members, see “Creating Trunk Groups” on page 9-8.

Note: Auto-negotiation must be disabled before you can configure or force the interface to use the Speed/Duplex Mode or Flow

Control options.

Web – Click Port, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Modify the required interface settings, and click Apply.

Figure 9-2 Port - Port Configuration

9-6

ONFIGURING

NTERFACE

ONNECTIONS

CLI – Select the interface, and then enter the required settings.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13

Console(config-if)#description RD SW#13

Console(config-if)#shutdown

Console(config-if)#no shutdown

Console(config-if)#no negotiation

Console(config-if)#speed-duplex 100half

Console(config-if)#negotiation

Console(config-if)#capabilities 100half

Console(config-if)#capabilities 100full

Console(config-if)#capabilities flowcontrol

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/21

Console(config-if)#media-type copper-forced

Console(config-if)#

24-2

24-3

24-9

24-5

24-3

24-6

24-8

9-7

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Creating Trunk Groups

You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual, aggregate link. A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments where bottlenecks exist, as well as providing a fault-tolerant link between two devices. You can create up to 12 trunks.

The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation

Control Protocol (LACP). Static trunks have to be manually configured at both ends of the link, and the switches must comply with the Cisco

EtherChannel standard. On the other hand, LACP configured ports can automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP-configured ports on another device. You can configure any number of ports on the switch as

LACP, as long as they are not already configured as part of a static trunk. If ports on another device are also configured as LACP, the switch and the other device will negotiate a trunk link between them. If an LACP trunk consists of more than eight ports, all other ports will be placed in a standby mode. Should one link in the trunk fail, one of the standby ports will automatically be activated to replace it.

Command Usage

Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk, the other ports provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails.

However, before making any physical connections between devices, use the web interface or CLI to specify the trunk on the devices at both ends.

When using a port trunk, take note of the following points:

• Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop.

• You can create up to 12 trunks, with up to eight ports per trunk.

• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports.

• When configuring static trunks on switches of different types, they must be compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard.

9-8

REATING

RUNK

ROUPS

• The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner, including communication mode (i.e., speed, duplex mode and flow control), VLAN assignments, and CoS settings.

• Any of the Gigabit ports on the front panel can be trunked together, including ports of different media types.

• All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from/ to, added or deleted from a VLAN.

• STP, VLAN, and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk.

Statically Configuring a Trunk

Command Usage

• When configuring static trunks, you may not be able to link switches of different types, depending on the manufacturer’s implementation.

However, note that the static trunks on this switch are Cisco

EtherChannel compatible.

active links statically configured

• To avoid creating a loop in the network, be sure you add a static trunk via the configuration interface before connecting the ports, and also disconnect the ports before removing a static trunk via the configuration interface.

9-9

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Command Attributes

• Member List (Current) – Shows configured trunks (Trunk ID, Unit,

Port).

• New – Includes entry fields for creating new trunks.

Trunk – Trunk identifier. (Range: 1-32)

Port – Port identifier. (Range: 1-28)

Web – Click Port, Trunk Membership. Enter a trunk ID of 1-32 in the

Trunk field, select any of the switch ports from the scroll-down port list, and click Add. After you have completed adding ports to the member list, click Apply.

Figure 9-3 Static Trunk Configuration

9-10

REATING

RUNK

ROUPS

CLI – This example creates trunk 1 with ports 9 and 10. Just connect these ports to two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk.

24-2

Console(config)#interface port-channel 1

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/9

Console(config-if)#channel-group 1

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/10

Console(config-if)#channel-group 1

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1

Information of Trunk 1

Basic information:

Port type: 100TX

Mac address: 00-30-F1-D4-73-A2

Configuration:

Name:

Port admin: Up

Speed-duplex: Auto

Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full

Flow control: Disabled

Port security: Disabled

Max MAC count: 0

Current status:

Created by: User

Link status: Up

Port operation status: Up

Operation speed-duplex: 100full

Flow control type: None

Member Ports: Eth1/9, Eth1/10,

Console#

24-2

25-3

24-13

Enabling LACP on Selected Ports

Command Usage

• To avoid creating a loop in the network, be sure you enable LACP before connecting the ports, and also disconnect the ports before disabling

LACP.

• If the target switch has also enabled

LACP on the connected ports, the trunk will be activated automatically. active links dynamically enabled configured members backup link

9-11

ORT

ONFIGURATION

• A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available trunk ID.

• If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled, the additional ports will be placed in standby mode, and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails.

• All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex, either by forced mode or auto-negotiation.

• Trunks dynamically established through LACP will also be shown in the

Member List on the Trunk Membership menu (see page 9-9).

Command Attributes

• Member List (Current) – Shows configured trunks (Port).

• New – Includes entry fields for creating new trunks.

Port – Port identifier. (Range: 1-28)

Web – Click Port, LACP, Configuration. Select any of the switch ports from the scroll-down port list and click Add. After you have completed adding ports to the member list, click Apply.

Figure 9-4 LACP Trunk Configuration

9-12

REATING

RUNK

ROUPS

CLI – The following example enables LACP for ports 1 to 6. Just connect these ports to LACP-enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#lacp

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/6

Console(config-if)#lacp

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1

Information of Trunk 1

Basic information:

Port type: 100TX

Mac address: 00-30-F1-D4-73-A2

Configuration:

Port admin: Up

Speed-duplex: Auto

Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full

24-2

25-4

24-13

Flow control: Disabled

Port security: Disabled

Max MAC count: 0

Current status:

Created by: LACP

Link status: Up

Port operation status: Up

Operation speed-duplex: 100full

Flow control type: None

Member Ports: Eth1/1, Eth1/2, Eth1/3, Eth1/4, Eth1/5, Eth1/6,

Console#

Configuring LACP Parameters

Dynamically Creating a Port Channel –

Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria:

• Ports must have the same LACP System Priority.

• Ports must have the same LACP port Admin Key.

• However, if the “port channel” Admin Key is set (page 4-142), then the port Admin Key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group.

9-13

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Note:

If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key, page 25-8) is

not set (through the CLI) when a channel group is formed (i.e., it has a null value of 0), this key is set to the same value as the port admin key used by the interfaces that joined the group

(lacp admin key, as described in this section and on page 25-7).

Command Attributes

Set Port Actor – This menu sets the local side of an aggregate link; i.e., the ports on this switch.

• Port – Port number. (Range: 1-28)

• System Priority – LACP system priority is used to determine link aggregation group (LAG) membership, and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations. (Range: 0-65535;

Default: 32768)

- Ports must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG.

- System priority is combined with the switch’s MAC address to form the LAG identifier. This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems.

• Admin Key – The LACP administration key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same LAG. (Range: 0-65535;

Default: 1)

• Port Priority – If a link goes down, LACP port priority is used to select a backup link. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 32768)

Set Port Partner – This menu sets the remote side of an aggregate link; i.e., the ports on the attached device. The command attributes have the same meaning as those used for the port actor. However, configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner.

9-14

REATING

RUNK

ROUPS

Web – Click Port, LACP, Aggregation Port. Set the System Priority, Admin

Key, and Port Priority for the Port Actor. You can optionally configure these settings for the Port Partner. (Be aware that these settings only affect the administrative state of the partner, and will not take effect until the next time an aggregate link is formed with this device.) After you have completed setting the port LACP parameters, click Apply.

Figure 9-5 LACP - Aggregation Port

9-15

ORT

ONFIGURATION

CLI – The following example configures LACP parameters for ports 1-10.

Ports 1-8 are used as active members of the LAG, ports 9 and 10 are set to backup mode.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3

Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120

Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 128

24-2

25-6

25-7

25-9

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/10

Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3

Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120

Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 512

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show lacp sysid

Channel Group System Priority System MAC Address

-------------------------------------------------------------------

1 3 00-00-E9-31-31-31

2 32768 00-00-E9-31-31-31

Console#show lacp 1 internal

Port channel: 1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Oper Key: 120

Admin Key: 0

Eth 1/ 1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

LACPDUs Internal: 30 sec

LACP System Priority: 3

LACP Port Priority: 128

Admin Key: 120

Oper Key: 120

Admin State: defaulted, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity

Oper State: distributing, collecting, synchronization,

aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity

9-16

REATING

RUNK

ROUPS

Displaying LACP Port Counters

You can display statistics for LACP protocol messages.

Table 9-1 LACP Port Counters

Parameter Description

LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group.

LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received by this channel group.

Marker Sent

Marker Received

Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group.

Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group.

Marker Unknown

Pkts

Number of frames received that either (1) Carry the Slow

Protocols Ethernet Type value, but contain an unknown

PDU, or (2) are addressed to the Slow Protocols group

MAC Address, but do not carry the Slow Protocols

Ethernet Type.

Marker Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet

Type value, but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype.

Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Counters Information. Select a member port to display the corresponding information.

Figure 9-6 LACP - Port Counters Information

9-17

ORT

ONFIGURATION

CLI – The following example displays LACP counters for port channel 1.

Console#show lacp 1 counters

Port channel: 1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Eth 1/ 2

-------------------------------------------------------------------

LACPDUs Sent: 19

LACPDUs Receive: 10

Marker Sent: 0

Marker Receive: 0

LACPDUs Unknown Pkts: 0

LACPDUs Illegal Pkts: 0

Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side

You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the local side of an link aggregation.

Field

Oper Key

Table 9-2 LACP Internal Configuration Information

Description

Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port.

Admin Key

LACPDUs

Internal

LACP System

Priority

Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port.

Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information.

LACP system priority assigned to this port channel.

LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group.

9-18

REATING

RUNK

ROUPS

Table 9-2 LACP Internal Configuration Information (Continued)

Field

Admin State,

Oper State

Description

Administrative or operational values of the actor’s state parameters:

• Expired – The actor’s receive machine is in the expired state;

• Defaulted – The actor’s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information, administratively configured for the partner.

• Distributing – If false, distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled; i.e., distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.

• Collecting – Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled; i.e., collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.

• Synchronization – The System considers this link to be

IN_SYNC; i.e., it has been allocated to the correct Link

Aggregation Group, the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator, and the identity of the Link

Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted.

• Aggregation – The system considers this link to be aggregatable; i.e., a potential candidate for aggregation.

• Long timeout – Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate.

• LACP-Activity – Activity control value with regard to this link. (0: Passive; 1: Active)

9-19

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Internal Information. Select a port channel to display the corresponding information.

9-20

Figure 9-7 LACP - Port Internal Information

CLI – The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the local side of port channel 1.

Console#show lacp 1 internal

Port channel: 1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Oper Key: 3

Admin Key: 0

Eth 1/ 2

-------------------------------------------------------------------

LACPDUs Internal: 30 sec

LACP System Priority: 32768

LACP Port Priority: 32768

Admin Key: 3

Oper Key: 3

Admin State: defaulted, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity

Oper State: distributing, collecting, synchronization,

aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity

REATING

RUNK

ROUPS

Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side

You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the remote side of an link aggregation.

Table 9-3 LACP Neighbor Configuration Information

Field

Partner Admin System

Partner Oper System

Partner Admin

Port Number

Partner Oper

Port Number

Port Admin Priority

Port Oper Priority

Admin Key

Oper Key

Admin State

Oper State

Description

LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the user.

LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol.

Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner.

Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port’s protocol partner.

Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner.

Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner.

Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner.

Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner.

Administrative values of the partner’s state parameters.

(See preceding table.)

Operational values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)

9-21

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Neighbors Information. Select a port channel to display the corresponding information.

9-22

Figure 9-8 LACP - Port Neighbors Information

CLI – The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the remote side of port channel 1.

Console#show lacp 1 neighbors

Port channel 1 neighbors

CLI (see the “switchport packet-rate” command on page 24-10).

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Eth 1/2

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Partner Admin System ID: 32768, 00-00-00-00-00-00

Partner Oper System ID: 32768, 00-01-F4-78-AE-C0

Partner Admin Port Number: 2

Partner Oper Port Number: 2

Port Admin Priority: 32768

Port Oper Priority: 32768

Admin Key: 0

Oper Key: 3

Admin State: defaulted, distributing, collecting,

synchronization, long timeout,

Oper State: distributing, collecting, synchronization,

ETTING

ROADCAST

TORM

HRESHOLDS

Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds

Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning, or if application programs are not well designed or properly configured. If there is too much broadcast traffic on your network, performance can be severely degraded or everything can come to complete halt.

You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for broadcast traffic for each port. Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified threshold will then be dropped.

Command Usage

• Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic.

• The resolution is 1 packet per second (pps); i.e., any setting between

500-262143 is acceptable.

Note: Multicast and unicast storm thresholds can also be set using the

Command Attributes

• Port 8 – Port number.

• Trunk 9 – Trunk number

• Type – Indicates the port type. (100BASE-BX, 1000BASE-T, or SFP)

• Protect Status – Shows whether or not broadcast storm control has been enabled. (Default: Enabled)

• Threshold – Threshold as percentage of port bandwidth.

(Options: 500-262143 packets per second; Default: 500 pps)

•

Trunk 8 – Shows if port is a trunk member.

8. Port Broadcast Control

9. Trunk Broadcast Control

9-23

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Web – Click Port, Port Broadcast Control or Trunk Broadcast Control.

Check the Enabled box for any interface, set the threshold, and click

Apply.

9-24

Figure 9-9 Port Broadcast Control

CLI – Specify any interface, and then enter the threshold. The following disables broadcast storm control for port 1, and then sets broadcast suppression at 600 packets per second for port 2.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#no switchport broadcast

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast packet-rate 600

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/2

Information of Eth 1/2

Broadcast threshold: Enabled, 600 packets/second

LACP status: Disabled

Ingress rate limit: Disable, 1000M bits per second

Egress rate limit: Disable, 1000M bits per second

VLAN membership mode: Hybrid

Ingress rule: Disabled

Acceptable frame type: All frames

Native VLAN: 1

Priority for untagged traffic: 0

GVRP status: Disabled

Allowed VLAN: 1(u),

Forbidden VLAN:

Console#

24-2

24-10

24-16

ONFIGURING

ORT

IRRORING

Configuring Port Mirroring

You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real-time analysis. You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the target port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner.

Source port(s)

Single target port

Command Usage

• Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed, otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port.

• All mirror sessions have to share the same destination port.

• When mirroring port traffic, the target port must be included in the same

VLAN as the source port when using MSTP (see “Spanning Tree

Algorithm” on page 11-1).

Command Attributes

• Mirror Sessions – Displays a list of current mirror sessions.

• Source Port – The port whose traffic will be monitored. (Range: 1-28)

• Type – Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port, Rx

(receive), Tx (transmit), or Both. (Default: Rx)

• Target Port – The port that will “mirror” the traffic from the source port. (Range: 1-28)

9-25

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Web – Click Port, Mirror Port Configuration. Specify the source port, the traffic type to be mirrored, and the monitor port, then click Add.

Figure 9-10 Mirror Port Configuration

CLI – Use the interface command to select the monitor port, then use the port monitor command to specify the source port. Note that default mirroring under the CLI is for both received and transmitted packets.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#

24-2

26-1

Configuring Rate Limits

This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface. Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the switch. Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted, while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped.

Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks. When an interface is configured with this feature, the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity. Non-conforming traffic is dropped, conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes.

Note: Rate limits can also be based on per port CoS values using the CLI

(see the “vlan priority” command on page 31-9).

9-26

ONFIGURING

ATE

IMITS

Command Attribute

Rate Limit – Sets the output rate limit for an interface.

Default Status – Disabled

Default Rate – Fast Ethernet: 100 Mbps; Gigabit Ethernet: 1000 Mbps

Range – Fast Ethernet: 1 - 1000 Mbps; Gigabit Ethernet: 1 - 1000 Mbps

Web Click Port, Rate Limit, Input/Output Port/Trunk Configuration.

Set the Input Rate Limit Status or Output Rate Limit Status, then set the rate limit for the individual interfaces, and click Apply.

Figure 9-11 Rate Limit Configuration

CLI This example sets the rate limit for input and output traffic passing through port 1 to 60 Mbps.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#rate-limit input 60

Console(config-if)#rate-limit output 60

Console(config-if)#

24-2

27-2

9-27

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Showing Port Statistics

You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces

Group and Ethernet-like MIBs, as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON MIB. Interfaces and Ethernet-like statistics display errors on the traffic passing through each port. This information can be used to identify potential problems with the switch (such as a faulty port or unusually heavy loading). RMON statistics provide access to a broad range of statistics, including a total count of different frame types and sizes passing through each port. All values displayed have been accumulated since the last system reboot, and are shown as counts per second. Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default.

Note: RMON groups 2, 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management software such as HP OpenView.

Parameter

Interface Statistics

Table 9-4 Port Statistics

Description

Received Octets The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.

Received Unicast Packets The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

Received Multicast Packets The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.

Received Broadcast

Packets

Received Discarded

Packets

The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.

The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.

9-28

HOWING

ORT

TATISTICS

Table 9-4 Port Statistics (Continued)

Parameter

Received Unknown

Packets

Received Errors

Description

The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.

The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.

Transmit Octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.

Transmit Unicast Packets The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Transmit Multicast Packets The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Transmit Broadcast

Packets

Transmit Discarded

Packets

The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.

The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.

Transmit Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.

Etherlike Statistics

Alignment Errors

Late Collisions

The number of alignment errors (missynchronized data packets).

The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit-times into the transmission of a packet.

9-29

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Table 9-4 Port Statistics (Continued)

Parameter

FCS Errors

Excessive Collisions

Single Collision Frames

Internal MAC Transmit

Errors

Description

A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check. This count does not include frames received with frame-too-long or frame-too-short error.

A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions.

This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in full-duplex mode.

The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision.

A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error.

Multiple Collision Frames A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision.

Carrier Sense Errors The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame.

SQE Test Errors A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sublayer for a particular interface.

Frames Too Long A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size.

Deferred Transmissions A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy.

Internal MAC Receive

Errors

A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error.

9-30

HOWING

ORT

TATISTICS

Table 9-4 Port Statistics (Continued)

Parameter

RMON Statistics

Drop Events

Description

Jabbers

Received Bytes

Collisions

Received Frames

Broadcast Frames

The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources.

The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either an FCS or alignment error.

Total number of bytes of data received on the network. This statistic can be used as a reasonable indication of Ethernet utilization.

The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.

The total number of frames (bad, broadcast and multicast) received.

The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.

Multicast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address.

CRC/Alignment Errors The number of CRC/alignment errors (FCS or alignment errors).

Undersize Frames The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.

Oversize Frames

Fragments

The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.

The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and had either an FCS or alignment error.

9-31

ORT

ONFIGURATION

Parameter

64 Bytes Frames

65-127 Byte Frames

128-255 Byte Frames

256-511 Byte Frames

512-1023 Byte Frames

1024-1518 Byte Frames

1519-1536 Byte Frames

Table 9-4 Port Statistics (Continued)

Description

The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length

(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Web – Click Port, Port Statistics. Select the required interface, and click

Query. You can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to update the screen.

9-32

HOWING

ORT

TATISTICS

Figure 9-12 Port Statistics

9-33

ORT

ONFIGURATION

CLI – This example shows statistics for port 12.

Console#show interfaces counters ethernet 1/12

Ethernet 1/12

Iftable stats:

Octets input: 868453, Octets output: 3492122

Unicast input: 7315, Unitcast output: 6658

Discard input: 0, Discard output: 0

Error input: 0, Error output: 0

Unknown protos input: 0, QLen output: 0

Extended iftable stats:

Multi-cast input: 0, Multi-cast output: 17027

Broadcast input: 231, Broadcast output: 7

Ether-like stats:

24-14

Alignment errors: 0, FCS errors: 0

Single Collision frames: 0, Multiple collision frames: 0

SQE Test errors: 0, Deferred transmissions: 0

Late collisions: 0, Excessive collisions: 0

Internal mac transmit errors: 0, Internal mac receive errors: 0

Frame too longs: 0, Carrier sense errors: 0

Symbol errors: 0

RMON stats:

Drop events: 0, Octets: 4422579, Packets: 31552

Broadcast pkts: 238, Multi-cast pkts: 17033

Undersize pkts: 0, Oversize pkts: 0

Fragments: 0, Jabbers: 0

CRC align errors: 0, Collisions: 0

Packet size <= 64 octets: 25568, Packet size 65 to 127 octets: 1616

Packet size 128 to 255 octets: 1249, Packet size 256 to 511 octets: 1449

Packet size 512 to 1023 octets: 802, Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets: 871

Console#

9-34

HAPTER

DDRESS

ABLE

ETTINGS

Switches store the addresses for all known devices. This information is used to pass traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports. All the addresses learned by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table. You can also manually configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port.

Setting Static Addresses

A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch. Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved.

When a static address is seen on another interface, the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table.

Command Attributes

• Static Address Counts 10 – The number of manually configured addresses.

• Current Static Address Table – Lists all the static addresses.

• Interface – Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address.

• MAC Address – Physical address of a device mapped to this interface.

• VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).

10. Web Only.

10-1

DDRESS

ABLE

ETTINGS

Web – Click Address Table, Static Addresses. Specify the interface, the

MAC address and VLAN, then click Add Static Address.

10-2

Figure 10-1 Static Addresses

CLI – This example adds an address to the static address table, but sets it to be deleted when the switch is reset.

Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-e0-29-94-34-de interface ethernet 1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset

Console(config)#

28-2

ISPLAYING THE

DDRESS

ABLE

Displaying the Address Table

The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the source address for traffic entering the switch. When the destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database, the packets intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated port. Otherwise, the traffic is flooded to all ports.

Command Attributes

• Interface – Indicates a port or trunk.

• MAC Address – Physical address associated with this interface.

• VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4093).

• Address Table Sort Key – You can sort the information displayed based on MAC address, VLAN or interface (port or trunk).

• Dynamic Address Counts – The number of addresses dynamically learned.

• Current Dynamic Address Table – Lists all the dynamic addresses.

10-3

DDRESS

ABLE

ETTINGS

Web – Click Address Table, Dynamic Addresses. Specify the search type

(i.e., mark the Interface, MAC Address, or VLAN checkbox), select the method of sorting the displayed addresses, and then click Query.

10-4

Figure 10-2 Dynamic Addresses

CLI – This example also displays the address table entries for port 1.

28-4

Console#show mac-address-table interface ethernet 1/1

Interface Mac Address Vlan Type

--------- ----------------- ---- -----------------

Eth 1/ 1 00-E0-29-94-34-DE 1 Permanent

Eth 1/ 1 00-20-9C-23-CD-60 2 Learned

Console#

HANGING THE

GING

IME

Changing the Aging Time

You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table.

Command Attributes

• Aging Status – Enables/disables the aging function.

• Aging Time – The time after which a learned entry is discarded.

(Range: 10-1000000 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)

Web – Click Address Table, Address Aging. Specify the new aging time, click Apply.

Figure 10-3 Address Aging

CLI – This example sets the aging time to 400 seconds.

Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 400

Console(config)#

28-5

10-5

DDRESS

ABLE

ETTINGS

10-6

HAPTER

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

The Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA) can be used to detect and disable network loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or routers. This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices (that is, an STA-compliant switch, bridge or router) in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network, and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down.

The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions:

• STP – Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)

• RSTP – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)

• MSTP – Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1s)

STP – STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device

(STP-compliant switch, bridge or router) that serves as the root of the spanning tree network. It selects a root port on each bridging device

(except for the root device) which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device. Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device. All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports.

After determining the lowest cost spanning tree, it enables all root ports and designated ports, and disables all other ports. Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports, eliminating any possible network loops.

11-1

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

Designated

Root x x

Designated

Bridge

Designated

Port x

Root

Port x x

Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for

Hello BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the Root

Bridge. If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval

(Maximum Age), the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down. This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology.

RSTP – RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower, legacy

STP. RSTP is also incorporated into MSTP. RSTP achieves must faster reconfiguration (i.e., around 1 to 3 seconds, compared to 30 seconds or more for STP) by reducing the number of state changes before active ports start learning, predefining an alternate route that can be used when a node or port fails, and retaining the forwarding database for ports insensitive to changes in the tree structure when reconfiguration occurs.

MSTP – When using STP or RSTP, it may be difficult to maintain a stable path between all VLAN members. Frequent changes in the tree structure can easily isolate some of the group members. MSTP (which is based on

RSTP for fast convergence) is designed to support independent spanning trees based on VLAN groups. Using multiple spanning trees can provide multiple forwarding paths and enable load balancing. One or more VLANs can be grouped into a Multiple Spanning Tree Instance (MSTI). MSTP builds a separate Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) for each instance to

11-2

maintain connectivity among each of the assigned VLAN groups. MSTP then builds a Internal Spanning Tree (IST) for the Region containing all commonly configured MSTP bridges.

IST

(for this Region)

MST 1

Region R

MST 2

CIST

An MST Region consists of a group of interconnected bridges that have the same MST Configuration Identifiers (including the Region Name,

Revision Level and Configuration Digest – see “Configuring Multiple

Spanning Trees” on page 21). An MST Region may contain multiple MSTP

Instances. An Internal Spanning Tree (IST) is used to connect all the

MSTP switches within an MST region. A Common Spanning Tree (CST) interconnects all adjacent MST Regions, and acts as a virtual bridge node for communications with STP or RSTP nodes in the global network.

Region 1 Region 1

CST

Region 4 Region 4

IST

Region 2 Region 3 Region 2 Region 3

11-3

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

MSTP connects all bridges and LAN segments with a single Common and

Internal Spanning Tree (CIST). The CIST is formed as a result of the running spanning tree algorithm between switches that support the STP,

RSTP, MSTP protocols.

Displaying Global Settings

You can display a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the entire switch using the STA Information screen.

Field Attributes

• Spanning Tree State – Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an STA-compliant network.

• Bridge ID – A unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of the bridge priority, the MST Instance ID 0 for the Common Spanning Tree when

spanning tree mode is set to MSTP (page 11-8), and MAC address

(where the address is taken from the switch system).

• Max Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA information

(provided in the last configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network. (References to

“ports” in this section mean “interfaces,” which includes both ports and trunks.)

• Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a configuration message.

• Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding).

This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would

11-4

ISPLAYING

LOBAL

ETTINGS make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.

• Designated Root – The priority and MAC address of the device in the

Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device.

Root Port – The number of the port on this switch that is closest to the root. This switch communicates with the root device through this port. If there is no root port, then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree network.

Root Path Cost – The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root device.

• Configuration Changes – The number of times the Spanning Tree has been reconfigured.

• Last Topology Change – Time since the Spanning Tree was last reconfigured.

These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI:

• Spanning tree mode – Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch:

STP : Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)

RSTP : Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w)

MSTP : Multiple Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1s)

• Instance – Instance identifier of this spanning tree. (This is always 0 for the CIST.)

• VLANs configuration – VLANs assigned to the CIST.

• Priority – Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated port. The device with the highest priority (i.e., lower numeric value) becomes the STA root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device.

• Root Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which this device transmits a configuration message.

• Root Maximum Age – The maximum time (in seconds) this device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device ports (except for designated ports) should receive

11-5

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM configuration messages at regular intervals. If the root port ages out STA information (provided in the last configuration message), a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network.

(References to “ports” in this section means “interfaces,” which includes both ports and trunks.)

• Root Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device will wait before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding).

• Max hops – The max number of hop counts for the MST region.

• Remaining hops – The remaining number of hop counts for the MST instance.

• Transmission limit – The minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP/MSTP BPDUs.

• Path Cost Method – The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices. The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface.

Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Information.

Figure 11-1 STA Information

11-6

ISPLAYING

LOBAL

ETTINGS

CLI – This command displays global STA settings, followed by settings for each port.

Console#show spanning-tree

Spanning-tree information

• Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 11

---------------------------------------------------------------

Spanning tree mode: MSTP

Spanning tree enable/disable: enable

Instance: 0

Vlans configuration: 1-4093

Priority: 32768

Bridge Hello Time (sec.): 2

Bridge Max Age (sec.): 20

Bridge Forward Delay (sec.): 15

Root Hello Time (sec.): 2

Root Max Age (sec.): 20

Root Forward Delay (sec.): 15

Max hops: 20

Remaining hops: 20

Designated Root 32768.0.0000ABCD0000

Current root port: 1

Current root cost 200000

Number of topology changes: 1

Last topology changes time (sec.): 13380

Transmission limit: 3

Path Cost Method: long

---------------------------------------------------------------

Eth 1/ 1 information

---------------------------------------------------------------

Admin status: enabled

Role: disable

State: discarding

External admin path cost: 10000

Internal admin cost: 10000

External oper path cost: 10000

Internal oper path cost: 10000

Priority: 128

Designated cost: 300000

Designated port: 128.1

Designated root: 32768.0000E8AAAA00

Designated bridge: 32768.0030F1D473A0

Fast forwarding: disabled

Forward transitions: 0

Admin edge port: disabled

Oper edge port: disabled

Admin Link type: auto

Oper Link type: point-to-point

Note: The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not connected to the network.

11-7

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

Configuring Global Settings

Global settings apply to the entire switch.

Command Usage

• Spanning Tree Protocol 11

Uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D

BPDUs. This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network.

If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network, the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops, thus isolating group members. When operating multiple

VLANs, we recommend selecting the MSTP option.

RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits, as described below:

- STP Mode – If the switch receives an 802.1D BPDU (i.e., STP

BPDU) after a port’s migration delay timer expires, the switch assumes it is connected to an 802.1D bridge and starts using only

802.1D BPDUs.

- RSTP Mode – If RSTP is using 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires, RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port.

• Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

- To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network, you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration, allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances.

- A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments.

11. STP and RSTP BPDUs are transmitted as untagged frames, and will cross any VLAN boundaries.

11-8

ONFIGURING

LOBAL

ETTINGS

- Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes. Changing modes stops all spanning-tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode, temporarily disrupting user traffic.

Command Attributes

Basic Configuration of Global Settings

• Spanning Tree State – Enables/disables STA on this switch. (Default:

Enabled)

• Spanning Tree Type – Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch:

STP : Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D); i.e., when this option is selected, the switch will use RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode).

RSTP : Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w); RSTP is the default.

MSTP : Multiple Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1s)

• Priority – Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the

STA root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device.

(Note that lower numeric values indicate higher priority.)

- Default: 32768

- Range: 0-61440, in steps of 4096

- Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768,

36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440

Root Device Configuration

• Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a configuration message.

- Default: 2

- Minimum: 1

- Maximum: The lower of 10 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) -1]

• Maximum Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to

11-9

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM reconfigure. All device ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network.

(References to “ports” in this section mean “interfaces,” which includes both ports and trunks.)

- Default: 20

- Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)].

- Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay - 1)]

• Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device will wait before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.

- Default: 15

- Minimum: The higher of 4 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1]

- Maximum: 30

Configuration Settings for RSTP

The following attributes apply to both RSTP and MSTP:

• Path Cost Method – The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices. The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface.

- Long: Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 1-200,000,000.

(This is the default.)

- Short: Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 1-65535.

• Transmission Limit – The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs is specified by setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive protocol messages. (Range: 1-10; Default: 3)

11-10

ONFIGURING

LOBAL

ETTINGS

Configuration Settings for MSTP

• Max Instance Numbers – The maximum number of MSTP instances to which this switch can be assigned. (Default: 65)

• Configuration Digest – An MD5 signature key that contains the

VLAN ID to MST ID mapping table. In other words, this key is a mapping of all VLANs to the CIST.

• Region Revision 12 – The revision for this MSTI. (Range: 0-65535;

Default: 0)

•

Region Name 12

– The name for this MSTI. (Maximum length: 32 characters)

• Max Hop Count – The maximum number of hops allowed in the MST region before a BPDU is discarded. (Range: 1-40; Default: 20)

12. The MST name and revision number are both required to uniquely identify an MST region.

11-11

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Configuration. Modify the required attributes, and click Apply.

11-12

Figure 11-2 STA Global Configuration

ISPLAYING

NTERFACE

ETTINGS

CLI – This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol, sets the mode to

MST, and then configures the STA and MSTP parameters.

Console(config)#spanning-tree

Console(config)#spanning-tree mode mstp

Console(config)#spanning-tree priority 40000

Console(config)#spanning-tree hello-time 5

Console(config)#spanning-tree max-age 38

Console(config)#spanning-tree forward-time 20

Console(config)#spanning-tree pathcost method long

Console(config)#spanning-tree transmission-limit 4

Console(config)#spanning-tree mst-configuration

Console(config-mstp)#revision 1

Console(config-mstp)#name R&D

Console(config-mstp)#max-hops 30

Console(config-mstp)#

29-3

29-4

29-8

29-6

29-7

29-5

29-9

29-10

29-14

29-13

29-14

Displaying Interface Settings

The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree.

Field Attributes

• Spanning Tree – Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface.

STA Status – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning

Tree:

Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages, but does not forward packets.

Learning - Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information. Port address table is cleared, and the port begins learning addresses.

Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.

The rules defining port status are:

- A port on a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is always forwarding.

11-13

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

11-14

- If two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other STA device attached to this segment, the port with the smaller ID forwards packets and the other is discarding.

- All ports are discarding when the switch is booted, then some of them change state to learning, and then to forwarding.

• Forward Transitions – The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state.

• Designated Cost – The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the current Spanning Tree configuration. The slower the media, the higher the cost.

• Designated Bridge – The bridge priority and MAC address of the device through which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning Tree.

• Designated Port – The port priority and number of the port on the designated bridging device through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree.

• Oper Path Cost – The contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards the spanning tree root which include this port.

• Oper Link Type – The operational point-to-point status of the LAN segment attached to this interface. This parameter is determined by manual configuration or by auto-detection, as described for Admin Link

Type in STA Port Configuration on page 11-17.

• Oper Edge Port – This parameter is initialized to the setting for Admin

Edge Port in STA Port Configuration on page 11-17 (i.e., true or false),

but will be set to false if a BPDU is received, indicating that another bridge is attached to this port.

• Port Role – Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part of the active topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge (i.e., root port), connecting a LAN through the bridge to the root bridge (i.e., designated port), or is the MSTI regional root (i.e., master port); or is an alternate or backup port that may provide connectivity if other bridges, bridge ports, or LANs fail or are removed. The role is set to disabled (i.e., disabled port) if a port has no role within the spanning tree.

ISPLAYING

NTERFACE

ETTINGS

Alternate port receives more useful BPDUs from another bridge and is therefore not selected as the designated port.

A x

R: Root Port

A: Alternate Port

D: Designated Port

B: Backup Port

Backup port receives more useful BPDUs from the same bridge and is therefore not selected as the designated port.

A x

D B

• Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk.

(STA Port Information only)

These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI:

• Admin status – Shows if this interface is enabled.

• External path cost – The path cost for the IST. This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path cost takes precedence over port priority.)

• Internal path cost – The path cost for the MST. See the preceding item.

• Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree

Algorithm. If the path cost for all ports on a switch is the same, the port with the highest priority (i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree. This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Algorithm is detecting network

11-15

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM loops. Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.

• Designated root – The priority and MAC address of the device in the

Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device.

• Fast forwarding – This field provides the same information as Admin

Edge port, and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products.

• Admin Edge Port – You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node. Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state. Specifying Edge

Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to reconfigure when the interface changes state, and also overcomes other STA-related timeout problems. However, remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end-node device.

• Admin Link Type – The link type attached to this interface.

- Point-to-Point – A connection to exactly one other bridge.

- Shared – A connection to two or more bridges.

- Auto – The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point-to-point link or to shared media.

Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Port Information or STA Trunk

Information.

11-16

Figure 11-3 STA Port Information

ONFIGURING

NTERFACE

ETTINGS

CLI – This example shows the STA attributes for port 5.

Console#show spanning-tree ethernet 1/5

Eth 1/ 5 information

--------------------------------------------------------------

Admin status: enabled

(See Displaying Interface Settings on page 11-13 for additional

Role: disable

State: discarding

External admin path cost: 10000

Internal admin cost: 10000

External oper path cost: 10000

Internal oper path cost: 10000

Priority: 128

Designated cost: 10000

Designated port: 128.1

Designated root: 32768.0.0000E8AAAA00

Designated bridge: 32768.0.0030F1D473A0

Fast forwarding: disabled

Forward transitions: 2

Admin edge port: disabled

Oper edge port: disabled

Admin Link type: auto

Oper Link type: point-to-point

Spanning Tree Status: enabled

Console#

Configuring Interface Settings

You can configure RSTP and MSTP attributes for specific interfaces, including port priority, path cost, link type, and edge port. You may use a different priority or path cost for ports of the same media type to indicate the preferred path, link type to indicate a point-to-point connection or shared-media connection, and edge port to indicate if the attached device can support fast forwarding. (References to “ports” in this section means

“interfaces,” which includes both ports and trunks.)

Command Attributes

The following attributes are read-only and cannot be changed:

• STA State – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree.

information.)

11-17

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages, but does not forward packets.

Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.

• Trunk 13 – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk.

The following interface attributes can be configured:

• Spanning Tree – Enables/disables STA on this interface. (Default:

Enabled)

• Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree

Protocol. If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with the highest priority (i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree. This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.

- Default: 128

- Range: 0-240, in steps of 16

• Admin Path Cost – This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path cost takes precedence over port priority.)

(Range: 0 for auto-configuration, 1-65535 for the short path cost method 14 , 1-200,000,000 for the long path cost method)

13. STA Port Configuration only

14. Refer to “Configuring Global Settings” on page 11-8 for information on setting the path

cost method.

11-18

ONFIGURING

NTERFACE

ETTINGS

When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65,535, the default is set to 65,535.

Port Type

Fast Ethernet

Table 11-1 Recommended STA Path Cost Range

IEEE 802.1D-1998 IEEE 802.1w-2001

10-60 20,000-2,000,000

Gigabit Ethernet 3-10 2,000-200,000

Port Type

Table 11-2 Recommended STA Path Costs

Link Type

Fast Ethernet Half Duplex

Full Duplex

Trunk

Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex

Trunk

IEEE 802.1D-1998

IEEE 802.1w-2001

200,000

100,000

50,000

10,000

5,000

Port Type

Fast Ethernet

Table 11-3 Default STA Path Costs

Link Type

Half Duplex

Full Duplex

Trunk

Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex

Trunk

IEEE 802.1w-2001

200,000

100,000

50,000

10,000

5,000

• Admin Link Type – The link type attached to this interface.

- Point-to-Point – A connection to exactly one other bridge.

- Shared – A connection to two or more bridges.

- Auto – The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point-to-point link or to shared media. (This is the default setting.)

• Admin Edge Port (Fast Forwarding) – You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged

LAN or to an end node. Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices

11-19

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM such as workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state, and also overcomes other STA-related timeout problems. However, remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end-node device. (Default: Disabled)

• Migration – If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including

Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP-compatible mode.

However, you can also use the Protocol Migration button to manually re-check the appropriate BPDU format (RSTP or STP-compatible) to send on the selected interfaces. (Default: Disabled)

Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Port Configuration or Trunk

Configuration. Modify the required attributes, then click Apply.

11-20

Figure 11-4 STA Port Configuration

CLI – This example sets STA attributes for port 7.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/7

Console(config-if)#no spanning-tree spanning-disabled

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-priority 0

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 50

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree link-type auto

Console(config-if)#no spanning-tree edge-port

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree protocol-migration

Console(config-if)#

24-2

29-15

29-18

29-16

29-21

29-18

29-24

ONFIGURING

ULTIPLE

PANNING

REES

Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees

MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance. This provides multiple pathways across the network, thereby balancing the traffic load, preventing wide-scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails, and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance.

By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree (MST

Instance 0) that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region.

This switch supports up to 65 instances. You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network. However, remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region (page

11-11) with the same set of instances, and the same instance (on each

bridge) with the same set of VLANs. Also, note that RSTP treats each

MSTI region as a single node, connecting all regions to the Common

Spanning Tree.

To use multiple spanning trees:

1. Set the spanning tree type to MSTP (STA Configuration, page 11-8).

2. Enter the spanning tree priority for the selected MST instance (MSTP

VLAN Configuration).

3. Add the VLANs that will share this MSTI (MSTP VLAN

Configuration).

Note: All VLANs are automatically added to the IST (Instance 0).

To ensure that the MSTI maintains connectivity across the network, you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTI settings.

Command Attributes

• MST Instance – Instance identifier of this spanning tree. (Default: 0)

• Priority – The priority of a spanning tree instance. (Range: 0-61440 in steps of 4096; Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576,

28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440;

Default: 32768)

11-21

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

• VLANs in MST Instance – VLANs assigned this instance.

• MST ID – Instance identifier to configure. (Range: 0-4094; Default: 0)

• VLAN ID – VLAN to assign to this selected MST instance.

(Range: 1-4093)

The other global attributes are described under “Displaying Global

Settings,” page 11-4. The attributes displayed by the CLI for individual

interfaces are described under “Displaying Interface Settings,” page 11-13

Web – Click Spanning Tree, MSTP, VLAN Configuration. Select an instance identifier from the list, set the instance priority, and click Apply.

To add the VLAN members to an MSTI instance, enter the instance identifier, the VLAN identifier, and click Add.

11-22

Figure 11-5 MSTP VLAN Configuration

ONFIGURING

ULTIPLE

PANNING

REES

CLI – This displays STA settings for instance 1, followed by settings for each port.

Console#show spanning-tree mst 1

Spanning-tree information

The other attributes are described under “Displaying Interface

---------------------------------------------------------------

Spanning tree mode: MSTP

Spanning tree enabled/disabled: enabled

Instance: 1

VLANs configuration: 1

Priority: 32768

Bridge Hello Time (sec.): 2

Bridge Max Age (sec.): 20

Bridge Forward Delay (sec.): 15

Root Hello Time (sec.): 2

Root Max Age (sec.): 20

Root Forward Delay (sec.): 15

Max hops: 20

Remaining hops: 20

Designated Root: 32768.1.0030F1D473A0

Current root port: 7

Current root cost: 10000

Number of topology changes: 2

Last topology changes time (sec.):85

Transmission limit: 3

Path Cost Method: long

---------------------------------------------------------------

Eth 1/ 7 information

---------------------------------------------------------------

Admin status: enabled

Role: master

State: forwarding

External admin path cost: 10000

Internal admin path cost: 10000

External oper path cost: 10000

Internal oper path cost: 10000

Priority: 128

Designated cost: 0

Designated port: 128.1

Designated root: 32768.1.0030F1D473A0

Designated bridge: 32768.1.0030F1D473A0

Fast forwarding: disabled

Forward transitions: 1

Admin edge port: disabled

Oper edge port: disabled

Admin Link type: auto

Oper Link type: point-to-point

Spanning Tree Status: enabled

11-23

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

CLI – This example sets the priority for MSTI 1, and adds VLANs 1-5 to this MSTI.

Console(config)#spanning-tree mst-configuration

Console(config-mst)#mst 1 priority 4096

Console(config-mstp)#mst 1 vlan 1-5

Console(config-mst)#

29-10

29-12

29-11

Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP

The MSTP Port Information and MSTP Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the selected MST instance.

Field Attributes

MST Instance ID – Instance identifier to configure. (Range: 0-4094;

Default: 0)

Note:

Settings,” page 11-13.

Web – Click Spanning Tree, MSTP, Port Information or Trunk

Information. Select the required MST instance to display the current spanning tree values.

11-24

Figure 11-6 MSTP Port Information

ISPLAYING

NTERFACE

ETTINGS FOR

MSTP

CLI – This displays STA settings for instance 0, followed by settings for each port. The settings for instance 0 are global settings that apply to the

IST (page 11-4), the settings for other instances only apply to the local

spanning tree.

Console#show spanning-tree mst 0

Spanning-tree information

(See Displaying Interface Settings on page 11-13 for additional

---------------------------------------------------------------

Spanning tree mode: MSTP

Spanning tree enabled/disabled: enabled

Instance: 0

VLANs configuration: 2-4093

Priority: 32768

Bridge Hello Time (sec.): 2

Bridge Max Age (sec.): 20

Bridge Forward Delay (sec.): 15

Root Hello Time (sec.): 2

Root Max Age (sec.): 20

Root Forward Delay (sec.): 15

Max hops: 20

Remaining hops: 20

Designated Root: 32768.0.0000E8AAAA00

Current root port: 1

Current root cost: 10000

Number of topology changes: 12

Last topology changes time (sec.):303

Transmission limit: 3

Path Cost Method: long

---------------------------------------------------------------

Eth 1/ 1 information

---------------------------------------------------------------

Admin status: enabled

Role: root

State: forwarding

External admin path cost: 10000

Internal admin path cost: 10000

External oper path cost: 10000

Internal oper path cost: 10000

Priority: 128

Designated cost: 0

Designated port: 128.4

Designated root: 32768.0.0000E8AAAA00

Designated bridge: 32768.0.0000E8AAAA00

Fast forwarding: disabled

Forward transitions: 2

Admin edge port: disabled

Oper edge port: disabled

Admin Link type: auto

Oper Link type: point-to-point

Spanning Tree Status: enabled

11-25

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP

You can configure the STA interface settings for an MST Instance using the MSTP Port Configuration and MSTP Trunk Configuration pages.

Field Attributes

The following attributes are read-only and cannot be changed:

• STA State – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree.

information.)

Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages, but does not forward packets.

Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.

• Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk.

(STA Port Configuration only)

The following interface attributes can be configured:

• MST Instance ID – Instance identifier to configure. (Range: 0-4094;

Default: 0)

• Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree

- Default: 128

- Range: 0-240, in steps of 16

11-26

ONFIGURING

NTERFACE

ETTINGS FOR

MSTP

• Admin MST Path Cost – This parameter is used by the MSTP to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path cost takes precedence over port priority.) (Range: 0 for auto-configuration, 1-65535 for the short path cost method 15 , 1-200,000,000 for the long path cost method)

When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65,535, the default is set to 65,535.

The default path costs are listed in Table 11-3 on page 11-19.

Web – Click Spanning Tree, MSTP, Port Configuration or Trunk

Configuration. Enter the priority and path cost for an interface, and click

Apply.

Figure 11-7 MSTP Port Configuration

15. Refer to “Configuring Global Settings” on page 11-8 for information on setting the path

cost method.

11-27

PANNING

REE

LGORITHM

CLI – This example sets the MSTP attributes for port 4.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/4

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst port-priority 0

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst cost 50

Console(config-if)

24-2

29-23

29-22

11-28

HAPTER

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

IEEE 802.1Q VLANs

In large networks, routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains. This switch provides a similar service at

Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains. VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group, and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks.

This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment.

An IEEE 802.1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network, but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment.

VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections. VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups (such as Marketing or R&D), usage groups (such as e-mail), or multicast groups (used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing).

VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic, and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets. VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN.

This switch supports the following VLAN features:

• Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard

12-1

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

• Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging and GVRP protocol

• Port overlapping, allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs

• End stations can belong to multiple VLANs

• Passing traffic between VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware devices

• Priority tagging

Assigning Ports to VLANs

Before enabling VLANs for the switch, you must first assign each port to the VLAN group(s) in which it will participate. By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports. Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs, and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports

VLANs. Then assign ports on the other VLAN-aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN(s), either manually or dynamically using GVRP. However, if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs, but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports

VLANs, then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port.

Note: VLAN-tagged frames can pass through VLAN-aware or

VLAN-unaware network interconnection devices, but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end-node host that does not support VLAN tagging.

VA tagged frames tagged frames

VA: VLAN Aware

VU: VLAN Unaware untagged frames

12-2

IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

VLAN Classification – When the switch receives a frame, it classifies the frame in one of two ways. If the frame is untagged, the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN (based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port). But if the frame is tagged, the switch uses the tagged

VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame.

Port Overlapping – Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups, such as file servers or printers. Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap, but still need to communicate, you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch.

Untagged VLANs – Untagged (or static) VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security. A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other

VLANs configured on the switch. Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN. Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets. However, you should use

IEEE 802.3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible to fully automate VLAN registration.

Automatic VLAN Registration – GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration

Protocol) defines a system whereby the switch can automatically learn the

VLANs to which each end station should be assigned. If an end station (or its network adapter) supports the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN protocol, it can be configured to broadcast a message to your network indicating the VLAN groups it wants to join. When this switch receives these messages, it will automatically place the receiving port in the specified VLANs, and then forward the message to all other ports. When the message arrives at another switch that supports GVRP, it will also place the receiving port in the specified VLANs, and pass the message on to all other ports. VLAN requirements are propagated in this way throughout the network. This allows GVRP-compliant devices to be automatically configured for VLAN groups based solely on endstation requests.

12-3

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

To implement GVRP in a network, first add the host devices to the required VLANs (using the operating system or other application software), so that these VLANs can be propagated onto the network. For both the edge switches attached directly to these hosts, and core switches in the network, enable GVRP on the links between these devices. You should also determine security boundaries in the network and disable

GVRP on the boundary ports to prevent advertisements from being propagated, or forbid those ports from joining restricted VLANs.

Note: If you have host devices that do not support GVRP, you should configure static or untagged VLANs for the switch ports

connected to these devices (as described in “Adding Static

Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)” on page 12-10). But you can

still enable GVRP on these edge switches, as well as on the core switches in the network.

Port-based VLAN

9 3 4 5 6 7 8

10 11

15 16

12-4

Forwarding Tagged/Untagged Frames

If you want to create a small port-based VLAN for devices attached directly to a single switch, you can assign ports to the same untagged

VLAN. However, to participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches, you should create a VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports.

Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged or untagged VLANs. Each port on the switch is therefore capable of passing tagged or untagged frames.

When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that contains any

VLAN-aware devices, the switch should include VLAN tags. When

IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

S forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that does not contain any

VLAN-aware devices (including the destination host), the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame. When the switch receives a tagged frame, it will pass this frame onto the VLAN(s) indicated by the frame tag. However, when this switch receives an untagged frame from a VLAN-unaware device, it first decides where to forward the frame, and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port’s default VID.

Enabling or Disabling GVRP

(Global Setting)

GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network. VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices and propagated throughout the network. GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration, and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch. (Default:

Disabled)

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, GVRP Status. Enable or disable

GVRP, click Apply

Figure 12-1 Globally Enabling GVRP

CLI – This example enables GVRP for the switch.

Console(config)#bridge-ext gvrp

Console(config)#

30-2

12-5

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

Displaying Basic VLAN Information

The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the

VLAN type supported by the switch.

Field Attributes

• VLAN Version Number 14 – The VLAN version used by this switch as specified in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

• Maximum VLAN ID – Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch.

• Maximum Number of Supported VLANs – Maximum number of

VLANs that can be configured on this switch.

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Basic Information.

Figure 12-2 VLAN Basic Information

CLI – Enter the following command.

Console#show bridge-ext

Max support VLAN numbers: 256

Max support VLAN ID: 4093

Extended multicast filtering services: No

Static entry individual port: Yes

VLAN learning: IVL

Configurable PVID tagging: Yes

Local VLAN capable: No

Traffic classes: Enabled

Global GVRP status: Disabled

GMRP: Disabled

Console#

30-3

14. Web Only.

12-6

IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

Displaying Current VLANs

The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each

VLAN and whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging. Ports assigned to a large VLAN group that crosses several switches should use

VLAN tagging. However, if you just want to create a small port-based

VLAN for one or two switches, you can disable tagging.

Command Attributes

(Web)

• VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4093).

• Up Time at Creation – Time this VLAN was created (i.e., System Up

Time).

• Status – Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch.

Dynamic GVRP : Automatically learned via GVRP.

Permanent : Added as a static entry.

• Egress Ports – Shows all the VLAN port members.

• Untagged Ports – Shows the untagged VLAN port members.

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Current Table. Select any ID from the scroll-down list.

Figure 12-3 VLAN Current Table

12-7

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

Command Attributes

(CLI)

• VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4093, no leading zeroes).

• Type – Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch.

Dynamic : Automatically learned via GVRP.

Static : Added as a static entry.

• Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).

• Status – Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled.

Active : VLAN is operational.

Suspend : VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.

• Ports / Channel groups – Shows the VLAN interface members.

CLI – Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command.

Console#show vlan id 1

30-16

VLAN ID: 1

Type: Static

Name: DefaultVlan

Status: Active

Ports/Port Channels: Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 4(S) Eth1/ 5(S)

Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S) Eth1/ 8(S) Eth1/ 9(S) Eth1/10(S)

Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S) Eth1/13(S) Eth1/14(S) Eth1/15(S)

Eth1/16(S) Eth1/17(S) Eth1/18(S) Eth1/19(S) Eth1/20(S)

Eth1/21(S) Eth1/22(S) Eth1/23(S) Eth1/24(S)

Console#

Creating VLANs

Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups. To propagate information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices, you must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups.

12-8

Command Attributes

• Current – Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system. Up to 255 VLAN groups can be defined. VLAN 1 is the default untagged

VLAN.

• New – Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a new

VLAN group. (The VLAN name is only used for management on this system; it is not added to the VLAN tag.)

IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

• VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4093).

• VLAN Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).

• Status (Web) – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.

Enable : VLAN is operational.

Disable : VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.

• State (CLI) – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.

Active : VLAN is operational.

Suspend : VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.

• Add – Adds a new VLAN group to the current list.

• Remove – Removes a VLAN group from the current list. If any port is assigned to this group as untagged, it will be reassigned to VLAN group

1 as untagged.

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static List. To create a new VLAN, enter the VLAN ID and VLAN name, mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN, and then click Add.

Figure 12-4 VLAN Static List - Creating VLANs

12-9

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

CLI – This example creates a new VLAN.

Console(config)#vlan database

Console(config-vlan)#vlan 2 name R&D media ethernet state active

Console(config-vlan)#end

Console#show vlan

30-7

30-8

30-16

VLAN ID: 1

Type: Static

Name: DefaultVlan

Status: Active

Ports/Port Channels: Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 4(S) Eth1/ 5(S)

Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S) Eth1/ 8(S) Eth1/ 9(S) Eth1/10(S)

Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S) Eth1/13(S) Eth1/14(S) Eth1/15(S)

Eth1/16(S) Eth1/17(S) Eth1/18(S) Eth1/19(S) Eth1/20(S)

Eth1/21(S) Eth1/22(S) Eth1/23(S) Eth1/24(S)

VLAN ID: 2

Type: Static

Name: R&D

Status: Active

Ports/Port Channels:

Console#

Adding Static Members to VLANs

(VLAN Index)

Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected

VLAN index. Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802.1Q

VLAN compliant devices, or untagged they are not connected to any

VLAN-aware devices. Or configure a port as forbidden to prevent the switch from automatically adding it to a VLAN via the GVRP protocol.

Notes: 1.

You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page

to configure VLAN groups based on the port index (page 13).

However, note that this configuration page can only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members.

VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on the switch, and can only be modified by first reassigning the

default port VLAN ID as described under “Configuring

VLAN Behavior for Interfaces” on page 12-14.

Command Attributes

• VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4093).

• Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).

12-10

IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

• Status – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.

Enable : VLAN is operational.

Disable : VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.

• Port – Port identifier.

• Trunk – Trunk identifier.

• Membership Type – Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio button for a port or trunk:

Tagged : Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged, that is, carry a tag and therefore carry

VLAN or CoS information.

Untagged : Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the port will be untagged, that is, not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information. Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group as an untagged port.

Forbidden : Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the

VLAN via GVRP. For more information, see “Automatic VLAN

Registration” on page 12-3.

None : Interface is not a member of the VLAN. Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface.

• Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To add a trunk to the selected VLAN, use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page.

12-11

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static Table. Select a VLAN ID from the scroll-down list. Modify the VLAN name and status if required. Select the membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or trunks. Click Apply.

12-12

Figure 12-5 VLAN Static Table - Adding Static Members

CLI – The following example adds tagged and untagged ports to VLAN

24-2

30-14

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged

Console(config-if)#

IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

Adding Static Members to VLANs

(Port Index)

Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the selected interface as a tagged member.

Command Attributes

• Interface – Port or trunk identifier.

• Member – VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member.

• Non-Member – VLANs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member.

Web – Open VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static Membership by Port. Select an interface from the scroll-down box (Port or Trunk). Click Query to display membership information for the interface. Select a VLAN ID, and then click Add to add the interface as a tagged member, or click Remove to remove the interface. After configuring VLAN membership for each interface, click Apply.

Figure 12-6 VLAN Static Membership by Port

CLI – This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port, and removes

Port 3 from VLAN 2.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan remove 2

Console(config-if)#

24-2

30-14

12-13

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces

You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces, including the default VLAN identifier (PVID), accepted frame types, ingress filtering,

GVRP status, and GARP timers.

Command Usage

• GVRP – GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network.

• GARP – Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged

LAN. The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate. These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with GVRP registration/ deregistration.

Command Attributes

• PVID – VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface. (Default: 1)

- If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN, the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member. For all other VLANs, an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group.

• Acceptable Frame Type – Sets the interface to accept all frame types, including tagged or untagged frames, or only tagged frames. When set to receive all frame types, any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN. (Option: All, Tagged; Default: All)

• Ingress Filtering – Determines how to process frames tagged for

VLANs for which the ingress port is not a member. (Default: Disabled)

- Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames.

12-14

IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

- If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for

VLANs for which it is not a member, these frames will be flooded to all other ports (except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port).

- If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for

VLANs for which it is not a member, these frames will be discarded.

- Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames, such as GVRP or STP. However, they do affect VLAN dependent

BPDU frames, such as GMRP.

• GVRP Status – Enables/disables GVRP for the interface. GVRP must be globally enabled for the switch before this setting can take effect. (See

“Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities” on page 4-10.) When

disabled, any GVRP packets received on this port will be discarded and no GVRP registrations will be propagated from other ports. (Default:

Disabled)

• GARP Join Timer 15 – The interval between transmitting requests/ queries to participate in a VLAN group. (Range: 20-1000 centiseconds;

Default: 20)

•

GARP Leave Timer 15

– The interval a port waits before leaving a

VLAN group. This time should be set to more than twice the join time.

This ensures that after a Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued, the applicants can rejoin before the port actually leaves the group. (Range:

60-3000 centiseconds; Default: 60)

• GARP LeaveAll Timer

15 – The interval between sending out a

LeaveAll query message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group. This interval should be considerably larger than the

Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic generated by nodes rejoining the group. (Range: 500-18000 centiseconds; Default: 1000)

• Mode – Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface.

(Default: Hybrid)

1Q Trunk – Specifies a port as an end-point for a VLAN trunk. A trunk is a direct link between two switches, so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN. Note that frames

15. Timer settings must follow this rule: 2 x (join timer) < leave timer < leaveAll timer

12-15

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION belonging to the port’s default VLAN (i.e., associated with the PVID) are also transmitted as tagged frames.

Hybrid – Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface. The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames.

Dot1q-Tunnel – Configures IEEE 802.1Q tunneling (QinQ) to segregate and preserve customer VLAN IDs for traffic crossing the

service provider network. See “Configuring IEEE 802.1Q

Tunneling” on page 12-17 for a detailed description of this feature.

• TPID (0-65535) – Tag Protocol Identifier specifies the ether-type of

incoming packets on a tunnel port. See “Configuring IEEE 802.1Q

Tunneling” on page 12-17 for a detailed description of this parameter.

• Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To add a trunk to the selected VLAN, use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page.

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Port Configuration or Trunk

Configuration. Fill in the required settings for each interface, click Apply.

Figure 12-7 VLAN Port Configuration

12-16

ONFIGURING

IEEE 802.1Q T

UNNELING

CLI – This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames, assigns

PVID 3 as the native VLAN ID, enables GVRP, sets the GARP timers, and then sets the switchport mode to hybrid.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

24-2

Console(config-if)#switchport acceptable-frame-types tagged

30-11

Console(config-if)#switchport ingress-filtering

Console(config-if)#switchport native vlan 3

30-12

30-13

Console(config-if)#switchport gvrp

Console(config-if)#garp timer join 20

Console(config-if)#garp timer leave 90

30-4

30-5

Console(config-if)#garp timer leaveall 2000

Console(config-if)#switchport mode hybrid

Console(config-if)#

30-10

Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling

IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling (QinQ) is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks. QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer-specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal

VLAN IDs. This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN

(SPVLAN) tags into the customer’s frames when they enter the service provider’s network, and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network.

A service provider’s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported. VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service-provider network might easily overlap, and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed. Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations, require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables, and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of

4096.

QinQ tunneling uses a single Service Provider VLAN (SPVLAN) for customers who have multiple VLANs. Customer VLAN IDs are preserved and traffic from different customers is segregated within the service provider’s network even when they use the same customer-specific VLAN

12-17

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

IDs. QinQ tunneling expands VLAN space by using a VLAN-in-VLAN hierarchy, preserving the customer’s original tagged packets, and adding

SPVLAN tags to each frame (also called double tagging).

A port configured to support QinQ tunneling must be set to tunnel port mode. The Service Provider VLAN (SPVLAN) ID for the specific customer must be assigned to the QinQ tunnel port on the edge switch where the customer traffic enters the service provider’s network. Each customer requires a separate SPVLAN, but this VLAN supports all of the customer's internal VLANs. The QinQ uplink port that passes traffic from the edge switch into the service provider’s metro network must also be added to this SPVLAN. The uplink port can be added to multiple

SPVLANs to carry inbound traffic for different customers onto the service provider’s network.

When a double-tagged packet enters another trunk port in an intermediate or core switch in the service provider’s network, the outer tag is stripped for packet processing. When the packet exits another trunk port on the same core switch, the same SPVLAN tag is again added to the packet.

When a packet enters the trunk port on the service provider’s egress switch, the outer tag is again stripped for packet processing. However, the

SPVLAN tag is not added when it is sent out the tunnel port on the edge switch into the customer’s network. The packet is sent as a normal IEEE

802.1Q-tagged frame, preserving the original VLAN numbers used in the customer’s network.

12-18

ONFIGURING

IEEE 802.1Q T

UNNELING

Customer A

(VLANs 1-10)

Customer A

(VLANs 1-10)

QinQ Tunneling

VLAN 10

Tunnel Port

Service Provider

(edge router A)

Customer B

(VLANs 1-50)

Tunnel Port

VLAN 20

Service Provider

(edge router B)

Double Tagged Packets

Outer Tag - Service Provider VID

Inner Tag - Customer VID

VLAN 10

Tunnel Port

VLAN 20

Customer B

(VLANs 1-50)

Layer 2 Flow for Packets Coming into a Tunnel Port

A QinQ tunnel port may receive either tagged or untagged packets. No matter how many tags the incoming packet has, it is treated as tagged packet.

The ingress process does source and destination lookups. If both lookups are successful, the ingress process writes the packet to memory. Then the egress process transmits the packet. Packets entering a QinQ tunnel port are processed in the following manner:

1. New SPVLAN tags are added to all incoming packets, no matter how many tags they already have. The ingress process constructs and inserts the outer tag (SPVLAN) into the packet based on the default VLAN

ID and Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID, that is, the ether-type of the tag). This outer tag is used for learning and switching packets. The priority of the inner tag is copied to the outer tag if it is a tagged or priority tagged packet.

2. After successful source and destination lookup, the ingress process sends the packet to the switching process with two tags. If the incoming packet is untagged, the outer tag is an SPVLAN tag, and the inner tag is a dummy tag (8100 0000). If the incoming packet is tagged, the outer tag is an SPVLAN tag, and the inner tag is a CVLAN tag.

12-19

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

3. After packet classification through the switching process, the packet is written to memory with one tag (an outer tag) or with two tags (both an outer tag and inner tag).

4. The switch sends the packet to the proper egress port.

5. If the egress port is an untagged member of the SPVLAN, the outer tag will be stripped. If it is a tagged member, the outgoing packets will have two tags.

12-20

Layer 2 Flow for Packets Coming into an Uplink Port

An uplink port receives one of the following packets:

• Untagged

• One tag (CVLAN or SPVLAN)

• Double tag (CVLAN + SPVLAN)

1. If incoming packets are untagged, the PVID VLAN native tag is added.

2. If the ether-type of an incoming packet (single or double tagged) is not equal to the TPID of the uplink port, the VLAN tag is determined to be a Customer VLAN (CVLAN) tag. The uplink port’s PVID VLAN native tag is added to the packet. This outer tag is used for learning and switching packets within the service provider’s network. The TPID must be configured on a per port basis, and the verification cannot be disabled.

3. If the ether-type of an incoming packet (single or double tagged) is equal to the TPID of the uplink port, no new VLAN tag is added. If the uplink port is not the member of the outer VLAN of the incoming packets, the packet will be dropped when ingress filtering is enabled. If ingress filtering is not enabled, the packet will still be forwarded. If the

VLAN is not listed in the VLAN table, the packet will be dropped.

ONFIGURING

IEEE 802.1Q T

UNNELING

4. After successful source and destination lookup, the packet is double tagged. The switch uses the TPID of 0x8100 to indicate that an incoming packet is double-tagged. If the outer tag of an incoming double-tagged packet is equal to the port TPID and the inner tag is

0x8100, it is treated as a double-tagged packet. If a single-tagged packet has 0x8100 as its TPID, and port TPID is not 0x8100, a new VLAN tag is added and it is also treated as double-tagged packet.

5. If the destination address lookup fails, the packet is sent to all member ports of the outer tag's VLAN.

6. After packet classification, the packet is written to memory for processing as a single-tagged or double-tagged packet.

7. The switch sends the packet to the proper egress port.

8. If the egress port is an untagged member of the SPVLAN, the outer tag will be stripped. If it is a tagged member, the outgoing packet will have two tags.

Configuration Limitations for QinQ

• The native VLAN of uplink ports should not be used as the SPVLAN.

If the SPVLAN is the uplink port's native VLAN, the uplink port must be an untagged member of the SPVLAN. Then the outer SPVLAN tag will be stripped when the packets are sent out. Another reason is that it causes none-customer packets will be forwarded to SPVLAN.

• Static trunk port groups are compatible with QinQ tunnel ports as long as the QinQ configuration is consistent within a trunk port group.

• QinQ and L2MPLS mode cannot be supported at the same time.

• The native VLAN (VLAN 1) is not normally added to transmitted frames. Avoiding using VLAN 1 as an SPVLAN tag for customer traffic to reduce the risk of misconfiguration. Instead, use VLAN 1 as a management VLAN instead of a data VLAN in the service provider network.

• There are some inherent incompatibilities between Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching:

- A tunnel port cannot be a routed port.

12-21

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

- Tunnel ports do not support IP Access Control Lists.

- Layer 3 Quality of Service (QoS) and other QoS features containing

Layer 3 information are not supported on tunnel ports.

- Spanning tree bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) filtering is automatically disabled on a tunnel port.

General Configuration Guidelines for QinQ

1. Configure the switch to QinQ mode (see “Configuring the Switch for

Normal Operation or Tunneling Mode” on page 4-4).

2. Create a Service Provider VLAN, also referred to as an SPVLAN (see

“Creating VLANs” on page 12-8).

3. Configure the QinQ tunnel port to dot1Q tunnel port mode (see

“Adding an Interface to a QinQ Tunnel” on page 12-23).

4. Set the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) value of the tunnel port. This step is required is the attached client is using a nonstandard 2-byte ethertype to identify 802.1Q tagged frames. The standard ethertype

value is 0x8100. (See “Adding an Interface to a QinQ Tunnel” on page

12-23.)

5. Configure the QinQ tunnel port to join the SPVLAN as an untagged

member (see “Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)” on page 12-10).

6. Configure the SPVLAN ID as the native VID on the QinQ tunnel port

(see “Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces” on page 12-14).

7. Configure system MTU to 1526 if jumbo frames are not enabled (see

“Configuring the Maximum Frame Size” on page 4-5).

8. Configure the QinQ uplink port to join the SPVLAN as a tagged

member (see “Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)” on page 12-10).

12-22

ONFIGURING

IEEE 802.1Q T

UNNELING

Adding an Interface to a QinQ Tunnel

Follow the guidelines in the preceding section to set up a QinQ tunnel on the switch. Use the VLAN Port Configuration or VLAN Trunk

Configuration screen to set the ingress port on the edge switch to dot1Q tunnel mode. Also set the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) value of the tunnel port if the attached client is using a nonstandard 2-byte ethertype to identify 802.1Q tagged frames.

Command Usage

• Use the System Mode screen to set the switch to QinQ mode before

configuring a tunnel port (see “Configuring the Switch for Normal

Operation or Tunneling Mode” on page 4-4).

• Use the TPID field to set a custom 802.1Q ethertype value on the selected interface. This feature allows the switch to interoperate with third-party switches that do not use the standard 0x8100 ethertype to identify 802.1Q-tagged frames. For example, 0x1234 is set as the custom

802.1Q ethertype on a trunk port, incoming frames containing that ethertype are assigned to the VLAN contained in the tag following the ethertype field, as they would be with a standard 802.1Q trunk. Frames arriving on the port containing any other ethertype are looked upon as untagged frames, and assigned to the native VLAN of that port.

• All members of a VLAN should be set to the same ethertype.

Command Attributes

• Mode – Set the VLAN membership mode dot1Q-Tunnel.

(Default: Hybrid)

• Dot1q-Tunnel – Configures IEEE 802.1Q tunneling (QinQ) to segregate and preserve customer VLAN IDs for traffic crossing the service provider network.

• TPID (0-65535) – Tag Protocol Identifier specifies the ethertype of incoming packets on a tunnel port.

12-23

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Port Configuration or Trunk

Configuration. Set the mode for the tunnel port to Dot1q-Tunnel, and set the TPID if the client is using a non-standard ethertype to identify 802.1Q tagged frames, then click Apply.

12-24

Figure 12-8 Tunnel Port Configuration

CLI – This example sets port 2 to tunnel mode, indicates that the TPID used for 802.1Q tagged frames will be 9100 hexadecimal, and enables address monitor mode to pass traffic between the management VLANs and the tunnel port.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#switchport mode dot1q-tunnel

Console(config-if)#switchport dot1q-ethertype 9100

Console(config-if)#

Console#show dot1q-tunnel

24-2

30-25

30-27

30-26

Dot1q-Tunnel Port List

-------eth 1/2

Total 1 Dot1q-Tunnel Ports, 0 Dot1q-Tunnel Port-Channel

Console#

ONFIGURING

RIVATE

VLAN

Configuring Private VLANs

Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN. Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to, and from, uplink ports. (Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch.)

Uplink Ports

Primary VLAN

(promiscuous ports) x Downlink Ports

Secondary VLAN

(private ports)

Enabling Private VLANs

Use the Private VLAN Status page to enable/disable the Private VLAN function.

Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Status. Select Enable or Disable from the scroll-down box, and click Apply.

Figure 12-9 Private VLAN Status

CLI – This example enables private VLANs.

Console(config)#pvlan

Console(config)#

30-17

12-25

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports

Use the Private VLAN Link Status page to set ports as downlink or uplink ports. Ports designated as downlink ports can not communicate with any other ports on the switch except for the uplink ports. Uplink ports can communicate with any other ports on the switch and with any designated downlink ports.

Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Link Status. Mark the ports that will serve as uplinks and downlinks for the private VLAN, then click Apply.

12-26

Figure 12-10 Private VLAN Link Status

CLI – This configures port 3 as an uplink and port 5 and 6 as downlinks.

Console(config)#pvlan up-link ethernet 1/3 down-link ethernet 1/5

30-17

Console(config)#pvlan up-link ethernet 1/3 down-link ethernet 1/6

Console(config)#end

Console#show pvlan

Private VLAN status: Enabled

Up-link port:

Ethernet 1/3

Down-link port:

Ethernet 1/5

Ethernet 1/6

Console#

ONFIGURING

ROTOCOL

-B

ASED

VLAN

Configuring Protocol-Based VLANs

The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN. This may require non-standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol. This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs, including security and easy accessibility.

To avoid these problems, you can configure this switch with protocol-based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical

VLAN groups for each required protocol. When a frame is received at a port, its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type being used by the inbound packets.

Command Usage

To configure protocol-based VLANs, follow these steps:

1. First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use

(page 8). Although not mandatory, we suggest configuring a separate

VLAN for each major protocol running on your network. Do not add port members at this time.

2. Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Configuration page.

3. Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Port Configuration page.

Configuring Protocol Groups

Create a protocol group for one or more protocols.

Command Attributes

• Protocol Group ID – Group identifier of this protocol group.

(Range: 1-2147483647)

12-27

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

• Frame Type 16 – Frame type used by this protocol. (Options: Ethernet,

RFC_1042, LLC_other)

• Protocol Type – The only option for the LLC_other frame type is

IPX_raw. The options for all other frames types include: IP, ARP,

RARP.

Web – Click VLAN, Protocol VLAN, Configuration. Enter a protocol group ID, frame type and protocol type, then click Apply.

Figure 12-11 Protocol VLAN Configuration

CLI – The following creates protocol group 1, and then specifies Ethernet frames with IP and ARP protocol types.

Console(config)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 1 add frame-type ethernet protocol-type ip

Console(config)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 1 add frame-type ethernet protocol-type arp

Console(config)#

30-20

Mapping Protocols to VLANs

Map a protocol group to a VLAN for each interface that will participate in the group.

Command Usage

• When creating a protocol-based VLAN, only assign interfaces using this configuration screen. If you assign interfaces using any of the other

VLAN menus such as the VLAN Static Table (page 10) or VLAN Static

16. SNAP frame types are not supported by this switch due to hardware limitations.

12-28

ONFIGURING

ROTOCOL

-B

ASED

VLAN

Membership by Port menu (page 13), these interfaces will admit traffic

of any protocol type into the associated VLAN.

• When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol VLAN, it is processed in the following manner:

- If the frame is tagged, it will be processed according to the standard rules applied to tagged frames.

- If the frame is untagged and the protocol type matches, the frame is forwarded to the appropriate VLAN.

- If the frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match, the frame is forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface.

Command Attributes

• Interface – Port or trunk identifier.

• Protocol Group ID – Group identifier of this protocol group.

(Range: 1-2147483647)

• VLAN ID – VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded.

(Range: 1-4093)

Web – Click VLAN, Protocol VLAN, Port Configuration. Select a a port or trunk, enter a protocol group ID, the corresponding VLAN ID, and click Apply.

Figure 12-12 Protocol VLAN Port Configuration

12-29

VLAN C

ONFIGURATION

CLI – The following maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol type specified in protocol group 1 to VLAN 3.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 1 vlan 3

Console(config-if)#

30-21

12-30

HAPTER

LASS OF

ERVICE

Class of Service (CoS) allows you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion. This switch supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port. Data packets in a port’s high-priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower-priority queues. You can set the default priority for each interface, and configure the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch’s priority queues.

Note: The priority for all traffic entering a VLAN can also be configured

using the CLI (see the “vlan priority” command on page 9

Layer 2 Queue Settings

Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces

You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch.

All untagged packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified default port priority, and then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port.

Command Usage

• This switch provides eight priority queues for each port. It uses

Weighted Round Robin to prevent head-of-queue blockage.

• The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types (i.e, receives both untagged and tagged frames).

This priority does not apply to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frames. If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frame, the IEEE

802.1p User Priority bits will be used.

13-1

LASS OF

ERVICE

• If the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN, these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission.

Command Attributes

• Default Priority 17 – The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on the specified interface. (Range: 0 - 7, Default: 0)

• Number of Egress Traffic Classes – The number of queue buffers provided for each port.

Web – Click Priority, Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority.

Modify the default priority for any interface, then click Apply.

Figure 13-1 Default Port Priority

17. CLI displays this information as “Priority for untagged traffic.”

13-2

AYER

2 Q

UEUE

ETTINGS

CLI – This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

Console(config-if)#switchport priority default 5

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/3

Information of Eth 1/3

Broadcast threshold: Enabled, 500 packets/second

LACP status: Disabled

Ingress rate limit: Disable, 1000M bits per second

Egress rate limit: Disable, 1000M bits per second

VLAN membership mode: Hybrid

Ingress rule: Disabled

24-2

31-4

24-16

Acceptable frame type: All frames

Native VLAN: 1

Priority for untagged traffic: 5

GVRP status: Disabled

Allowed VLAN: 1(u),

Forbidden VLAN:

Console#

Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues

This switch processes Class of Service (CoS) priority tagged traffic by using eight priority queues for each port, with service schedules based on strict or Weighted Round Robin (WRR). Up to eight separate traffic priorities are defined in IEEE 802.1p. The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard as shown in the following table.

Table 13-1 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues

Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Queue 2 0 1 3 4 5 6

13-3

LASS OF

ERVICE

The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802.1p standard for various network applications are shown in the following table. However, you can map the priority levels to the switch’s output queues in any way that benefits application traffic for your own network.

Priority Level

0 (default)

Table 13-2 CoS Priority Levels

Traffic Type

Background

(Spare)

Best Effort

Excellent Effort

Controlled Load

Video, less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter

Voice, less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter

Network Control

Command Attributes

• Priority – CoS value. (Range: 0-7, where 7 is the highest priority)

• Traffic Class 18 – Output queue buffer. (Range: 0-7, where 7 is the highest CoS priority queue)

18. CLI shows Queue ID.

13-4

AYER

2 Q

UEUE

ETTINGS

Web – Click Priority, Traffic Classes. Assign priorities to the traffic classes

(i.e., output queues), then click Apply.

Figure 13-2 Traffic Classes

CLI – The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a one-to-one mapping.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config)#queue cos-map 0 0

Console(config)#queue cos-map 1 1

Console(config)#queue cos-map 2 2

Console(config)#exit

Console#show queue cos-map

Information of Eth 1/1

CoS Value: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Priority Queue: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Information of Eth 1/2

CoS Value: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

24-2

31-7

31-9

* Mapping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an interface configuration command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.

13-5

LASS OF

ERVICE

Selecting the Queue Mode

You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced, or use Weighted Round-Robin (WRR) queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue. WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue. This prevents the head-of-line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing.

Command Attributes

• WRR - Weighted Round-Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 for queues 0 through 7 respectively. (This is the default selection.)

• Strict - Services the egress queues in sequential order, transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues.

Web – Click Priority, Queue Mode. Select Strict or WRR, then click Apply.

13-6

Figure 13-3 Queue Mode

CLI – The following sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode.

31-3

Console(config)#queue mode strict

Console(config)#exit

Console#show queue mode

31-4

Queue mode: strict

Console#

AYER

2 Q

UEUE

ETTINGS

Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes

This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin (WRR) algorithm to determine the frequency at which it services each priority queue. As

described in “Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues” on page 3, the

traffic classes are mapped to one of the eight egress queues provided for each port. You can assign a weight to each of these queues (and thereby to the corresponding traffic priorities). This weight sets the frequency at which each queue will be polled for service, and subsequently affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value.

Command Attributes

• WRR Setting Table 19 – Displays a list of weights for each traffic class

(i.e., queue).

• Weight Value – Set a new weight for the selected traffic class.

(Range: 1-15)

Web – Click Priority, Queue Scheduling. Select the interface, highlight a traffic class (i.e., output queue), enter a weight, then click Apply.

19. CLI shows Queue ID.

Figure 13-4 Queue Scheduling

13-7

LASS OF

ERVICE

CLI – The following example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the priority queues.

31-6

Console(config)#queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

Console(config)#exit

Console#show queue bandwidth

Information of Eth 1/1

Queue ID Weight

-------- ------

0 1

1 3

2 5

3 7

4 9

5 11

6 13

7 15

Information of Eth 1/2

Queue ID Weight

31-8

Layer 3/4 Priority Settings

Mapping Layer 3/4 Priorities to CoS Values

This switch supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3/4 traffic to meet application requirements. Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header of a frame, using the priority bits in the Type of Service

(ToS) octet or the number of the TCP port. If priority bits are used, the

ToS octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for

Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) service. When these services are enabled, the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch, and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue.

Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic, this switch maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner:

• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port Priority, IP Precedence or DSCP Priority, and then Default Port Priority.

• IP Precedence and DSCP Priority cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other.

13-8

AYER

3/4 P

RIORITY

ETTINGS

Selecting IP Precedence/DSCP Priority

The switch allows you to choose between using IP Precedence or DSCP priority. Select one of the methods or disable this feature.

Command Attributes

• Disabled – Disables both priority services. (This is the default setting.)

• IP Precedence – Maps layer 3/4 priorities using IP Precedence.

• IP DSCP – Maps layer 3/4 priorities using Differentiated Services Code

Point Mapping.

Web – Click Priority, IP Precedence/DSCP Priority Status. Select

Disabled, IP Precedence or IP DSCP from the scroll-down menu, then click Apply.

Figure 13-5 IP Precedence/DSCP Priority Status

CLI – The following example enables IP Precedence service on the switch.

Console(config)#map ip precedence

Console(config)#

31-13

13-9

LASS OF

ERVICE

Mapping IP Precedence

The Type of Service (ToS) octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic.

The default IP Precedence values are mapped one-to-one to Class of

Service values (i.e., Precedence value 0 maps to CoS value 0, and so forth).

Bits 6 and 7 are used for network control, and the other bits for various application types. ToS bits are defined in the following table.

Table 13-3 Mapping IP Precedence

Priority Level Traffic Type

7 Network Control

Internetwork Control

Critical

Flash Override

Priority Level Traffic Type

3 Flash

Immediate

Priority

Routine

Command Attributes

• IP Precedence Priority Table – Shows the IP Precedence to CoS map.

• Class of Service Value – Maps a CoS value to the selected IP

Precedence value. Note that “0” represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.

13-10

AYER

3/4 P

RIORITY

ETTINGS

Web – Click Priority, IP Precedence Priority. Select an entry from the IP

Precedence Priority Table, enter a value in the Class of Service Value field, and then click Apply.

Figure 13-6 IP Precedence Priority

CLI – The following example globally enables IP Precedence service on the switch, maps IP Precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 (on port 1), and then displays the IP Precedence settings.

Console(config)#map ip precedence

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#map ip precedence 1 cos 0

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show map ip precedence ethernet 1/1

Precedence mapping status: disabled

31-13

24-2

31-13

31-17

Port Precedence COS

--------- ---------- ---

Eth 1/ 1 0 0

Eth 1/ 1 1 0

Eth 1/ 1 2 2

Eth 1/ 1 3 3

Eth 1/ 1 4 4

Eth 1/ 1 5 5

Eth 1/ 1 6 6

Eth 1/ 1 7 7

Console#

* Mapping specific values for IP Precedence is implemented as an interface configuration command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.

13-11

LASS OF

ERVICE

Mapping DSCP Priority

The DSCP is six bits wide, allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors. The DSCP replaces the ToS bits, but it retains backward compatibility with the three precedence bits so that non-DSCP compliant, ToS-enabled devices, will not conflict with the DSCP mapping.

Based on network policies, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. The DSCP default values are defined in the following table. Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0.

Table 13-4 Mapping DSCP Priority

IP DSCP Value

10, 12, 14, 16

18, 20, 22, 24

26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36

38, 40, 42

46, 56

CoS Value

Command Attributes

• DSCP Priority Table – Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map.

• Class of Service Value – Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP

Priority value. Note that “0” represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.

Note: IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces.

13-12

AYER

3/4 P

RIORITY

ETTINGS

Web – Click Priority, IP DSCP Priority. Select an entry from the DSCP table, enter a value in the Class of Service Value field, then click Apply.

Figure 13-7 IP DSCP Priority

CLI – The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the switch, maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 (on port 1), and then displays the DSCP Priority settings.

Console(config)#map ip dscp

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#map ip dscp 1 cos 0

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show map ip dscp ethernet 1/1

DSCP mapping status: disabled

31-14

24-2

31-15

31-18

Port DSCP COS

--------- ---- ---

Eth 1/ 1 0 0

Eth 1/ 1 1 0

Eth 1/ 1 2 0

Eth 1/ 1 3 0

Eth 1/ 1 61 0

Eth 1/ 1 62 0

Eth 1/ 1 63 0

Console#

* Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.

13-13

LASS OF

ERVICE

Mapping IP Port Priority

You can also map network applications to Class of Service values based on the IP port number (i.e., TCP/UDP port number) in the frame header.

Some of the more common TCP service ports include: HTTP: 80,

FTP: 21, Telnet: 23 and POP3: 110.

Command Attributes

• IP Port Priority Status – Enables or disables the IP port priority.

• IP Port Priority Table – Shows the IP port to CoS map.

• IP Port Number (TCP/UDP) – Set a new IP port number.

• Class of Service Value – Sets a CoS value for a new IP port. Note that

“0” represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.

Note: Up to 8 entries can be specified.

IP Port Priority settings apply to all interfaces.

Web – Click Priority, IP Port Priority Status. Set IP Port Priority Status to

Enabled.

Figure 13-8 IP Port Priority Status

13-14

AYER

3/4 P

RIORITY

ETTINGS

Click Priority, IP Port Priority. Enter the port number for a network application in the IP Port Number box and the new CoS value in the Class of Service box, and then click Apply.

Figure 13-9 IP Port Priority

CLI – The following example globally enables IP Port Priority service on the switch, maps HTTP traffic (on port 1) to CoS value 0, and then displays the IP Port Priority settings.

Console(config)#map ip port

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#map ip port 80 cos 0

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show map ip port ethernet 1/5

TCP port mapping status: disabled

31-11

24-2

31-12

31-16

Port Port no. COS

--------- -------- ---

Eth 1/ 1 80 0

Console#

* Mapping specific values for IP Port Priority is implemented as an interface configuration command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.

13-15

LASS OF

ERVICE

13-16

HAPTER

UALITY OF

ERVICE

The commands described in this section are used to configure Quality of

Service (QoS) classification criteria and service policies. Differentiated

Services (DiffServ) provides policy-based management mechanisms used for prioritizing network resources to meet the requirements of specific traffic types on a per hop basis. Each packet is classified upon entry into the network based on access lists, IP Precedence, DSCP values, or VLAN lists. Using access lists allows you select traffic based on Layer 2, Layer 3, or Layer 4 information contained in each packet. Based on configured network policies, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding.

All switches or routers that access the Internet rely on class information to provide the same forwarding treatment to packets in the same class. Class information can be assigned by end hosts, or switches or routers along the path. Priority can then be assigned based on a general policy, or a detailed examination of the packet. However, note that detailed examination of packets should take place close to the network edge so that core switches and routers are not overloaded.

Switches and routers along the path can use class information to prioritize the resources allocated to different traffic classes. The manner in which an individual device handles traffic in the DiffServ architecture is called per-hop behavior. All devices along a path should be configured in a consistent manner to construct a consistent end-to-end QoS solution.

14-1

UALITY OF

ERVICE

Notes: 1.

You can configure up to 16 rules per Class Map. You can also include multiple classes in a Policy Map.

You should create a Class Map before creating a Policy Map.

Otherwise, you will not be able to select a Class Map from the

Policy Rule Settings screen (see page 14-9).

Configuring Quality of Service Parameters

To create a service policy for a specific category or ingress traffic, follow these steps:

1. Use the “Class Map” to designate a class name for a specific category of traffic.

2. Edit the rules for each class to specify a type of traffic based on an access list, a DSCP or IP Precedence value, or a VLAN.

3. Set an ACL mask to enable filtering for the criteria specified in the

Class Map. (See “Configuring an IP ACL Mask” on page 12 or

“Configuring a MAC ACL Mask” on page 14.)

4. Use the “Policy Map” to designate a policy name for a specific manner in which ingress traffic will be handled.

5. Add one or more classes to the Policy Map. Assign policy rules to each class by “setting” the QoS value to be assigned to the matching traffic class. The policy rule can also be configured to monitor the average flow and burst rate, and drop any traffic that exceeds the specified rate, or just reduce the DSCP service level for traffic exceeding the specified rate.

6. Use the “Service Policy” to assign a policy map to a specific interface.

14-2

ONFIGURING

UALITY OF

ERVICE

ARAMETERS

Configuring a Class Map

A class map is used for matching packets to a specified class.

Command Usage

• To configure a Class Map, follow these steps:

- Open the Class Map page, and click Add Class.

- When the Class Configuration page opens, fill in the “Class Name” field, and click Add.

- When the Match Class Settings page opens, specify type of traffic for this class based on an access list, a DSCP or IP Precedence value, or a VLAN, and click the Add button next to the field for the selected traffic criteria. You can only specify one item to match when assigning ingress traffic to a class map.

• The class map uses the Access Control List filtering engine, so you must also set an ACL mask to enable filtering for the criteria specified in the

Class Map. See “Configuring an IP ACL Mask” on page 12 or

“Configuring a MAC ACL Mask” on page 14 for information on

configuring an appropriate ACL mask.

• The class map is used with a policy map (page 14-6) to create a service

policy (page 14-10) for a specific interface that defines packet

classification, service tagging, and bandwidth policing. Note that one or more class maps can be assigned to a policy map.

Command Attributes

Class Map

• Modify Name and Description – Configures the name and a brief description of a class map. (Range: 1-32 characters for the name; 1-256 characters for the description)

• Edit Rules – Opens the “Match Class Settings” page for the selected class entry. Modify the criteria used to classify ingress traffic on this page.

• Add Class – Opens the “Class Configuration” page. Enter a class name and description on this page, and click Add to open the “Match Class

14-3

UALITY OF

ERVICE

Settings” page. Enter the criteria used to classify ingress traffic on this page.

• Remove Class – Removes the selected class.

Class Configuration

• Class Name – Name of the class map. (Range: 1-32 characters)

• Type – Only one match command is permitted per class map, so the match-any field refers to the criteria specified by the lone match command.

• Description – A brief description of a class map. (Range: 1-256 characters)

• Add – Adds the specified class.

• Back – Returns to previous page with making any changes.

Match Class Settings

• Class Name – List of class maps.

• ACL List – Name of an access control list. Any type of ACL can be specified, including standard or extended IP ACLs and MAC ACLs.

(Range: 1-16 characters)

• IP DSCP – A DSCP value. (Range: 0-63)

• IP Precedence – An IP Precedence value. (Range: 0-7)

• VLAN – A VLAN. (Range:1-4093)

• Add – Adds specified criteria to the class. Up to 16 items are permitted per class.

• Remove – Deletes the selected criteria from the class.

14-4

ONFIGURING

UALITY OF

ERVICE

ARAMETERS

Web – Click QoS, DiffServ, then click Add Class to create a new class, or

Edit Rules to change the rules of an existing class.

Figure 14-1 Configuring Class Maps

14-5

UALITY OF

ERVICE

CLI - This example creates a class map call “rd-class,” and sets it to match packets marked for DSCP service value 3.

32-3

32-4

Console(config)#class-map rd_class match-any

Console(config-cmap)#match ip dscp 3

Console(config-cmap)#exit

Console(config)#access-list ip mask-precedence in

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask any any dscp

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#

4-105

4-109

Creating QoS Policies

This function creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple interfaces.

Command Usage

• To configure a Policy Map, follow these steps:

- Create a Class Map as described on page 14-3.

- Open the Policy Map page, and click Add Policy.

- When the Policy Configuration page opens, fill in the “Policy Name” field, and click Add.

- When the Policy Rule Settings page opens, select a class name from the scroll-down list (Class Name field). Configure a policy for traffic that matches criteria defined in this class by setting the quality of service that an IP packet will receive (in the Action field), defining the maximum throughput and burst rate (in the Meter field), and the action that results from a policy violation (in the Exceed field). Then finally click Add to register the new policy.

• A policy map can contain multiple class statements that can be applied

to the same interface with the Service Policy Settings (page 14-10). You

can configure up to 63 policers (i.e., class maps) for Fast Ethernet and

Gigabit Ethernet ingress ports.

• Policing is based on a token bucket, where bucket depth (i.e., the maximum burst before the bucket overflows) is by specified the “Burst” field, and the average rate tokens are removed from the bucket is by specified by the “Rate” option.

14-6

ONFIGURING

UALITY OF

ERVICE

ARAMETERS

• After using the policy map to define packet classification, service tagging, and bandwidth policing, it must be assigned to a specific interface by a

service policy (page 14-10) to take effect.

Command Attributes

Policy Map

• Modify Name and Description – Configures the name and a brief description of a policy map. (Range: 1-16 characters for the name; 1-256 characters for the description)

• Edit Classes – Opens the “Policy Rule Settings” page for the selected class entry. Modify the criteria used to service ingress traffic on this page.

• Add Policy – Opens the “Policy Configuration” page. Enter a policy name and description on this page, and click Add to open the “Policy

Rule Settings” page. Enter the criteria used to service ingress traffic on this page.

• Remove Policy – Deletes a specified policy.

Policy Configuration

• Policy Name — Name of policy map. (Range: 1-32 characters)

• Description – A brief description of a policy map. (Range: 1-256 characters)

• Add – Adds the specified policy.

• Back – Returns to previous page with making any changes.

Policy Rule Settings

- Class Settings -

• Class Name – Name of class map.

• Action – Shows the service provided to ingress traffic by setting a CoS,

DSCP, or IP Precedence value in a matching packet (as specified in

Match Class Settings on page 14-3).

14-7

UALITY OF

ERVICE

• Meter – The maximum throughput and burst rate.

Rate (kbps) – Rate in kilobits per second.

Burst (byte) – Burst in bytes.

• Exceed Action – Specifies whether the traffic that exceeds the specified rate will be dropped or the DSCP service level will be reduced.

• Remove Class – Deletes a class.

- Policy Options -

• Class Name – Name of class map.

• Action – Configures the service provided to ingress traffic by setting a

CoS, DSCP, or IP Precedence value in a matching packet (as specified in

Match Class Settings on page 14-3).

(Range - CoS: 0-7, DSCP: 0-63, IP

Precedence: 0-7, IPv6 DSCP: 0-63)

• Meter – Check this to define the maximum throughput, burst rate, and the action that results from a policy violation.

Rate (kbps) – Rate in kilobits per second. (Range: 1-100000 kbps or maximum port speed, whichever is lower)

Burst (byte) – Burst in bytes. (Range: 64-1522)

• Exceed – Specifies whether the traffic that exceeds the specified rate or burst will be dropped or the DSCP service level will be reduced.

Set – Decreases DSCP priority for out of conformance traffic.

(Range: 0-63).

Drop – Drops out of conformance traffic.

• Add – Adds the specified criteria to the policy map.

14-8

ONFIGURING

UALITY OF

ERVICE

ARAMETERS

Web – Click QoS, DiffServ, Policy Map to display the list of existing policy maps. To add a new policy map click Add Policy. To configure the policy rule settings click Edit Classes.

Figure 14-2 Configuring Policy Maps

14-9

UALITY OF

ERVICE

CLI – This example creates a policy map called “rd-policy,” sets the average bandwidth the 1 Mbps, the burst rate to 1522 bps, and the response to reduce the DSCP value for violating packets to 0.

Console(config)#policy-map rd_policy#3

Console(config-pmap)#class rd_class#3

Console(config-pmap-c)#set ip dscp 4

Console(config-pmap-c)#police 100000 1522 exceed-action set ip dscp 0

Console(config-pmap-c)#

32-6

32-7

32-8

32-9

Attaching a Policy Map to Ingress Queues

This function binds a policy map to the ingress queue of a particular interface.

Command Usage

• You must first define a class map, set an ACL mask to match the criteria defined in the class map, then define a policy map, and finally bind the service policy to the required interface.

• You can only bind one policy map to an interface.

• The current firmware does not allow you to bind a policy map to an egress queue.

Command Attributes

• Ports – Specifies a port.

• Ingress – Applies the rule to ingress traffic.

• Enabled – Check this to enable a policy map on the specified port.

• Policy Map – Select the appropriate policy map from the scroll-down box.

14-10

ONFIGURING

UALITY OF

ERVICE

ARAMETERS

Web – Click QoS, DiffServ, Service Policy Settings. Check Enabled and choose a Policy Map for a port from the scroll-down box, then click Apply.

Figure 14-3 Service Policy Settings

CLI - This example applies a service policy to an ingress interface.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#service-policy input rd_policy#3

Console(config-if)#

24-2

32-10

14-11

UALITY OF

ERVICE

14-12

HAPTER

ULTICAST

ILTERING

Multicasting is used to support real-time applications such as videoconferencing or streaming audio. A multicast server does not have to establish a separate connection with each client. It merely broadcasts its service to the network, and any hosts that want to receive the multicast register with their local multicast switch/router. Although this approach reduces the network overhead required by a multicast server, the broadcast traffic must be carefully pruned at every multicast switch/router it passes through to ensure that traffic is only passed on to the hosts which subscribed to this service.

Unicast

Flow

Multicast

Flow

This switch can use Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) to filter multicast traffic. IGMP Snooping can be used to passively monitor or

“snoop” on exchanges between attached hosts and an IGMP-enabled device, most commonly a multicast router. In this way, the switch can discover the ports that want to join a multicast group, and set its filters accordingly.

If there is no multicast router attached to the local subnet, multicast traffic and query messages may not be received by the switch. In this case (Layer

2) IGMP Query can be used to actively ask the attached hosts if they want to receive a specific multicast service. IGMP Query thereby identifies the ports containing hosts requesting to join the service and sends data out to

15-1

ULTICAST

ILTERING those ports only. It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch/router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.

The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network’s performance, so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing multicast group hosts or multicast routers/switches, instead of flooding traffic to all ports in the subnet (VLAN).

You can also configure a single network-wide multicast VLAN shared by hosts residing in other standard or private VLAN groups, preserving

security and data isolation “Multicast VLAN Registration” on page 15-12.

Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query)

IGMP Snooping and Query – If multicast routing is not supported on other switches in your network, you can use IGMP Snooping and IGMP

Query (page 15-4) to monitor IGMP service requests passing between

multicast clients and servers, and dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic.

When using IGMPv3 snooping, service requests from IGMP Version 1, 2 or 3 hosts are all forwarded to the upstream router as IGMPv3 reports.

The primary enhancement provided by IGMPv3 snooping is in keeping track of information about the specific multicast sources which downstream IGMPv3 hosts have requested or refused. The switch maintains information about both multicast groups and channels, where a group indicates a multicast flow for which the hosts have not requested a specific source (the only option for IGMPv1 and v2 hosts unless statically configured on the switch), and a channel indicates a flow for which the hosts have requested service from a specific source.

15-2

AYER

2 IGMP (S

NOOPING AND

UERY

)

Only IGMPv3 hosts can request service from a specific multicast source.

When downstream hosts request service from a specific source for a multicast service, these sources are all placed in the Include list, and traffic is forwarded to the hosts from each of these sources. IGMPv3 hosts may also request that service be forwarded from all sources except for those specified. In this case, traffic is filtered from sources in the Exclude list, and forwarded from all other available sources.

Notes: 1.

When the switch is configured to use IGMPv3 snooping, the snooping version may be downgraded to version 2 or version

1, depending on the version of the IGMP query packets detected on each VLAN.

IGMP snooping will not function unless a multicast router port is enabled on the switch. This can accomplished in one of two ways. A static router port can be manually configured (see

“Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router” on page

15-8). Using this method, the router port is never timed out,

and will continue to function until explicitly removed. The other method relies on the switch to dynamically create multicast routing ports whenever multicast routing protocol packets or IGMP query packets are detected on a port.

A maximum of up to 255 multicast entries can be maintained for IGMP snooping and 255 entries for Multicast Routing when both of these features are enabled. If the table’s capacity is exceeded, then IGMPv3 snooping will not support multicast source filtering, but will forward multicast traffic from all relevant sources to the requesting hosts.

Static IGMP Router Interface – If IGMP snooping cannot locate the

IGMP querier, you can manually designate a known IGMP querier (i.e., a multicast router/switch) connected over the network to an interface on

your switch (page 15-8). This interface will then join all the current

multicast groups supported by the attached router/switch to ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all appropriate interfaces within the switch.

15-3

ULTICAST

ILTERING

Static IGMP Host Interface – For multicast applications that you need to control more carefully, you can manually assign a multicast service to

specific interfaces on the switch (page 15-11).

Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters

You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently.

Based on the IGMP query and report messages, the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that request multicast traffic. This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly disrupting network performance.

Command Usage

• IGMP Snooping – This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP multicast host groups to identify the IP multicast group members.

It simply monitors the IGMP packets passing through it, picks out the group registration information, and configures the multicast filters accordingly.

Note: Unknown multicast traffic is flooded to all ports in the VLAN for several seconds when first received. If a multicast router port exists on the VLAN, the traffic will be filtered by subjecting it to IGMP snooping. If no router port exists on the VLAN or the multicast filtering table is already full, the switch will continue flooding the traffic into the VLAN.

• IGMP Querier – A router, or multicast-enabled switch, can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. If there is more than one router/switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting, one of these devices is elected “querier” and assumes the role of querying the

LAN for group members. It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch/router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.

15-4

AYER

2 IGMP (S

NOOPING AND

UERY

)

Note: Multicast routers use this information, along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet.

Command Attributes

• IGMP Status — When enabled, the switch will monitor network traffic to determine which hosts want to receive multicast traffic. This is also referred to as IGMP Snooping. (Default: Enabled)

• Act as IGMP Querier — When enabled, the switch can serve as the

Querier, which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. (Default: Disabled)

• IGMP Query Count — Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group. (Range: 2-10, Default: 2)

• IGMP Query Interval — Sets the frequency at which the switch sends

IGMP host-query messages. (Range: 60-125 seconds, Default: 125)

• IGMP Report Delay — Sets the time between receiving an IGMP

Report for an IP multicast address on a port before the switch sends an

IGMP Query out of that port and removes the entry from its list. (Range:

5-25 seconds, Default: 10)

• IGMP Query Timeout — The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port (i.e., the interface which had been receiving query packets) to have expired. (Range: 300-500 seconds, Default: 300)

• IGMP Version — Sets the protocol version for compatibility with other devices on the network. (Range: 1-3; Default: 3)

Notes: 1.

All systems on the subnet must support the same version.

Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2 and v3, including IGMP Report Delay and IGMP Query Timeout.

15-5

ULTICAST

ILTERING

Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Configuration. Adjust the IGMP settings as required, and then click Apply. (The default settings are shown below.)

15-6

Figure 15-1 IGMP Configuration

CLI – This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering, and then displays the current status.

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-count 10

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 100

33-2

33-9

33-10

33-11

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time 20

33-11

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 300

33-12

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping version 2

33-4

Console(config)#exit

Console#show ip igmp snooping

Service status: Enabled

Querier status: Enabled

33-7

Query count: 10

Query interval: 100 sec

Query max response time: 20 sec

Router port expire time: 300 sec

IGMP snooping version: Version 2

Console#

AYER

2 IGMP (S

NOOPING AND

UERY

)

Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router

Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained from IGMP, along with a multicast routing protocol such as

DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet. These routers may be dynamically discovered by the switch or statically assigned to an interface on the switch.

You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this switch attached to a neighboring multicast router/switch for each VLAN ID.

Command Attributes

• VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4093).

• Multicast Router List – Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch or those that are statically assigned to an interface on this switch.

Web – Click IGMP Snooping, Multicast Router Port Information. Select the required VLAN ID from the scroll-down list to display the associated multicast routers.

Figure 15-2 Multicast Router Port Information

15-7

ULTICAST

ILTERING

CLI – This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a port attached to a multicast router.

33-14

Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1

VLAN M'cast Router Port Type

---- ------------------ -------

1 Eth 1/11 Static

Console#

Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router

Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router/ switch connected over the network to an interface (port or trunk) on your switch, you can manually configure the interface (and a specified VLAN) to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router. This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch.

Command Attributes

• Interface – Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list.

• VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router.

• Port or Trunk – Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router.

Web – Click IGMP Snooping, Static Multicast Router Port Configuration.

Specify the interfaces attached to a multicast router, indicate the VLAN which will forward all the corresponding multicast traffic, and then click

Add. After you have finished adding interfaces to the list, click Apply.

15-8

Figure 15-3 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration

AYER

2 IGMP (S

NOOPING AND

UERY

)

CLI – This example configures port 1 as a multicast router port within

VLAN 1.

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/1

33-13

Console(config)#exit

Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1

VLAN M'cast Router Port Type

33-14

---- ------------------ -------

1 Eth 1/1 Static

Console#

Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services

You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast service.

Command Attribute

• VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN for which to display port members.

• Multicast IP Address – The IP address for a specific multicast service.

• Multicast Group Port List – Shows the interfaces that have already been assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast service.

15-9

ULTICAST

ILTERING

Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IP Multicast Registration Table. Select a

VLAN ID and the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll-down lists. The switch will display all the interfaces that are propagating this multicast service.

15-10

Figure 15-4 IP Multicast Registration Table

CLI – This example displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1, along with the ports propagating the corresponding services.

The Type field shows if this entry was learned dynamically or was statically configured.

Console#show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1

VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type

---- --------------- ------------ -------

1 224.1.1.12 Eth1/12 USER

1 224.1.2.3 Eth1/12 IGMP

Console#

33-8

AYER

2 IGMP (S

NOOPING AND

UERY

)

Assigning Ports to Multicast Services

Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping

and IGMP Query messages as described in “Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters” on page 15-4. For certain applications that require

tighter control, you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch. First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN, and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group.

Command Usage

• Static multicast addresses are never aged out.

• When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN, the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that

VLAN.

Command Attributes

• Interface – Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list.

• VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router/switch.

• Multicast IP – The IP address for a specific multicast service

• Port or Trunk – Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router/ switch.

15-11

ULTICAST

ILTERING

Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Member Port Table. Specify the interface attached to a multicast service (via an IGMP-enabled switch or multicast router), indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service, specify the multicast IP address, and click Add. After you have completed adding ports to the member list, click Apply.

Figure 15-5 IGMP Member Port Table

CLI – This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1, and then displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1.

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224.1.1.12 ethernet 1/12

Console(config)#exit

Console#show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1

VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type

---- --------------- ------------ -------

1 224.1.1.12 Eth1/12 USER

1 224.1.2.3 Eth1/12 IGMP

33-3

33-8

Multicast VLAN Registration

Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is a protocol that controls access to a single network-wide VLAN most commonly used for transmitting multicast traffic (such as television channels or video-on-demand) across a service provider’s network. Any multicast traffic entering an MVR VLAN is sent to all attached subscribers. This protocol can significantly reduce to processing overhead required to dynamically monitor and establish the

15-12

ULTICAST

VLAN R

EGISTRATION distribution tree for a normal multicast VLAN. This makes it possible to support common multicast services over a wide part of the network without having to use any multicast routing protocol.

MVR maintains the user isolation and data security provided by VLAN segregation by passing only multicast traffic into other VLANs to which the subscribers belong. Even though common multicast streams are passed onto different VLAN groups from the MVR VLAN, users in different

IEEE 802.1Q or private VLANs cannot exchange any information (except through upper-level routing services).

Multicast Router

Satellite Services

Multicast Server

Layer 2 Switch Source

Port

Service

Network

Receiver

Ports

Set-top Box

General Configuration Guidelines for MVR

1. Enable MVR globally on the switch, select the MVR VLAN, and add the multicast groups that will stream traffic to attached hosts (see

“Configuring Global MVR Settings” on page 15-14).

2. Set the interfaces that will join the MVR as source ports or receiver

ports (see “Web – Click MVR, Port Information or Trunk

Information.” on page 15-16).

3. Enable IGMP Snooping to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or

leave an MVR group (see “Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query

Parameters” on page 4). Note that only IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can

issue multicast join or leave messages.

15-13

ULTICAST

ILTERING

4. For multicast streams that will run for a long term and be associated with a stable set of hosts, you can statically bind the multicast group to

the participating interfaces (see “Assigning Static Multicast Groups to

Interfaces” on page 15-20).

Configuring Global MVR Settings

The global settings for Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) include enabling or disabling MVR for the switch, selecting the VLAN that will serve as the sole channel for common multicast streams supported by the service provider, and assigning the multicast group address for each of these services to the MVR VLAN.

Command Attributes

• MVR Status – When MVR is enabled on both the switch, any multicast data associated an MVR group is sent from all designated source ports, and to all receiver ports that have registered to receive data from that multicast group. (Default: Disabled)

• MVR Running Status – Indicates whether or not all necessary conditions in the MVR environment are satisfied. (Running status is true as long as MVR Status is enabled, and the specified MVR VLAN exists.)

• MVR VLAN – Identifier of the VLAN that serves as the channel for streaming multicast services using MVR. (Range: 1-4094; Default: 1)

• MVR Group IP – IP address for an MVR multicast group. The IP address range of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 is used for multicast streams. MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224.0.0.x. (Range: 224.0.1.0 - 239.255.255.255;

Default: no groups are assigned to the MVR VLAN)

• Count – The number of contiguous MVR group addresses.

(Range: 1-255; Default: 0)

15-14

ULTICAST

VLAN R

EGISTRATION

Web – Click MVR, Configuration. Enable MVR globally on the switch, select the MVR VLAN, add the multicast groups that will stream traffic to attached hosts, and then click Apply.

Figure 15-6 MVR Global Configuration

CLI – This example first enables IGMP snooping, enables MVR globally, and then configures a range of MVR group addresses.

Console(config)#ip igmp snooping

Console(config)#mvr

Console(config)#mvr group 228.1.23.1 10

Console(config)#

33-2

33-16

Displaying MVR Interface Status

You can display information about the interfaces attached to the MVR

VLAN.

Field Attributes

• Type – Shows the MVR port type.

• Oper Status – Shows the link status.

15-15

ULTICAST

ILTERING

• MVR Status – Shows the MVR status. MVR status for source ports is

“ACTIVE” if MVR is globally enabled on the switch. MVR status for receiver ports is “ACTIVE” only if there are subscribers receiving multicast traffic from one of the MVR groups, or a multicast group has been statically assigned to an interface.

• Immediate Leave – Shows if immediate leave is enabled or disabled.

• Trunk Member 20 – Shows if port is a trunk member.

Web – Click MVR, Port Information or Trunk Information.

Figure 15-7 MVR Port Information

CLI – This example shows information about interfaces attached to the

MVR VLAN.

33-19

Console#show mvr interface

Port Type Status Immediate Leave

------- -------- ------------- --------------eth1/1 SOURCE ACTIVE/UP Disable eth1/2 RECEIVER ACTIVE/UP Disable

Console#

20. Port Information only.

15-16

ULTICAST

VLAN R

EGISTRATION

Configuring MVR Interface Status

Each interface that participates in the MVR VLAN must be configured as an MVR source port or receiver port. If only one subscriber attached to an interface is receiving multicast services, you can enable the immediate leave function.

Command Usage

• One or more interfaces may be configured as MVR source ports.

• MVR receiver ports cannot be members of a trunk. Receiver ports can belong to different VLANs, but should not be configured as a member of the MVR VLAN.

• IGMP snooping can be used to allow a source port or receiver port to dynamically join or leave multicast groups within the MVR VLAN using the standard rules for multicast filtering. Multicast groups can also be

statically assigned to a source port or receiver port (see “Assigning Static

Multicast Groups to Interfaces” on page 15-20).

• Immediate leave applies only to receiver ports. When enabled, the receiver port is immediately removed from the multicast group identified in the leave message. When immediate leave is disabled, the switch follows the standard rules by sending a group-specific query to the receiver port and waiting for a response to determine if there are any remaining subscribers for that multicast group before removing the port from the group list. Using immediate leave can speed up leave latency, but should only be enabled on a port attached to one multicast subscriber to avoid disrupting services to other group members attached to the same interface. Note that immediate leave does not apply to multicast groups which have been statically assigned to a port.

Command Attributes

• MVR Type – The following interface types are supported:

- Source – An uplink port that can send and receive multicast data for the groups assigned to the MVR VLAN.

- Receiver – A subscriber port that can receive multicast data sent through the MVR VLAN.

15-17

ULTICAST

ILTERING

- Non-MVR – An interface that does not participate in the MVR

VLAN. (This is the default type.)

• Immediate Leave – Configures the switch to immediately remove an interface from a multicast stream as soon as it receives a leave message for that group.

• Trunk 21 – Shows if port is a trunk member.

Web – Click MVR, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration.

Figure 15-8 MVR Port Configuration

CLI – This example configures an MVR source port and receiver port, and then enables immediate leave on the receiver port.

24-2

33-17

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#mvr type source

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#mvr type receiver

Console(config-if)#mvr immediate

Console(config-if)#

21. Port Information only.

15-18

ULTICAST

VLAN R

EGISTRATION

Displaying Port Members of Multicast Groups

You can display the multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN either through IGMP snooping or static configuration.

Field Attributes

• Group IP – Multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN.

• Group Port List – Shows the interfaces with subscribers for multicast services provided through the MVR VLAN.

Web – Click MVR, Group IP Information.

Figure 15-9 MVR Group IP Information

CLI – This example following shows information about the interfaces associated with multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN.

33-19

Console#show mvr members

MVR Group IP Status Members

---------------- -------- -------

225.0.0.1 ACTIVE eth1/1(d), eth1/2(s)

225.0.0.2 INACTIVE None

225.0.0.3 INACTIVE None

225.0.0.4 INACTIVE None

225.0.0.5 INACTIVE None

225.0.0.6 INACTIVE None

225.0.0.7 INACTIVE None

225.0.0.8 INACTIVE None

225.0.0.9 INACTIVE None

225.0.0.10 INACTIVE None

Console#

15-19

ULTICAST

ILTERING

Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces

For multicast streams that will run for a long term and be associated with a stable set of hosts, you can statically bind the multicast group to the participating interfaces.

Command Usage

• Any multicast groups that use the MVR VLAN must be statically

assigned to it under the MVR Configuration menu (see “Configuring

Global MVR Settings” on page 15-14).

• The IP address range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 is used for multicast streams. MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved

IP multicast address range of 224.0.0.x.

Command Attributes

• Interface – Indicates a port or trunk.

• Member – Shows the IP addresses for MVR multicast groups which have been statically assigned to the selected interface.

• Non-Member – Shows the IP addresses for all MVR multicast groups which have not been statically assigned to the selected interface.

15-20

ULTICAST

VLAN R

EGISTRATION

Web – Click MVR, Group Member Configuration. Select a port or trunk from the “Interface” field, and click Query to display the assigned multicast groups. Select a multicast address from the displayed lists, and click the Add or Remove button to modify the Member list.

Figure 15-10 MVR Group Member Configuration

CLI – This example statically assigns a multicast group to a receiver port.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#mvr group 228.1.23.1

Console(config-if)#

24-2

33-17

15-21

ULTICAST

ILTERING

15-22

HAPTER

OMAIN

AME

ERVICE

The Domain Naming System (DNS) service on this switch allows host names to be mapped to IP addresses using static table entries or by redirection to other name servers on the network. When a client device designates this switch as a DNS server, the client will attempt to resolve host names into IP addresses by forwarding DNS queries to the switch, and waiting for a response.

You can manually configure entries in the DNS table used for mapping domain names to IP addresses, configure default domain names, or specify one or more name servers to use for domain name to address translation.

Configuring General DNS Service Parameters

Command Usage

• To enable DNS service on this switch, first configure one or more name servers, and then enable domain lookup status.

• To append domain names to incomplete host names received from a

DNS client (i.e., not formatted with dotted notation), you can specify a default domain name or a list of domain names to be tried in sequential order.

• If there is no domain list, the default domain name is used. If there is a domain list, the default domain name is not used.

• When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS service on this switch and a domain name list has been specified, the switch will work through the domain list, appending each domain name in the list to the host name, and checking with the specified name servers for a match.

16-1

OMAIN

AME

ERVICE

• When more than one name server is specified, the servers are queried in the specified sequence until a response is received, or the end of the list is reached with no response.

• Note that if all name servers are deleted, DNS will automatically be disabled.

Command Attributes

• Domain Lookup Status – Enables DNS host name-to-address translation.

• Default Domain Name 22 – Defines the default domain name appended to incomplete host names. (Range: 1-64 alphanumeric characters)

•

Domain Name List 22

– Defines a list of domain names that can be appended to incomplete host names. (Range: 1-64 alphanumeric characters. 1-5 names)

• Name Server List – Specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for name-to-address resolution. (Range: 1-6 IP addresses)

22. Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name.

16-2

ONFIGURING

ENERAL

DNS S

ERVICE

ARAMETERS

Web – Select DNS, General Configuration. Set the default domain name or list of domain names, specify one or more name servers to use to use for address resolution, enable domain lookup status, and click Apply.

Figure 16-1 DNS General Configuration

16-3

OMAIN

AME

ERVICE

CLI - This example sets a default domain name and a domain list.

However, remember that if a domain list is specified, the default domain name is not used.

34-4

34-5

Console(config)#ip domain-name sample.com

Console(config)#ip domain-list sample.com.uk

Console(config)#ip domain-list sample.com.jp

Console(config)#ip name-server 192.168.1.55 10.1.0.55

Console(config)#ip domain-lookup

Console#show dns

Domain Lookup Status:

DNS enabled

Default Domain Name:

.sample.com

Domain Name List:

.sample.com.uk

.sample.com.jp

Name Server List:

192.168.1.55

10.1.0.55

Console#

34-6

34-7

34-9

Configuring Static DNS Host to

Address Entries

You can manually configure static entries in the DNS table that are used to map domain names to IP addresses.

Command Usage

• Static entries may be used for local devices connected directly to the attached network, or for commonly used resources located elsewhere on the network.

• Servers or other network devices may support one or more connections via multiple IP addresses. If more than one IP address is associated with a host name in the static table or via information returned from a name server, a DNS client can try each address in succession, until it establishes a connection with the target device.

16-4

ONFIGURING

TATIC

DNS H

OST TO

DDRESS

NTRIES

Field Attributes

• Host Name – Name of a host device that is mapped to one or more IP addresses. (Range: 1-64 characters)

• IP Address – Internet address(es) associated with a host name.

(Range: 1-8 addresses)

• Alias – Displays the host names that are mapped to the same address(es) as a previously configured entry.

Web – Select DNS, Static Host Table. Enter a host name and one or more corresponding addresses, then click Apply.

Figure 16-2 DNS Static Host Table

16-5

OMAIN

AME

ERVICE

CLI - This example maps two address to a host name, and then configures an alias host name for the same addresses.

34-2

Console(config)#ip host rd5 192.168.1.55 10.1.0.55

Console(config)#ip host rd6 10.1.0.55

Console#show hosts

34-8

Hostname

rd5

Inet address

10.1.0.55 192.168.1.55

Alias

1.rd6

Console#

Displaying the DNS Cache

You can display entries in the DNS cache that have been learned via the designated name servers.

Field Attributes

• No – The entry number for each resource record.

• Flag – The flag is always “4” indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable.

• Type – This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or primary name for the owner, and ALIAS which specifies multiple domain names which are mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry.

• IP – The IP address associated with this record.

• TTL – The time to live reported by the name server.

• Domain – The domain name associated with this record.

16-6

Web – Select DNS, Cache.

ISPLAYING THE

DNS C

ACHE

Figure 16-3 DNS Cache

CLI - This example displays all the resource records learned from the designated name servers.

Console#show dns cache

NO FLAG TYPE IP TTL DOMAIN

34-9

0 4 CNAME 207.46.134.222 51 www.microsoft.akadns.net

1 4 CNAME 207.46.134.190 51 www.microsoft.akadns.net

2 4 CNAME 207.46.134.155 51 www.microsoft.akadns.net

3 4 CNAME 207.46.249.222 51 www.microsoft.akadns.net

4 4 CNAME 207.46.249.27 51 www.microsoft.akadns.net

5 4 ALIAS POINTER TO:4 51 www.microsoft.com

6 4 CNAME 207.46.68.27 71964 msn.com.tw

7 4 ALIAS POINTER TO:6 71964 www.msn.com.tw

8 4 CNAME 65.54.131.192 605 passportimages.com

9 4 ALIAS POINTER TO:8 605 www.passportimages.com

10 4 CNAME 165.193.72.190 87 global.msads.net

Console#

16-7

OMAIN

AME

ERVICE

16-8

ECTION

III

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

This section provides a detailed description of the Command Line

Interface, along with examples for all of the commands.

Overview of Command Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

General Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

System Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

SNMP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

User Authentication Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

Client Security Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

Access Control List Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1

Link Aggregation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1

Mirror Port Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

Rate Limit Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1

Address Table Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1

Spanning Tree Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-1

VLAN Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1

Class of Service Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1

Quality of Service Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-1

Multicast Filtering Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-1

Domain Name Service Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-1

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

IP Interface Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1

HAPTER

VERVIEW OF

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI).

Using the Command Line Interface

Accessing the CLI

When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server’s console port, or via a Telnet connection, the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt. Using the switch's command-line interface (CLI) is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system.

Console Connection

To access the switch through the console port, perform these steps:

1. At the console prompt, enter the user name and password. (The default user names are “admin” and “guest” with corresponding passwords of “admin” and “guest.”) When the administrator user name and password is entered, the CLI displays the “Console#” prompt and enters privileged access mode (i.e., Privileged Exec). But when the guest user name and password is entered, the CLI displays the

“Console>” prompt and enters normal access mode (i.e., Normal

Exec).

2. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.

3. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.

17-1

VERVIEW OF

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

After connecting to the system through the console port, the login screen displays:

User Access Verification

Username: admin

Password:

CLI session with the TigerAccess 10/100 is opened.

To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].

Console#

Telnet Connection

Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol. In this environment, your management station and any network device you want to manage over the network must have a valid IP address. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Each address consists of a network portion and host portion. For example, the IP address assigned to this switch, 10.1.0.1, consists of a network portion (10.1.0) and a host portion (1).

Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default.

To access the switch through a Telnet session, you must first set the IP address for the Master unit, and set the default gateway if you are managing the switch from a different IP subnet. For example,

Console(config)#interface vlan 1

Console(config-if)#ip address 10.1.0.254 255.255.255.0

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#ip default-gateway 10.1.0.254

If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to the Internet, you need to apply for a registered IP address.

However, if you are attached to an isolated network, then you can use any

IP address that matches the network segment to which you are attached.

17-2

NTERING

OMMANDS

After you configure the switch with an IP address, you can open a Telnet session by performing these steps:

1. From the remote host, enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the device you want to access.

2. At the prompt, enter the user name and system password. The CLI will display the “Vtyn #” prompt for the administrator to show that you are using privileged access mode (i.e., Privileged Exec), or “Vtyn >” for the guest to show that you are using normal access mode (i.e., Normal

Exec), where n indicates the number of the current Telnet session.

3. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.

4. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.

After entering the Telnet command, the login screen displays:

Username: admin

Password:

CLI session with the TigerAccess 10/100 is opened.

To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].

Vty-0#

Note: You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet.

Entering Commands

This section describes how to enter CLI commands.

Keywords and Arguments

A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments. Keywords identify a command, and arguments specify configuration parameters. For example, in the command “show interfaces status ethernet 1/5,” show interfaces and status are keywords, ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type, and 1/5 specifies the unit/port.

17-3

VERVIEW OF

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

You can enter commands as follows:

• To enter a simple command, enter the command keyword.

• To enter multiple commands, enter each command in the required order.

For example, to enable Privileged Exec command mode, and display the startup configuration, enter:

Console> enable

Console# show startup-config

• To enter commands that require parameters, enter the required parameters after the command keyword. For example, to set a password for the administrator, enter:

Console(config)# username admin password 0 smith

Minimum Abbreviation

The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a command. For example, the command “configure” can be entered as con . If an entry is ambiguous, the system will prompt for further input.

Command Completion

If you terminate input with a Tab key, the CLI will print the remaining characters of a partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity. In the

“logging history” example, typing log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to “ logging .”

Getting Help on Commands

You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help command. You can also display command syntax by using the “?” character to list keywords or parameters.

17-4

NTERING

OMMANDS

Showing Commands

If you enter a “?” at the command prompt, the system will display the first level of keywords for the current command class (Normal Exec or

Privileged Exec) or configuration class (Global, ACL, Interface, Line, or

VLAN Database, or MSTP). You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command. For example, the command “ show ?

” displays a list of possible show commands:

Console#show ?

access-group Access groups

access-list Access lists

arp Information of ARP cache

bridge-ext Bridge extend information

calendar Date information

class-map Display class maps

dns DNS information

dot1q-tunnel 802.1Q tunnel ports information

dot1x Show 802.1x content

garp GARP property

gvrp Show GARP information of interface

history Information of history

hosts Host information

interfaces Information of interfaces

ip IP information

lacp Show LACP statistic

line TTY line information

log Login records

logging Show the contents of logging buffers

mac MAC access lists

mac-address-table Set configuration of the address table

management Show management IP filter

map Map priority

mvr Show mvr interface information

policy-map Display policy maps

port Characteristics of the port

protocol-vlan Protocol-VLAN information

public-key Show information of public key

pvlan Information of private VLAN

queue Information of priority queue

radius-server RADIUS server information

rate-limit Display rate limit for CoS priorities

running-config The system configuration of running

snmp SNMP statistics

sntp SNTP

spanning-tree Specify spanning-tree

ssh Secure shell

startup-config The system configuration of starting up

system Information of system

tacacs-server Login by TACACS server

users Display information about terminal lines

version System hardware and software status

vlan Switch VLAN Virtual Interface

17-5

VERVIEW OF

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

The command “ show interfaces ?

” will display the following information:

Console#show interfaces ?

counters Information of interfaces counters

protocol-vlan Protocol-vlan information

status Information of interfaces status

switchport Information of interfaces switchport

Console#

Partial Keyword Lookup

If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark, alternatives that match the initial letters are provided. (Remember not to leave a space between the command and question mark.) For example “ s?

” shows all the keywords starting with “s.”

Console#show s?

snmp sntp spanning-tree ssh startup-config system

Console#sh s

Negating the Effect of Commands

For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword “ no ” to cancel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value. For example, the logging command will log system messages to a host server. To disable logging, specify the no logging command. This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands.

Using Command History

The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered. You can scroll back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key. Any command displayed in the history list can be executed again, or first modified and then executed.

Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed commands.

17-6

NTERING

OMMANDS

Understanding Command Modes

The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes. Exec commands generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters. Configuration commands, on the other hand, modify interface parameters or enable certain switching functions. These classes are further divided into different modes. Available commands depend on the selected mode. You can always enter a question mark “ ?

” at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the current mode. The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the following table:

Class

Exec

Configuration

Table 17-1 General Command Modes

Mode

Normal

Privileged

Global * Access Control List

Class Map

Interface

Line

Multiple Spanning Tree

Policy Map

VLAN Database

* You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode. You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes.

Exec Commands

When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and password “guest,” the system enters the Normal Exec command mode (or guest mode), displaying the “Console>” command prompt.

Only a limited number of the commands are available in this mode. You can access all commands only from the Privileged Exec command mode

(or administrator mode). To access Privilege Exec mode, open a new console session with the user name and password “admin.” The system will now display the “Console#” command prompt. You can also enter

17-7

VERVIEW OF

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode, by entering the enable command, followed by the privileged level password “super”

(page 21-4).

To enter Privileged Exec mode, enter the following user names and passwords:

Username: admin

Password: [admin login password]

CLI session with the TigerAccess 10/100 is opened.

To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].

Console#

Username: guest

Password: [guest login password]

CLI session with the TigerAccess 10/100 is opened.

To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].

Console>enable

Password: [privileged level password]

Console#

Configuration Commands

Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify switch settings. These commands modify the running configuration only and are not saved when the switch is rebooted. To store the running configuration in non-volatile storage, use the copy running-config startup-config command.

The configuration commands are organized into different modes:

• Global Configuration - These commands modify the system level configuration, and include commands such as hostname and snmp-server community .

• Access Control List Configuration - These commands are used for packet filtering.

• Class Map Configuration - Creates a DiffServ class map for a specified traffic type.

17-8

NTERING

OMMANDS

• Interface Configuration - These commands modify the port configuration such as speed-duplex and negotiation .

• Line Configuration - These commands modify the console port and

Telnet configuration, and include command such as parity and databits .

• Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration - These commands configure settings for the selected multiple spanning tree instance.

• Policy Map Configuration - Creates a DiffServ policy map for multiple interfaces.

• VLAN Configuration - Includes the command to create VLAN groups.

To enter the Global Configuration mode, enter the command configure in Privileged Exec mode. The system prompt will change to

“Console(config)#” which gives you access privilege to all Global

Configuration commands.

Console#configure

Console(config)#

17-9

VERVIEW OF

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

To enter the other modes, at the configuration prompt type one of the following commands. Use the exit or end command to return to the

Privileged Exec mode.

Table 17-2 Configuration Command Modes

Mode Command

Line line {console | vty}

Access

Control

List access-list ip standard access-list ip extended access-list ip mask-precedence access-list mac access-list mac mask-precedence

Class

Map class map

Interface interface {ethernet port | port-channel id | vlan id }

MSTP spanning-tree mst-configuration

Policy

Map policy map

VLAN vlan database

Prompt

Console(config-line)

Console(config-std-acl)

Console(config-ext-acl)

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)

Console(config-mac-acl)

Console(config-mac-mask-acl)

Console(config-cmap)

Console(config-if)

Console(config-mstp)

Console(config-pmap)

Console(config-vlan)

Page

For example, you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration mode, and then return to Privileged Exec mode

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#

17-10

NTERING

OMMANDS

Command Line Processing

Commands are not case sensitive. You can abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently available commands or parameters. You can use the Tab key to complete partial commands, or enter a partial command followed by the “?” character to display a list of possible matches. You can also use the following editing keystrokes for command-line processing:

Keystroke

Table 17-3 Keystroke Commands

Function

Ctrl-A

Ctrl-B

Ctrl-C

Ctrl-E

Ctrl-F

Ctrl-K

Shifts cursor to start of command line.

Shifts cursor to the left one character.

Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt.

Shifts cursor to end of command line.

Shifts cursor to the right one character.

Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line.

Ctrl-L

Ctrl-N

Ctrl-P

Ctrl-R

Ctrl-U

Ctrl-W

Esc-B

Esc-D

Repeats current command line on a new line.

Enters the next command line in the history buffer.

Enters the last command.

Repeats current command line on a new line.

Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line.

Deletes the last word typed.

Moves the cursor back one word.

Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word.

Esc-F Moves the cursor forward one word.

Delete key or backspace key Erases a mistake when entering a command.

17-11

VERVIEW OF

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

Command Groups

The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below .

Table 17-4 Command Group Index

Command Group Description

General Basic commands for entering privileged access mode, restarting the system, or quitting the CLI

System Management Display and setting of system information, basic modes of operation, maximum frame size, file management, console port and telnet settings, system logs, SMTP alerts, and the system clock

Simple Network

Management

Protocol

Activates authentication failure traps; configures community access strings, and trap receivers

User Authentication Configures user names and passwords, logon access using local or remote authentication, management access through the web server, Telnet server and Secure Shell; as well as port security,

IEEE 802.1X port access control, and restricted access based on specified IP addresses

Access Control List Provides filtering for IPv4 frames (based on address, protocol, TCP/UDP port number or

TCP control code), or non-IP frames (based on

MAC address or Ethernet type)

Interface Configures the connection parameters for all

Ethernet ports, aggregated links, and VLANs

Link Aggregation

Mirror Port

Rate Limit

Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk; configures Link Aggregation Control

Protocol for port trunks

Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the data passing through or the performance of the monitored port

Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on a port

Page

17-12

OMMAND

ROUPS

Table 17-4 Command Group Index (Continued)

Command Group Description

Address Table Configures the address table for filtering specified addresses, displays current entries, clears the table, or sets the aging time

Spanning Tree

VLANs

Class of Service

Quality of Service

Multicast Filtering

Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch

Configures VLAN settings, and defines port membership for VLAN groups; also enables or configures private VLANs, protocol VLANs, and

QinQ tunneling

Sets port priority for untagged frames, selects strict priority or weighted round robin, relative weight for each priority queue, also sets priority for TCP/

UDP traffic types, IP precedence, and DSCP

Configures Differentiated Services

Configures IGMP multicast filtering, query parameters, and specifies ports attached to a multicast router

Configures DNS services.

Page

Domain Name

Service

IP Interface Configures IP address for the switch

35-1

The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations:

ACL (Access Control List Configuration)

CM (Class Map Configuration)

NE (Normal Exec)

GC (Global Configuration)

IC (Interface Configuration)

LC (Line Configuration)

MST (Multiple Spanning Tree)

PE (Privileged Exec)

PM (Policy Map Configuration)

VC (VLAN Database Configuration)

17-13

VERVIEW OF

OMMAND

INE

NTERFACE

17-14

HAPTER

ENERAL

OMMANDS

These commands are used to control the command access mode, configuration mode, and other basic functions.

Table 18-1 General Commands

Command enable disable configure exit

Function

Activates privileged mode

Mode Page

18-2

Returns to normal mode from privileged mode PE

Activates global configuration mode PE

18-3

show history Shows the command history buffer reload Restarts the system prompt end

Customizes the CLI prompt

Returns to Privileged Exec mode

NE, PE

18-4

GC any config. mode any

18-5

18-6

18-7

quit help

Returns to the previous configuration mode, or exits the CLI

Exits a CLI session

Shows how to use help

Shows options for command completion

(context sensitive)

NE, PE any any

18-7

18-1

ENERAL

OMMANDS

enable

This command activates Privileged Exec mode. In privileged mode, additional commands are available, and certain commands display

additional information. See “Understanding Command Modes” on page

17-7.

Syntax enable [ level ] level - Privilege level to log into the device.

The device has two predefined privilege levels: 0: Normal Exec,

15: Privileged Exec. Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode.

Default Setting

Level 15

Command Mode

Normal Exec

Command Usage

“super” is the default password required to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec. (To set this password, see the enable password

command on page 21-4.)

The “#” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in privileged access mode.

Example

Console>enable

Password: [privileged level password]

Console#

Related Commands

disable (18-3)

enable password (21-4)

18-2

DISABLE

disable

This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode. In normal access mode, you can only display basic information on the switch's configuration or Ethernet statistics. To gain access to all

commands, you must use the privileged mode. See “Understanding

Command Modes” on page 17-7.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

The “>” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in normal access mode.

Example

Console#disable

Console>

Related Commands

enable (18-2)

configure

This command activates Global Configuration mode. You must enter this mode to modify any settings on the switch. You must also enter Global

Configuration mode prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes, including Interface Configuration, Line Configuration, VLAN

Database Configuration, and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration. See

“Understanding Command Modes” on page 17-7.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

18-3

ENERAL

OMMANDS

Example

Console#configure

Console(config)#

Related Commands

end (18-6)

show history

This command shows the contents of the command history buffer.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and

10 Configuration commands.

Example

In this example, the show history command lists the contents of the command history buffer:

Console#show history

Execution command history:

2 config

1 show history

Configuration command history:

4 interface vlan 1

3 exit

2 interface vlan 1

1 end

Console#

18-4

RELOAD

The !

command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode, and commands from the Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration modes. In this example, the !2

command repeats the second command in the Execution history buffer ( config ).

Console#!2

Console#config

Console(config)#

reload

This command restarts the system.

Note: When the system is restarted, it will always run the Power-On

Self-Test. It will also retain all configuration information stored in non-volatile memory by the copy running-config startup-config command.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

This command resets the entire system.

Example

This example shows how to reset the switch:

Console#reload

System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y

18-5

ENERAL

OMMANDS

prompt

This command customizes the CLI prompt. Use the no form to restore the default prompt.

Syntax prompt string no prompt string - Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt.

(Maximum length: 255 characters)

Default Setting

Console

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#prompt RD2

RD2(config)#

end

This command returns to Privileged Exec mode.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration, Interface Configuration, Line Configuration,

VLAN Database Configuration, and Multiple Spanning Tree

Configuration.

Example

This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the

Interface Configuration mode:

Console(config-if)#end

Console#

18-6

EXIT

exit

This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exits the configuration program.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Any

Example

This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the

Global Configuration mode, and then quit the CLI session:

Console(config)#exit

Console#exit

Press ENTER to start session

User Access Verification

Username:

quit

This command exits the configuration program.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program.

18-7

ENERAL

OMMANDS

Example

This example shows how to quit a CLI session:

Console#quit

Press ENTER to start session

User Access Verification

Username:

18-8

HAPTER

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

These commands are used to control system logs, passwords, user names, management options, and display or configure a variety of other system information.

Table 19-1 System Management Commands

Command Group Function

Device Designation Configures information that uniquely identifies this switch

System Status Displays system configuration, active managers, and version information

System Mode

System MTU

Configures the switch to operate in normal mode or

QinQ mode

Enables support for jumbo frames; sets the maximum transfer unit size

File Management

Line

Manages code image or ECN330-switch configuration files

Sets communication parameters for the serial port, including baud rate and console time-out

Event Logging

SMTP Alerts

Controls logging of error messages

Configures SMTP email alerts

Time (System Clock) Sets the system clock automatically via NTP/SNTP server or manually

Page

19-1

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Device Designation Commands

This section describes commands used to configure information that uniquely identifies the switch.

Command hostname snmp-server contact snmp-server location

Table 19-2 Device Designation Commands

Function

Specifies the host name for the switch

Sets the system contact string

Mode Page

19-2

20-5

Sets the system location string GC

20-5

hostname

This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device. Use the no form to restore the default host name.

Syntax hostname name no hostname name - The name of this host. (Maximum length: 255 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#hostname RD#1

Console(config)#

19-2

YSTEM

TATUS

OMMANDS

System Status Commands

This section describes commands used to display system information.

Command show startup-config show running-config show system show users show version

Table 19-3 System Status Commands

Function

Displays the contents of the configuration file

(stored in flash memory) that is used to start up the system

Mode Page

Displays the configuration data currently in use

Displays system information

Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user name, idle time, and IP address of Telnet clients

NE,

Displays version information for the system NE,

show startup-config

This command displays the configuration file stored in non-volatile memory that is used to start up the system.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• Use this command in conjunction with the show running-config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non-volatile memory.

• This command displays settings for key command modes. Each mode group is separated by “!” symbols, and includes the configuration

19-3

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS mode command, and corresponding commands. This command displays the following information:

- MAC address for the switch

- SNTP server settings

- SNMP community strings

- Users (names and access levels)

- VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)

- VLAN configuration settings for each interface

- Multiple spanning tree instances (name and interfaces)

- IP address

- Layer 4 precedence settings

- Spanning tree settings

- Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet

Example

Console#show startup-config building startup-config, please wait.....

!<stackingDB>00</stackingDB>

!<stackingMac>01_00-12-cf-21-dc-e0_01</stackingMac>

phymap 00-12-cf-21-dc-e0

SNTP server 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

snmp-server community public ro snmp-server community private rw!

username admin access-level 15 username admin password 7 21232f297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3 username guest access-level 0 username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4 enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7a1f783eddf27d254ca

vlan database

vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active

spanning-tree MST configuration

interface ethernet 1/1

switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged

19-4

YSTEM

TATUS

OMMANDS interface vlan 1

ip address dhcp

no map IP precedence no map IP DSCP

line console

line VTY

end

Console#

Related Commands

show running-config (19-5)

show running-config

This command displays the configuration information currently in use.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• Use this command in conjunction with the show startup-config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non-volatile memory.

• This command displays settings for key command modes. Each mode group is separated by “!” symbols, and includes the configuration mode command, and corresponding commands. This command displays the following information:

- MAC address for the switch

- SNTP server settings

- SNMP community strings

- Users (names, access levels, and encrypted passwords)

- VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)

19-5

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

- VLAN configuration settings for each interface

- Multiple spanning tree instances (name and interfaces)

- IP address

- Layer 4 precedence settings

- Spanning tree settings

- Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet

Example

Console#show running-config building running-config, please wait.....

!<stackingDB>00</stackingDB>

!<stackingMac>01_00-12-cf-21-dc-e0_01</stackingMac>

phymap 00-12-cf-21-dc-e0

SNTP server 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

snmp-server community private rw snmp-server community public ro

vlan database

vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active

spanning-tree MST-configuration

interface ethernet 1/1

switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged

interface vlan 1

IP address DHCP

no map IP precedence no map IP DSCP

line console line vty

end

Console#

19-6

YSTEM

TATUS

OMMANDS

Related Commands

show startup-config (19-3)

show system

This command displays system information.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• For a description of the items shown by this command, refer to

“Displaying System Information” on page 4-1.

• The POST results should all display “PASS.” If any POST test indicates “FAIL,” contact your distributor for assistance.

19-7

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Example

Console#show system

System Description : 24 port 100FX FTTH Metro Access Switch with 2

Combo ports and 2 module slots

System OID String : 1.3.6.1.4.1.202.20.64

System information

System Up time: 0 days, 1 hours, 23 minutes, and 44.61 seconds

System Name : [NONE]

System Location : [NONE]

System Contact : [NONE]

MAC Address (Unit1): 00-20-1A-DF-9C-A0

MAC Address (Unit2): 00-20-1A-DF-9E-C0

Web Server: Enabled

Web Server Port: 80

Web Secure Server: Enabled

Web Secure Server Port: 443

Telnet Server: Enable

Telnet Server Port: 23

Jumbo Frame: Disabled

Power Module A Status : UP

Power Module B Status : Not present

Power Module A Type :

Power Module B Type : [None]

Fan(1) : OK

Fan(2) : OK

Fan(3) : OK

POST Result:

DUMMY Test 1 ................. PASS

UART Loopback Test ........... PASS

DRAM Test .................... PASS

Timer Test ................... PASS

PCI Device 1 Test ............ PASS

I2C Bus Initialization ....... PASS

Switch Int Loopback Test ..... PASS

Fan Speed Test ............... PASS

Done All Pass.

Console#

show users

Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user name, idle time, and IP address of Telnet client.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

19-8

YSTEM

TATUS

OMMANDS

Command Usage

The session used to execute this command is indicated by a “*” symbol next to the Line (i.e., session) index number.

Example

Console#show users

Username accounts:

Username Privilege Public-Key

-------- --------- ----------

admin 15 None

guest 0 None

steve 15 RSA

Online users:

Line Username Idle time (h:m:s) Remote IP addr.

----------- -------- ----------------- ---------------

0 console admin 0:14:14

* 1 VTY 0 admin 0:00:00 192.168.1.19

2 SSH 1 steve 0:00:06 192.168.1.19

Web online users:

Line Remote IP addr Username Idle time (h:m:s).

----------- -------------- -------- ------------------

1 HTTP 192.168.1.19 admin 0:00:00

Console#

show version

This command displays hardware and software version information for the system.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

See “Displaying Switch Hardware/Software Versions” on page 4-8 for

detailed information on the items displayed by this command.

19-9

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Example

Console#show version

Unit1

Serial Number: 0000E8900000

Hardware Version: R01

EPLD Version: 0.01

Number of Ports: 29

Agent (Master)

Unit ID: 1

Loader Version: 1.0.0.1

Boot ROM Version: 1.0.0.7

Operation Code Version: 1.0.1.5

Console#

System Mode Commands

This section describes command used to configure the switch to operate in normal mode or QinQ mode.

Table 19-4 System Mode Commands

Command system mode

Function

Configures the switch to operate in normal mode or QinQ mode show system mode Displays the switch system mode

Mode Page

19-10

19-11

system mode

This command sets the switch to operate in QinQ mode. Use the no form to restore the default setting of normal operating mode.

Syntax system mode qinq no system mode qinq – Sets the switch to QinQ mode, and allows the dot1q tunnel port to be configured. For an explanation of QinQ, see

“Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling” on page 30-24.

19-10

YSTEM

ODE

OMMANDS

Default Setting

No system mode is set; the switch functions in normal operating mode.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

Make sure that no dot1q-tunnel port is configured before exiting QinQ

mode (see “switchport mode dot1q-tunnel” on page 30-25). If there are

any dot1q-tunnel ports set on the switch, the no system mode command will fail.

Example

Console(config)#system mode qinq

Console(config)#

Related Commands

show system mode (19-11)

show system mode

This command displays the switch system mode.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

The system mode displays as QinQ or Normal mode.

Example

Console(config)#system mode qinq

Console(config)#end

Console#show system mode

System mode is QinQ mode

Console#

Related Commands

system mode (19-10)

19-11

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

System MTU Commands

This section describes commands used to configure the Ethernet frame size on the switch.

Table 19-5 Frame Size Commands

Command jumbo frame

Function

Enables support for jumbo frames system mtu Sets the maximum transfer unit show system mtu Shows the maximum transfer unit size for

Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ports

Mode Page

19-12

19-13

19-14

jumbo frame

This command enables support for extended frame sizes on Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ports. Use the no form to disable it.

Syntax

[ no ] jumbo frame

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• This switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data transfers by supporting jumbo frames on Gigabit Ethernet ports of up to 9216 bytes. Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1.5 KB, using jumbo frames for local Gigabit Ethernet connections significantly reduces the per-packet overhead required to process protocol encapsulation fields.

19-12

YSTEM

MTU C

OMMANDS

• To use jumbo frames, both the source and destination end nodes

(such as a computer or server) must support this feature. Also, when the connection is operating at full duplex, all switches in the network between the two end nodes must be able to accept the extended frame size. And for half-duplex connections, all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo frames.

• After setting the jumbo frame size with the system mtu or system mtu jumbo

command (page 19-13), remember to use the

jumbo frame command to implement the new setting by enabling jumbo frames.

• The current setting for jumbo frames can be displayed with the

show system command (page 19-7).

Example

Console(config)#jumbo frame

Console(config)#

Related Commands

show system mtu (19-14)

system mtu

This command sets the maximum transfer unit for traffic crossing the switch. Use the no form to restore the default settings.

Syntax system mtu { FE-size | jumbo GE-size } no system mtu

• FE-size - Specifies the MTU size for Fast Ethernet ports.

(Range: 1500-1546 bytes)

• GE-size - Specifies the jumbo frame size (MTU) for Gigabit Ethernet ports. (Range: 1500-9216 bytes)

Default Setting

1522 bytes

Command Mode

Global Configuration

19-13

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Command Usage

• Gigabit Ethernet ports are not affected by the system mtu FE-size command. Fast Ethernet ports are not affected by the system mtu jumbo command.

• After setting the jumbo frame size with the system mtu or system mtu jumbo command, remember to use the jumbo frame command

(page 19-12) to implement the new setting by enabling jumbo frames.

Example

Console(config)#system mtu 1528

Console(config)#

Related Commands

jumbo frame (19-12)

show system mtu (19-14)

show system mtu

This command shows the maximum transfer unit size for Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ports.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console#show system mtu

System MTU size is 1500 bytes

System Jumbo MTU size is 1500 bytes

Console#

File Management Commands

Managing Firmware

Firmware can be uploaded and downloaded to or from a TFTP server. By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server, that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation. The switch can also be set to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version.

19-14

ILE

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

When downloading runtime code, the destination file name can be specified to replace the current image, or the file can be first downloaded using a different name from the current runtime code file, and then the new file set as the startup file.

Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings

Configuration settings can be uploaded and downloaded to and from a

TFTP server. The configuration file can be later downloaded to restore switch settings.

The configuration file can be downloaded under a new file name and then set as the startup file, or the current startup configuration file can be specified as the destination file to directly replace it. Note that the file

“Factory_Default_Config.cfg” can be copied to the TFTP server, but cannot be used as the destination on the switch.

Command copy delete dir whichboot boot system

Table 19-6 Flash/File Commands

Function

Copies a code image or a switch configuration to or from flash memory or a TFTP server

Deletes a file or code image

Displays a list of files in flash memory

Displays the files booted

Specifies the file or image used to start up the system

Mode Page

19-15

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

copy

This command moves (upload/download) a code image or configuration file between the switch’s flash memory and a TFTP server. When you save the system code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server, that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore system operation. The success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the quality of the network connection.

Syntax copy file { file | running-config | startup-config | tftp } copy running-config { file | startup-config | tftp } copy startup-config { file | running-config | tftp } copy tftp { file | running-config | startup-config | https-certificate | public-key }

• file - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a file.

• running-config - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from the current running configuration.

• startup-config - The configuration used for system initialization.

• tftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a TFTP server.

• https-certificate - Keyword that allows you to copy the HTTPS secure site certificate.

• public-key - Keyword that allows you to copy a SSH key from a

TFTP server. (See “Secure Shell Commands” on page 21-21.)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command.

• The destination file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters

19-16

ILE

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS or 31 characters for files on the switch. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9,

“.”, “-”, “_”)

• Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the switch supports only two operation code files.

• The maximum number of user-defined configuration files depends on available memory.

• You can use “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” as the source to copy from the factory default configuration file, but you cannot use it as the destination.

• To replace the startup configuration, you must use startup-config as the destination.

• The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the TFTP server. You must follow the instructions in the release notes for new firmware, or contact your distributor for help.

• For information on specifying an https-certificate, see “Replacing the

Default Secure-site Certificate” on page 6-9. For information on

configuring the switch to use HTTPS for a secure connection, see “ip http secure-server” on page 21-17.

Example

The following example shows how to download new firmware from a

TFTP server:

Console#copy tftp file

TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.19

Choose file type:

1. config: 2. opcode: <1-2>: 2

Source file name: V1.0.0.6.BIX

Destination file name: V1006

\Write to FLASH Programming.

-Write to FLASH finish.

Success.

Console#

19-17

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on the TFTP server:

Console#copy file tftp

Choose file type:

1. config: 2. opcode: <1-2>: 1

Source file name: startup

TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.99

Destination file name: startup.01

TFTP completed.

Success.

Console#

The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file.

Console#copy running-config file destination file name: startup

Write to FLASH Programming.

\Write to FLASH finish.

Success.

Console#

The following example shows how to download a configuration file:

Console#copy tftp startup-config

TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.99

Source configuration file name: startup.01

Startup configuration file name [startup]:

Write to FLASH Programming.

\Write to FLASH finish.

Success.

Console#

This example shows how to copy a secure-site certificate from an TFTP server. It then reboots the switch to activate the certificate:

Console#copy tftp https-certificate

TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.19

Source certificate file name: SS-certificate

Source private file name: SS-private

Private password: ********

Success.

Console#reload

System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y

19-18

ILE

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

This example shows how to copy a public-key used by SSH from an TFTP server. Note that public key authentication via SSH is only supported for users configured locally on the switch.

Console#copy tftp public-key

TFTP server IP address: 192.168.1.19

Choose public key type:

1. RSA: 2. DSA: <1-2>: 1

Source file name: steve.pub

Username: steve

TFTP Download

Success.

Write to FLASH Programming.

Success.

Console#

delete

This command deletes a file or image.

Syntax delete filename filename - Name of configuration file or code image.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• If the file type is used for system startup, then this file cannot be deleted.

• “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” cannot be deleted.

Example

This example shows how to delete the test2.cfg configuration file from flash memory.

Console#delete test2.cfg

Console#

19-19

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Related Commands

dir (19-20)

delete public-key (21-28)

dir

This command displays a list of files in flash memory.

Syntax dir {{ boot-rom: | config: | opcode: } [ filename ]}

The type of file or image to display includes:

• boot-rom - Boot ROM (or diagnostic) image file.

• config - Switch configuration file.

• opcode - Run-time operation code image file.

• filename - Name of configuration file or code image. If this file exists but contains errors, information on this file cannot be shown.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• If you enter the command dir without any parameters, the system displays all files.

• File information is shown below:

Table 19-7 File Directory Information

Column Heading Description file name The name of the file.

file type File types: Boot-Rom, Operation Code, and Config file.

startup size

Shows if this file is used when the system is started.

The length of the file in bytes.

19-20

ILE

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Example

The following example shows how to display all file information:

Console#dir

File name File type Startup Size (byte)

------------------------------------- -------------- ------- -----------

Unit1:

D1.0.0.7 Boot-Rom Image Y 1159752

V1.0.1.5 Operation Code Y 3545724

Factory_Default_Config.cfg Config File N 455

startup1.cfg Config File Y 3336

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total free space: 10092544

Console#

whichboot

This command displays which files were booted when the system powered up.

Syntax whichboot

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command. See the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by this command.

Console#whichboot

File name File type Startup Size (byte)

----------------------------------------- -------------- ------- -----------

Unit1:

D1.0.0.7 Boot-Rom Image Y 1159752

V1.0.1.5 Operation Code Y 3545724

startup1.cfg Config File Y 3336

Console#

19-21

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

boot system

This command specifies the file or image used to start up the system.

Syntax boot system { boot-rom | config | opcode }: filename

The type of file or image to set as a default includes:

• boot-rom * - Boot ROM.

• config * - Configuration file.

• opcode * - Run-time operation code.

• filename - Name of configuration file or code image.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

If the file contains an error, it cannot be set as the default file.

Example

Console(config)#boot system config: startup

Console(config)#

Related Commands

dir (19-20)

whichboot (19-21)

19-22

INE

OMMANDS

Line Commands

You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the server’s serial port. These commands are used to set communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet (i.e., a virtual terminal).

Table 19-8 Line Commands

Command line login password

Function

Identifies a specific line for configuration and starts the line configuration mode

Enables password checking at login

Specifies a password on a line timeout login response exec-timeout

Sets the interval that the system waits for a login attempt

Sets the interval that the command interpreter waits until user input is detected password-thresh Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the number of failed logon attempts silent-time databits parity

speed

stopbits

disconnect show line

* Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password-thresh command

Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by hardware

Defines the generation of a parity bit

Sets the terminal baud rate

Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte

Terminates a line connection

Displays a terminal line's parameters

Mode Page

NE,

* These commands only apply to the serial port.

19-23

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

line

This command identifies a specific line for configuration, and to process subsequent line configuration commands.

Syntax line { console | vty }

• console - Console terminal line.

• vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).

Default Setting

There is no default line.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as

“VTY” in screen displays such as show users . However, the serial communication parameters (e.g., databits) do not affect Telnet connections.

Example

To enter console line mode, enter the following command:

Console(config)#line console

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

show line (19-34)

show users (19-8)

19-24

INE

OMMANDS

login

This command enables password checking at login. Use the no form to disable password checking and allow connections without a password.

Syntax login [ local ] no login local - Selects local password checking. Authentication is based on the user name specified with the username command.

Default Setting login local

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

• There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login:

login selects authentication by a single global password as specified by the password line configuration command. When using this method, the management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) mode.

login local selects authentication via the user name and password specified by the username command (i.e., default setting). When using this method, the management interface starts in Normal Exec

(NE) or Privileged Exec (PE) mode, depending on the user’s privilege level (0 or 15 respectively).

no login selects no authentication. When using this method, the management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) mode.

• This command controls login authentication via the switch itself. To configure user names and passwords for remote authentication servers, you must use the RADIUS or TACACS software installed on those servers.

19-25

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Example

Console(config-line)#login local

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

username (21-2)

password (19-26)

password

This command specifies the password for a line. Use the no form to remove the password.

Syntax password { 0 | 7 } password no password

• { 0 | 7 } - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password

• password - Character string that specifies the line password.

(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)

Default Setting

No password is specified.

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

• When a connection is started on a line with password protection, the system prompts for the password. If you enter the correct password, the system shows a prompt. You can use the password-thresh command to set the number of times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system terminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state.

• The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the

19-26

INE

OMMANDS configuration file from a TFTP server. There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.

Example

Console(config-line)#password 0 secret

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

password-thresh (19-29)

timeout login response

This command sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax timeout login response [ seconds ] no timeout login response seconds - Integer that specifies the timeout interval.

(Range: 0 - 300 seconds; 0: disabled)

Default Setting

CLI: Disabled (0 seconds)

Telnet: 300 seconds

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

• If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the connection is terminated for the session.

• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.

• The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled.

• Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting.

19-27

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Example

To set the timeout to two minutes, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#timeout login response 120

Console(config-line)#

exec-timeout

This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax exec-timeout [ seconds ] no exec-timeout seconds - Integer that specifies the timeout interval.

(Range: 0 - 65535 seconds; 0: no timeout)

Default Setting

CLI: No timeout

Telnet: 10 minutes

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

• If user input is detected within the timeout interval, the session is kept open; otherwise the session is terminated.

• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.

• The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled.

• Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting.

Example

To set the timeout to two minutes, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 120

Console(config-line)#

19-28

INE

OMMANDS

password-thresh

This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts. Use the no form to remove the threshold value.

Syntax password-thresh [ threshold ] no password-thresh threshold - The number of allowed password attempts.

(Range: 1-120; 0: no threshold)

Default Setting

The default value is three attempts.

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt. (Use the silent-time command to set this interval.)

When this threshold is reached for Telnet, the Telnet logon interface shuts down.

Example

To set the password threshold to five attempts, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#password-thresh 5

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

silent-time (19-30)

19-29

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

silent-time

This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password-thresh command. Use the no form to remove the silent time value.

Syntax silent-time [ seconds ] no silent-time seconds - The number of seconds to disable console response.

(Range: 0-65535; 0: no silent-time)

Default Setting

The default value is no silent-time.

Command Mode

Line Configuration (console only)

Example

To set the silent time to 60 seconds, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#silent-time 60

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

password-thresh (19-29)

databits

This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port. Use the no form to restore the default value.

Syntax databits { 7 | 8 } no databits

• 7 - Seven data bits per character.

• 8 - Eight data bits per character.

19-30

INE

OMMANDS

Default Setting

8 data bits per character

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from devices that generate 7 data bits with parity. If parity is being generated, specify 7 data bits per character. If no parity is required, specify 8 data bits per character.

Example

To specify 7 data bits, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#databits 7

Console(config-line)#

Related Commands

parity (19-31)

parity

This command defines the generation of a parity bit. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax parity { none | even | odd } no parity

• none - No parity

• even - Even parity

• odd - Odd parity

Default Setting

No parity

Command Mode

Line Configuration

19-31

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Command Usage

Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems often require a specific parity bit setting.

Example

To specify no parity, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#parity none

Console(config-line)#

speed

This command sets the terminal line’s baud rate. This command sets both the transmit (to terminal) and receive (from terminal) speeds. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax speed bps no speed bps - Baud rate in bits per second.

(Options: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps, or auto)

Default Setting auto

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Command Usage

Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port. Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be supported. The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported. If you select the “auto” option, the switch will automatically detect the baud rate configured on the attached terminal, and adjust the speed accordingly.

19-32

INE

OMMANDS

Example

To specify 57600 bps, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#speed 57600

Console(config-line)#

stopbits

This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax stopbits { 1 | 2 }

• 1 - One stop bit

• 2 - Two stop bits

Default Setting

1 stop bit

Command Mode

Line Configuration

Example

To specify 2 stop bits, enter this command:

Console(config-line)#stopbits 2

Console(config-line)#

disconnect

This command terminates an SSH, Telnet, or console connection.

Syntax disconnect session-id session-id – The session identifier for an SSH, Telnet or console connection. (Range: 0-4)

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

19-33

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Command Usage

Specifying session identifier “0” will disconnect the console connection. Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or Telnet connection.

Example

Console#disconnect 1

Console#

Related Commands

show ssh (21-31)

show users (19-8)

show line

This command displays the terminal line’s parameters.

Syntax show line [ console | vty ]

• console - Console terminal line.

• vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).

Default Setting

Shows all lines

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

19-34

Example

To show all lines, enter this command:

Console#show line

Console configuration:

Password threshold: 3 times

Interactive timeout: Disabled

Silent time: Disabled

Baudrate: auto

Databits: 8

Parity: none

Stopbits: 1

VTY configuration:

Password threshold: 3 times

Interactive timeout: 600 sec

Console#

INE

OMMANDS

19-35

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Event Logging Commands

This section describes commands used to configure event logging on the switch.

Command logging on logging history logging host logging facility logging trap clear log show logging show log

Table 19-9 Event Logging Commands

Function

Controls logging of error messages

Limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity

Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging messages

Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages

Limits syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity

Clears messages from the logging buffer

Displays the state of logging

Displays log messages

Mode Page

logging on

This command controls logging of error messages, sending debug or error messages to a logging process. The no form disables the logging process.

Syntax

[ no ] logging on

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory or sent to remote syslog servers. You can use the logging history

19-36

VENT

OGGING

OMMANDS command to control the type of error messages that are stored in memory. You can use the logging trap command to control the type of error messages that are sent to specified syslog servers.

Example

Console(config)#logging on

Console(config)#

Related Commands

logging history (19-37)

logging trap (19-40)

clear log (19-41)

logging history

This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity. The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level.

Syntax logging history { flash | ram } level no logging history { flash | ram }

• flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).

• ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on power reset).

• level - One of the levels listed below. Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7)

Table 19-10 Logging Levels

Level Severity Name Description

7 debugging Debugging messages informational notifications

Informational messages only

Normal but significant condition, such as cold start

* There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release.

19-37

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Table 19-10 Logging Levels (Continued)

Level Severity Name Description

4 warnings Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)

3 errors

2 critical

Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)

Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory error - resource exhausted)

0 alerts emergencies

Immediate action needed

System unusable

* There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release.

Default Setting

Flash: errors (level 3 - 0)

RAM: warnings (level 7 - 0)

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority

(i.e., numerically lower) than that specified for RAM.

Example

Console(config)#logging history ram 0

Console(config)#

logging host

This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging messages. Use the no form to remove a syslog server host.

Syntax

[ no ] logging host host_ip_address host_ip_address - The IP address of a syslog server.

Default Setting

None

19-38

VENT

OGGING

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

Use this command more than once to build up a list of host IP addresses.

The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five.

Example

Console(config)#logging host 10.1.0.3

Console(config)#

logging facility

This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages.

Use the no form to return the type to the default.

Syntax

[ no ] logging facility type type - A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service. (Range: 16-23)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages.

(See RFC 3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch. However, it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding database.

Example

Console(config)#logging facility 19

Console(config)#

19-39

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

logging trap

This command enables the logging of system messages to a remote server, or limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity.

Use this command without a specified level to enable remote logging. Use the no form to disable remote logging.

Syntax logging trap [ level ] no logging trap level - One of the syslog severity levels listed in the table on

page 19-37. Messages sent include the selected level up through

level 0.

Default Setting

Disabled

Level 7 - 0

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• Using this command with a specified level enables remote logging and sets the minimum severity level to be saved.

• Using this command without a specified level also enables remote logging, but restores the minimum severity level to the default.

Example

Console(config)#logging trap 4

Console(config)#

19-40

VENT

OGGING

OMMANDS

clear log

This command clears messages from the log buffer.

Syntax clear log [ flash | ram ]

• flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).

• ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on power reset).

Default Setting

Flash and RAM

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#clear log

Console#

Related Commands

show log (19-44)

19-41

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

show logging

This command displays the configuration settings for logging messages to local switch memory, to an SMTP event handler, or to a remote syslog server.

Syntax show logging { flash | ram | sendmail | trap }

• flash - Displays settings for storing event messages in flash memory

(i.e., permanent memory).

• ram - Displays settings for storing event messages in temporary

RAM (i.e., memory flushed on power reset).

• sendmail - Displays settings for the SMTP event handler

(page 19-49).

• trap - Displays settings for the trap function.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

19-42

VENT

OGGING

OMMANDS

Example

The following example shows that system logging is enabled, the message level for flash memory is “errors” (i.e., default level 3 - 0), and the message level for RAM is “debugging” (i.e., default level 7 - 0).

Console#show logging flash

Syslog logging: Enabled

History logging in FLASH: level errors

Console#show logging ram

Syslog logging: Enabled

History logging in RAM: level debugging

Console#

Table 19-11 show logging flash/ram - display description

Field

Syslog logging

History logging in

FLASH

History logging in

RAM

Description

Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command.

The message level(s) reported based on the logging history command.

The following example displays settings for the trap function.

Console#show logging trap

Syslog logging: Enable

REMOTELOG status: disable

REMOTELOG facility type: local use 7

REMOTELOG level type: Debugging messages

REMOTELOG server IP address: 1.2.3.4

REMOTELOG server IP address: 0.0.0.0

Console#

Table 19-12 show logging trap - display description

Field

Syslog logging

REMOTELOG status

REMOTELOG facility type

Description

Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command.

Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging trap command.

The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as specified in the logging facility command.

19-43

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Table 19-12 show logging trap - display description (Continued)

Field

REMOTELOG level type

REMOTELOG server IP address

Description

The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote server as specified in the logging trap command.

The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging host command.

Related Commands

show logging sendmail (19-49)

show log

This command displays the log messages stored in local memory.

Syntax show log { flash | ram }

• flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).

• ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on power reset).

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

The following example shows the event message stored in RAM.

Console#show log ram

[1] 00:01:30 2001-01-01

"VLAN 1 link-up notification."

level: 6, module: 5, function: 1, and event no.: 1

[0] 00:01:30 2001-01-01

"Unit 1, Port 1 link-up notification."

level: 6, module: 5, function: 1, and event no.: 1

Console#

19-44

SMTP A

LERT

OMMANDS

SMTP Alert Commands

These commands configure SMTP event handling, and forwarding of alert messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients.

Table 19-13 SMTP Alert Commands

Command Function logging sendmail host SMTP servers to receive alert messages logging sendmail level logging sendmail source-email logging sendmail destination-email

Severity threshold used to trigger alert messages

Email address used for “From” field of alert messages

Email recipients of alert messages logging sendmail show logging sendmail

Enables SMTP event handling

Displays SMTP event handler settings

Mode Page

NE,

logging sendmail host

This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages.

Use the no form to remove an SMTP server.

Syntax

[ no ] logging sendmail host ip_address ip_address - IP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert messages for event handling.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing.

However, you must enter a separate command to specify each server.

19-45

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

• To send email alerts, the switch first opens a connection, sends all the email alerts waiting in the queue one by one, and finally closes the connection.

• To open a connection, the switch first selects the server that successfully sent mail during the last connection, or the first server configured by this command. If it fails to send mail, the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to send mail again. If it still fails, the system will repeat the process at a periodic interval. (A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a connection.)

Example

Console(config)#logging sendmail host 192.168.1.19

Console(config)#

logging sendmail level

This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages.

Syntax logging sendmail level level level

- One of the system message levels (page 19-37). Messages sent

include the selected level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7; Default: 7)

Default Setting

Level 7

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The specified level indicates an event threshold. All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients. (For example, using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0.)

Example

This example sends email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0.

Console(config)#logging sendmail level 3

Console(config)#

19-46

SMTP A

LERT

OMMANDS

logging sendmail source-email

This command sets the email address used for the “From” field in alert messages.

Syntax logging sendmail source-email email-address email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.

(Range: 1-41 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

You may use an symbolic email address that identifies the switch, or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch.

Example

Console(config)#logging sendmail source-email [email protected]

Console(config)#

logging sendmail destination-email

This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages. Use the no form to remove a recipient.

Syntax

[ no ] logging sendmail destination-email email-address email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.

(Range: 1-41 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

19-47

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Command Usage

You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages. However, you must enter a separate command to specify each recipient.

Example

Console(config)#logging sendmail destination-email [email protected]

Console(config)#

logging sendmail

This command enables SMTP event handling. Use the no form to disable this function.

Syntax

[ no ] logging sendmail

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#logging sendmail

Console(config)#

19-48

SMTP A

LERT

OMMANDS

show logging sendmail

This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show logging sendmail

SMTP servers

-----------------------------------------------

192.168.1.19

SMTP minimum severity level: 7

SMTP destination email addresses

----------------------------------------------ted@this-company.com

SMTP source email address: [email protected]

SMTP status: Enabled

Console#

19-49

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Time Commands

The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time servers (NTP or SNTP). Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries. If the clock is not set, the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup.

Command sntp client sntp server sntp poll show sntp clock timezone calendar set show calendar

Table 19-14 Time Commands

Function

Accepts time from specified time servers

Specifies one or more time servers

Sets the interval at which the client polls for time

Mode Page

Shows current SNTP configuration settings NE,

Sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock

Sets the system date and time

Displays the current date and time setting

NE,

sntp client

This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command. Use the no form to disable SNTP client requests.

Syntax

[ no ] sntp client

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

19-50

IME

OMMANDS

Command Usage

• The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times for log events. Without SNTP, the switch only records the time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup (i.e.,

00:00:00, Jan. 1, 2001).

• This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the sntp servers command. It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command.

Example

Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19

Console(config)#sntp poll 60

Console(config)#sntp client

Console(config)#end

Console#show sntp

Current time: Dec 23 02:52:44 2002

Poll interval: 60

Current mode: unicast

SNTP status : Enabled

SNTP server 137.92.140.80 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

Current server: 137.92.140.80

Console#

Related Commands

sntp server (19-51)

sntp poll (19-52)

show sntp (19-53)

sntp server

This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are issued. Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the current list.

Syntax sntp server [ ip1 [ ip2 [ ip3 ]]] ip - IP address of an time server (NTP or SNTP).

(Range: 1 - 3 addresses)

Default Setting

None

19-51

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time updates when set to SNTP client mode. The client will poll the time servers in the order specified until a response is received. It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command.

Example

Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19

Console#

Related Commands

sntp client (19-50)

sntp poll (19-52)

show sntp (19-53)

sntp poll

This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is set to SNTP client mode. Use the no form to restore to the default.

Syntax sntp poll seconds no sntp poll seconds - Interval between time requests. (Range: 16-16384 seconds)

Default Setting

16 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#sntp poll 60

Console#

19-52

IME

OMMANDS

Related Commands

sntp client (19-50)

show sntp

This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the

SNTP client, and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

This command displays the current time, the poll interval used for sending time synchronization requests, and the current SNTP mode

(i.e., unicast).

Example

Console#show sntp

Current time: Dec 23 05:13:28 2002

Poll interval: 16

Current mode: unicast

SNTP status : Enabled

SNTP server 137.92.140.80 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

Current server: 137.92.140.80

Console#

19-53

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

clock timezone

This command sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock.

Syntax clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes

{ before-utc | after-utc }

• name - Name of timezone, usually an acronym. (Range: 1-29 characters)

• hours - Number of hours before/after UTC. (Range: 0-13 hours)

• minutes - Number of minutes before/after UTC. (Range: 0-59 minutes)

• before-utc - Sets the local time zone before (east) of UTC.

• after-utc - Sets the local time zone after (west) of UTC.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated

Universal Time (UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT), based on the earth’s prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to your local time, you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east (before) or west (after) of

UTC.

Example

Console(config)#clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after-UTC

Console(config)#

Related Commands

show sntp (19-53)

19-54

IME

OMMANDS

calendar set

This command sets the system clock. It may be used if there is no time server on your network, or if you have not configured the switch to receive signals from a time server.

Syntax calendar set hour min sec { day month year | month day year }

• hour - Hour in 24-hour format. (Range: 0 - 23)

• min - Minute. (Range: 0 - 59)

• sec - Second. (Range: 0 - 59)

• day - Day of month. (Range: 1 - 31)

• year - Year (4-digit). (Range: 2001 - 2100)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

This example shows how to set the system clock to 15:12:34, February 1st,

2002.

Console#calendar set 15:12:34 1 February 2002

Console#

show calendar

This command displays the system clock.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

19-55

YSTEM

ANAGEMENT

OMMANDS

Example

Console#show calendar

15:12:34 February 1 2002

Console#

19-56

HAPTER

SNMP C

OMMANDS

Controls access to this switch from management stations using the Simple

Network Management Protocol (SNMP), as well as the error types sent to trap managers.

SNMP Version 3 also provides security features that cover message integrity, authentication, and encryption; as well as controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree. To use SNMPv3, first set an SNMP engine ID (or accept the default), specify read and write access views for the MIB tree, configure SNMP user groups with the required security model (i.e., SNMP v1, v2c or v3) and security level (i.e., authentication and privacy), and then assign SNMP users to these groups, along with their specific authentication and privacy passwords.

Table 20-1 SNMP Commands

Command snmp-server show snmp

Function

Enables the SNMP agent snmp-server community

Displays the status of SNMP communications

Sets up the community access string to permit access to SNMP commands snmp-server contact Sets the system contact string snmp-server location Sets the system location string snmp-server host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification operation snmp-server enable traps snmp-server engine-id

Enables the device to send SNMP traps

(i.e., SNMP notifications)

Sets the SNMP engine ID show snmp engine-id Shows the SNMP engine ID

Mode Page

NE,

20-1

SNMP C

OMMANDS

Table 20-1 SNMP Commands (Continued)

Command snmp-server view show snmp view

Function

Adds an SNMP view

Shows the SNMP views snmp-server group Adds an SNMP group, mapping users to views show snmp group snmp-server user show snmp user

Shows the SNMP groups

Adds a user to an SNMP group

Shows the SNMP users

Mode Page

snmp-server

This command enables the SNMPv3 engine and services for all management clients (i.e., versions 1, 2c, 3). Use the no form to disable the server.

Syntax

[ no ] snmp-server

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server

Console(config)#

show snmp

This command can be used to check the status of SNMP communications.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

20-2

SHOW SNMP

Command Usage

This command provides information on the community access strings, counter information for SNMP input and output protocol data units, and whether or not SNMP logging has been enabled with the snmp-server enable traps command.

Example

Console#show snmp

SNMP Agent: enabled

SNMP traps:

Authentication: enable

Link-up-down: enable

SNMP communities:

1. private, and the privilege is read-write

2. public, and the privilege is read-only

0 SNMP packets input

0 Bad SNMP version errors

0 Unknown community name

0 Illegal operation for community name supplied

0 Encoding errors

0 Number of requested variables

0 Number of altered variables

0 Get-request PDUs

0 Get-next PDUs

0 Set-request PDUs

0 SNMP packets output

0 Too big errors

0 No such name errors

0 Bad values errors

0 General errors

0 Response PDUs

0 Trap PDUs

SNMP logging: disabled

Console#

20-3

SNMP C

OMMANDS

snmp-server community

This command defines the SNMP v1 and v2c community access string.

Use the no form to remove the specified community string.

Syntax snmp-server community string [ ro | rw ] no snmp-server community string

• string - Community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol. (Maximum length: 32 characters, case sensitive; Maximum number of strings: 5)

• ro - Specifies read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects.

• rw - Specifies read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.

Default Setting

• public - Read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects.

• private - Read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server community alpha rw

Console(config)#

20-4

SNMP

SERVER CONTACT

snmp-server contact

This command sets the system contact string. Use the no form to remove the system contact information.

Syntax snmp-server contact string no snmp-server contact string - String that describes the system contact information.

(Maximum length: 255 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server contact Paul

Console(config)#

Related Commands

snmp-server location (20-5)

snmp-server location

This command sets the system location string. Use the no form to remove the location string.

Syntax snmp-server location text no snmp-server location text - String that describes the system location.

(Maximum length: 255 characters)

Default Setting

None

20-5

SNMP C

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server location WC-19

Console(config)#

Related Commands

snmp-server contact (20-5)

snmp-server host

This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management

Protocol notification operation. Use the no form to remove the specified host.

Syntax snmp-server host host-addr [ inform [ retry retries | timeout seconds ]] community-string [ version { 1 | 2c | 3 { auth | noauth | priv }

[ udp-port port ]} no snmp-server host host-addr

• host-addr - Internet address of the host (the targeted recipient).

(Maximum host addresses: 5 trap destination IP address entries)

• inform Notifications are sent as inform messages. Note that this option is only available for version 2c and 3 hosts. (Default: traps are used)

retries - The maximum number of times to resend an inform message if the recipient does not acknowledge receipt. (Range:

0-255; Default: 3)

seconds - The number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment before resending an inform message. (Range: 0-2147483647 centiseconds; Default: 1500 centiseconds)

• community-string - Password-like community string sent with the notification operation to SNMP V1 and V2c hosts. Although you can set this string using the snmp-server host command by itself, we recommend that you define this string using the snmp-server

20-6

SNMP

SERVER HOST community command prior to using the snmp-server host command. (Maximum length: 32 characters)

• version - Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP Version

1, 2c or 3 traps. (Range: 1, 2c, 3; Default: 1)

auth | noauth | priv - This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication, no authentication, or with authentication and

privacy. See “Simple Network Management Protocol” on page 5-1

for further information about these authentication and encryption options.

• port - Host UDP port to use. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 162)

Default Setting

Host Address: None

Notification Type: Traps

SNMP Version: 1

UDP Port: 162

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• If you do not enter an snmp-server host command, no notifications are sent. In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications, you must enter at least one snmp-server host command. In order to enable multiple hosts, you must issue a separate snmp-server host command for each host.

• The snmp-server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server enable traps command. Use the snmp-server enable traps command to enable the sending of traps or informs and to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally. For a host to receive notifications, at least one snmp-server enable traps command and the snmp-server host command for that host must be enabled.

• Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp-server enable traps command. For example, some notification types are always enabled.

20-7

SNMP C

OMMANDS

20-8

• Notifications are issued by the switch as trap messages by default. The recipient of a trap message does not send a response to the switch.

Traps are therefore not as reliable as inform messages, which include a request for acknowledgement of receipt. Informs can be used to ensure that critical information is received by the host. However, note that informs consume more system resources because they must be kept in memory until a response is received. Informs also add to network traffic. You should consider these effects when deciding whether to issue notifications as traps or informs.

To send an inform to a SNMPv2c host, complete these steps:

Enable the SNMP agent (page 20-2).

Allow the switch to send SNMP traps; i.e., notifications

(page 20-9).

Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the snmp-server host command as described in this section.

Create a view with the required notification messages (page 20-13).

Create a group that includes the required notify view (page 20-15).

To send an inform to a SNMPv3 host, complete these steps:

Enable the SNMP agent (page 20-2).

Allow the switch to send SNMP traps; i.e., notifications

(page 20-9).

Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the snmp-server host command as described in this section.

Create a view with the required notification messages (page 20-13).

Create a group that includes the required notify view (page 20-15).

Specify a remote engine ID where the user resides (page 20-10).

Then configure a remote user (page 20-18).

• The switch can send SNMP Version 1, 2c or 3 notifications to a host

IP address, depending on the SNMP version that the management station supports. If the snmp-server host command does not specify the SNMP version, the default is to send SNMP version 1 notifications.

• If you specify an SNMP Version 3 host, then the community string is interpreted as an SNMP user name. If you use the V3 “auth” or “priv” options, the user name must first be defined with the snmp-server

SNMP

SERVER ENABLE TRAPS user command. Otherwise, the authentication password and/or privacy password will not exist, and the switch will not authorize

SNMP access for the host. However, if you specify a V3 host with the

“noauth” option, an SNMP user account will be generated, and the switch will authorize SNMP access for the host.

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.23 batman

Console(config)#

Related Commands

snmp-server enable traps (20-9)

snmp-server enable traps

This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management

Protocol traps or informs (i.e., SNMP notifications). Use the no form to disable SNMP notifications.

Syntax

[ no ] snmp-server enable traps [ authentication | link-up-down ]

• authentication - Keyword to issue authentication failure notifications.

• link-up-down - Keyword to issue link-up or link-down notifications.

Default Setting

Issue authentication and link-up-down traps.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• If you do not enter an snmp-server enable traps command, no notifications controlled by this command are sent. In order to configure this device to send SNMP notifications, you must enter at least one snmp-server enable traps command. If you enter the command with no keywords, both authentication and link-up-down

20-9

SNMP C

OMMANDS notifications are enabled. If you enter the command with a keyword, only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled.

• The snmp-server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server host command. Use the snmp-server host command to specify which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications.

In order to send notifications, you must configure at least one snmp-server host command.

• The authentication, link-up, and link-down traps are legacy notifications, and therefore when used for SNMP Version 3 hosts, they must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding entries in

the Notify View assigned by the snmp-server group command

(page 20-15).

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps link-up-down

Console(config)#

Related Commands

snmp-server host (20-6)

snmp-server engine-id

This command configures an identification string for the SNMPv3 engine.

Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax snmp-server engine-id { local | remote { ip-address }} engineid-string no snmp-server engine-id { local | remote { ip-address }}

• local - Specifies the SNMP engine on this switch.

• remote - Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device.

• ip-address - The Internet address of the remote device.

• engineid-string - String identifying the engine ID.

(Range: 10-64 hexadecimal characters)

Default Setting

A unique engine ID is automatically generated by the switch based on its MAC address.

20-10

SNMP

SERVER ENGINE

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• An SNMP engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides either on this switch or on a remote device. This engine protects against message replay, delay, and redirection. The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets.

• A remote engine ID is required when using SNMPv3 informs. (See

snmp-server host on page 20-6.) The remote engine ID is used to

compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host. SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent. For informs, the authoritative

SNMP agent is the remote agent. You therefore need to configure the remote agent’s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it.

• Trailing zeroes need not be entered to uniquely specify a engine ID. In other words, the value “0123456789” is equivalent to “0123456789” followed by 22 zeroes.

• A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch. This is referred to as the default engine ID. If the local engine

ID is deleted or changed, all SNMP users will be cleared. You will need

to reconfigure all existing users (page 20-18).

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server engine-id local 12345

Console(config)#snmp-server engineID remote 54321 192.168.1.19

Console(config)#

Related Commands

snmp-server host (20-6)

20-11

SNMP C

OMMANDS

show snmp engine-id

This command shows the SNMP engine ID.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

This example shows the default engine ID.

Console#show snmp engine-id

Local SNMP engineID: 8000002a8000000000e8666672

Local SNMP engineBoots: 1

Remote SNMP engineID IP address

80000000030004e2b316c54321 192.168.1.19

Console#

Table 20-2 show snmp engine-id - display description

Field

Local SNMP engineID

Local SNMP engineBoots

Remote SNMP engineID

Description

String identifying the engine ID.

The number of times that the engine has (re-)initialized since the snmp EngineID was last configured.

String identifying an engine ID on a remote device.

IP address IP address of the device containing the corresponding remote SNMP engine.

20-12

SNMP

SERVER VIEW

snmp-server view

This command adds an SNMP view which controls user access to the MIB.

Use the no form to remove an SNMP view.

Syntax snmp-server view view-name oid-tree { included | excluded } no snmp-server view view-name

• view-name - Name of an SNMP view. (Range: 1-64 characters)

• oid-tree - Object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree. Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string. (Refer to the examples.)

• included - Defines an included view.

• excluded - Defines an excluded view.

Default Setting defaultview (includes access to the entire MIB tree)

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• Views are used in the

snmp-server group

command to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree.

• The predefined view “defaultview” includes access to the entire MIB tree.

Examples

This view includes MIB-2.

Console(config)#snmp-server view mib-2 1.3.6.1.2.1 included

Console(config)#

This view includes the MIB-2 interfaces table, ifDescr. The wild card is used to select all the index values in this table.

Console(config)#snmp-server view ifEntry.2 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.*.2 included

Console(config)#

20-13

SNMP C

OMMANDS

This view includes the MIB-2 interfaces table, and the mask selects all index entries.

Console(config)#snmp-server view ifEntry.a 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.* included

Console(config)#

show snmp view

This command shows information on the SNMP views.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show snmp view

View Name: mib-2

Subtree OID: 1.2.2.3.6.2.1

View Type: included

Storage Type: permanent

Row Status: active

View Name: defaultview

Subtree OID: 1

View Type: included

Storage Type: volatile

Row Status: active

Console#

Table 20-3 show snmp view - display description

Field

View Name

Subtree OID

View Type

Storage Type

Row Status

Description

Name of an SNMP view.

A branch in the MIB tree.

Indicates if the view is included or excluded.

The storage type for this entry.

The row status of this entry.

20-14

SNMP

SERVER GROUP

snmp-server group

This command adds an SNMP group, mapping SNMP users to SNMP views. Use the no form to remove an SNMP group.

Syntax snmp-server group groupname { v1 | v2c | v3 { auth | noauth | priv }} [ read readview ] [ write writeview ] [ notify notifyview ] no snmp-server group groupname

• groupname - Name of an SNMP group. (Range: 1-32 characters)

• v1 | v2c | v3 - Use SNMP version 1, 2c or 3.

• auth | noauth | priv - This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication, no authentication, or with authentication and

privacy. See “Simple Network Management Protocol” on page 5-1

for further information about these authentication and encryption options.

• readview - Defines the view for read access. (1-64 characters)

• writeview - Defines the view for write access. (1-64 characters)

• notifyview - Defines the view for notifications. (1-64 characters)

Default Setting

• Default groups: public 23 (read only), private 24 (read/write)

• readview - Every object belonging to the Internet OID space (1.3.6.1).

• writeview - Nothing is defined.

• notifyview - Nothing is defined.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• A group sets the access policy for the assigned users.

• When authentication is selected, the MD5 or SHA algorithm is used

as specified in the snmp-server user command.

23. No view is defined.

24. Maps to the defaultview.

20-15

SNMP C

OMMANDS

• When privacy is selected, the DES 56-bit algorithm is used for data encryption.

• For additional information on the notification messages supported by

this switch, see “Supported Notification Messages” on page 5-19.

Also, note that the authentication, link-up and link-down messages are legacy traps and must therefore be enabled in conjunction with the

snmp-server enable traps command (page 20-9).

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server group r&d v3 auth write daily

Console(config)#

show snmp group

Four default groups are provided – SNMPv1 read-only access and read/ write access, and SNMPv2c read-only access and read/write access.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show snmp group

Group Name: r&d

Security Model: v3

Read View: defaultview

Write View: daily

Notify View: none

Storage Type: permanent

Row Status: active

Group Name: public

Security Model: v1

Read View: defaultview

Write View: none

Notify View: none

Storage Type: volatile

Row Status: active

20-16

SHOW SNMP GROUP

Group Name: public

Security Model: v2c

Read View: defaultview

Write View: none

Notify View: none

Storage Type: volatile

Row Status: active

Group Name: private

Security Model: v1

Read View: defaultview

Write View: defaultview

Notify View: none

Storage Type: volatile

Row Status: active

Group Name: private

Security Model: v2c

Read View: defaultview

Write View: defaultview

Notify View: none

Storage Type: volatile

Row Status: active

Console#

Table 20-4 show snmp group - display description

Field groupname security model readview writeview notifyview storage-type

Row Status

Description

Name of an SNMP group.

The SNMP version.

The associated read view.

The associated write view.

The associated notify view.

The storage type for this entry.

The row status of this entry.

20-17

SNMP C

OMMANDS

snmp-server user

This command adds a user to an SNMP group, restricting the user to a specific SNMP Read, Write, or Notify View. Use the no form to remove a user from an SNMP group.

Syntax snmp-server user username groupname [ remote ip-address ] { v1 | v2c | v3

[ encrypted ] [ auth { md5 | sha } auth-password [ priv des56 priv-password ]] no snmp-server user username { v1 | v2c | v3 | remote }

• username - Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent.

(Range: 1-32 characters)

• groupname - Name of an SNMP group to which the user is assigned.

(Range: 1-32 characters)

• remote - Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device.

• ip-address - The Internet address of the remote device.

• v1 | v2c | v3 - Use SNMP version 1, 2c or 3.

• encrypted - Accepts the password as encrypted input.

• auth - Uses SNMPv3 with authentication.

• md5 | sha - Uses MD5 or SHA authentication.

• auth-password - Authentication password. Enter as plain text if the encrypted option is not used. Otherwise, enter an encrypted password. (A minimum of eight characters is required.)

• priv des56 - Uses SNMPv3 with privacy with DES56 encryption.

• priv-password - Privacy password. Enter as plain text if the encrypted option is not used. Otherwise, enter an encrypted password.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

20-18

SNMP

SERVER USER

Command Usage

• The SNMP engine ID is used to compute the authentication/privacy digests from the password. You should therefore configure the engine

ID with the snmp-server engine-id

command before using this configuration command.

• Before you configure a remote user, use the snmp-server engine-id command (page 20-10) to specify the engine ID for the remote device

where the user resides. Then use the snmp-server user command to specify the user and the IP address for the remote device where the user resides. The remote agent’s SNMP engine ID is used to compute authentication/privacy digests from the user’s password. If the remote engine ID is not first configured, the snmp-server user command specifying a remote user will fail.

• SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent. For informs, the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent. You therefore need to configure the remote agent’s

SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it.

Example

Console(config)#snmp-server user steve group r&d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien

Console(config)#snmp-server user mark group r&d remote 192.168.1.19 v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien

Console(config)#

20-19

SNMP C

OMMANDS

show snmp user

This command shows information on SNMP users.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show snmp user

EngineId: 800000ca030030f1df9ca00000

User Name: steve

Authentication Protocol: md5

Privacy Protocol: des56

Storage Type: nonvolatile

Row Status: active

SNMP remote user

EngineId: 80000000030004e2b316c54321

User Name: mark

Authentication Protocol: mdt

Privacy Protocol: des56

Storage Type: nonvolatile

Row Status: active

Console#

Table 20-5 show snmp user - display description

Field

EngineId

User Name

Authentication

Protocol

Privacy Protocol

Storage Type

Description

String identifying the engine ID.

Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent.

The authentication protocol used with SNMPv3.

The privacy protocol used with SNMPv3.

The storage type for this entry.

Row Status The row status of this entry.

SNMP remote user A user associated with an SNMP engine on a remote device.

20-20

HAPTER

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods.

Port-based authentication using IEEE 802.1X can also be configured to control either management access to the uplink ports or client access 25 to the data ports.

Command Group

User Accounts

Authentication

Sequence

RADIUS Client

Table 21-1 Authentication Commands

Function

Configures the basic user names and passwords for management access

Defines logon authentication method and precedence

Configures settings for authentication via a

RADIUS server

Page

21-2

21-5

21-8

TACACS+ Client Configures settings for authentication via a

TACACS+ server

21-13

Web Server Settings

Enables management access via a web browser 21-15

Telnet Server Settings Enables management access via Telnet

21-20

Secure Shell Settings

Port Authentication

IP Filter

Provides secure replacement for Telnet

Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802.1X

Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access

21-21

21-34

21-45

25. For other methods of controlling client access, see “Client Security Commands” on page

22-1.

21-1

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

User Account Commands

The basic commands required for management access are listed in this section. This switch also includes other options for password checking via

the console or a Telnet connection (page 19-23), user authentication via a

remote authentication server (page 21-1), and host access authentication

for specific ports (page 21-34).

Table 21-2 User Access Commands

Command username

Function

Establishes a user name-based authentication system at login enable password Sets a password to control access to the

Privileged Exec level

Mode Page

21-2

21-4

username

This command adds named users, requires authentication at login, specifies or changes a user's password (or specify that no password is required), or specifies or changes a user's access level. Use the no form to remove a user name.

Syntax username name { access-level level | nopassword | password { 0 | 7 } password } no username name

• name - The name of the user.

(Maximum length: 8 characters, case sensitive. Maximum users: 16)

• access-level level - Specifies the user level.

The device has two predefined privilege levels:

0 : Normal Exec, 15 : Privileged Exec.

• nopassword - No password is required for this user to log in.

• { 0 | 7 } - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.

21-2

SER

CCOUNT

OMMANDS

• password password - The authentication password for the user.

(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)

Default Setting

The default access level is Normal Exec.

The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are: username guest

Table 21-3 Default Login Settings access-level

0 password guest admin 15 admin

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server. There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.

Example

This example shows how the set the access level and password for a user.

Console(config)#username bob access-level 15

Console(config)#username bob password 0 smith

Console(config)#

21-3

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

enable password

After initially logging onto the system, you should set the Privileged Exec password. Remember to record it in a safe place. This command controls access to the Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level. Use the no form to reset the default password.

Syntax enable password [ level level ] { 0 | 7 } password no enable password [ level level ]

• level level - Level 15 for Privileged Exec. (Levels 0-14 are not used.)

• { 0 | 7 } - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.

• password - password for this privilege level. (Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)

Default Setting

The default is level 15.

The default password is “super”

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• You cannot set a null password. You will have to enter a password to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable

command (page 18-2).

• The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server. There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.

Example

Console(config)#enable password level 15 0 admin

Console(config)#

21-4

UTHENTICATION

EQUENCE

Related Commands

enable (18-2)

authentication enable (21-7)

Authentication Sequence

Three authentication methods can be specified to authenticate users logging into the system for management access. The commands in this section can be used to define the authentication method and sequence.

Table 21-4 Authentication Sequence Commands

Command authentication login authentication enable

Function

Defines logon authentication method and precedence

Defines the authentication method and precedence for command mode change

Mode Page

21-5

21-7

authentication login

This command defines the login authentication method and precedence.

Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax authentication login {[ local ] [ radius ] [ tacacs ]} no authentication login

• local - Use local password.

• radius - Use RADIUS server password.

• tacacs - Use TACACS server password.

Default Setting

Local

Command Mode

Global Configuration

21-5

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

Command Usage

• RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport.

Also, note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access-request packet from the client to the server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.

• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair. The user name, password, and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server.

• You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence. For example, if you enter

“ authentication login radius tacacs local ,” the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is attempted on the

TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server is not available, the local user name and password is checked.

Example

Console(config)#authentication login radius

Console(config)#

Related Commands

username - for setting the local user names and passwords (21-2)

21-6

UTHENTICATION

EQUENCE

authentication enable

This command defines the authentication method and precedence to use when changing from Exec command mode to Privileged Exec command mode with the

enable command (see page 18-2). Use the

no form to restore the default.

Syntax authentication enable {[ local ] [ radius ] [ tacacs ]} no authentication enable

• local - Use local password only.

• radius - Use RADIUS server password only.

• tacacs - Use TACACS server password.

Default Setting

Local

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport.

Also, note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access-request packet from the client to the server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.

• You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence. For example, if you enter

“ authentication enable radius tacacs local ,” the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is attempted on the

TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server is not available, the local user name and password is checked.

21-7

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

Example

Console(config)#authentication enable radius

Console(config)#

Related Commands

enable password - sets the password for changing command modes

(21-4)

RADIUS Client

Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch.

Table 21-5 RADIUS Client Commands

Command radius-server host radius-server port radius-server key

Function

Specifies the RADIUS server

Sets the RADIUS server network port GC

Sets the RADIUS encryption key GC radius-server retransmit Sets the number of retries radius-server timeout Sets the interval between sending authentication requests show radius-server Shows the current RADIUS settings

Mode Page

21-8

RADIUS C

LIENT

radius-server host

This command specifies primary and backup RADIUS servers and authentication parameters that apply to each server. Use the no form to restore the default values.

Syntax

[ no ] radius-server index host { host_ip_address | host_alias }

[ auth-port auth_port ] [ timeout timeout ] [ retransmit retransmit ]

[ key key ]

• index - Allows you to specify up to five servers. These servers are queried in sequence until a server responds or the retransmit period expires.

• host_ip_address - IP address of server.

• host_alias - Symbolic name of server. (Maximum length: 20 characters)

• port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535)

• timeout - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request. (Range: 1-65535)

• retransmit - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1-30)

• key - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client.

Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 48 characters)

Default Setting auth-port - 1812 timeout - 5 seconds retransmit - 2

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#radius-server 1 host 192.168.1.20 port 181 timeout

10 retransmit 5 key green

Console(config)#

21-9

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

radius-server port

This command sets the RADIUS server network port. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax radius-server port port_number no radius-server port port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535)

Default Setting

1812

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#radius-server port 181

Console(config)#

radius-server key

This command sets the RADIUS encryption key. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax radius-server key key_string no radius-server key key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 48 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

21-10

RADIUS C

LIENT

Example

Console(config)#radius-server key green

Console(config)#

radius-server retransmit

This command sets the number of retries. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax radius-server retransmit number_of_retries no radius-server retransmit number_of_retries - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1 - 30)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5

Console(config)#

radius-server timeout

This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the RADIUS server. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax radius-server timeout number_of_seconds no radius-server timeout number_of_seconds - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request. (Range: 1-65535)

Default Setting

21-11

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#radius-server timeout 10

Console(config)#

show radius-server

This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show radius-server

Remote RADIUS server configuration:

Global settings:

Communication key with RADIUS server: *****

Server port number: 1812

Retransmit times: 2

Request timeout: 5

Server 1:

Server IP address: 192.168.1.1

Communication key with RADIUS server: *****

Server port number: 1812

Retransmit times: 2

Request timeout: 5

Console#

21-12

TACACS+ C

LIENT

TACACS+ Client

Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (TACACS+) is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch.

Table 21-6 TACACS+ Client Commands

Command tacacs-server host tacacs-server port tacacs-server key show tacacs-server

Function

Specifies the TACACS+ server

Specifies the TACACS+ server network port

Mode Page

Sets the TACACS+ encryption key GC

Shows the current TACACS+ settings GC

21-13

21-14

21-15

tacacs-server host

This command specifies the TACACS+ server. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax tacacs-server host host_ip_address no tacacs-server host host_ip_address - IP address of a TACACS+ server.

Default Setting

10.11.12.13

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#tacacs-server host 192.168.1.25

Console(config)#

21-13

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

tacacs-server port

This command specifies the TACACS+ server network port. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax tacacs-server port port_number no tacacs-server port port_number - TACACS+ server TCP port used for authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#tacacs-server port 181

Console(config)#

tacacs-server key

This command sets the TACACS+ encryption key. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax tacacs-server key key_string no tacacs-server key key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the client. Do not use blank spaces in the string.

(Maximum length: 48 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

21-14

ERVER

OMMANDS

Example

Console(config)#tacacs-server key green

Console(config)#

show tacacs-server

This command displays the current settings for the TACACS+ server.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show tacacs-server

Remote TACACS server configuration:

Server IP address: 10.11.12.13

Communication key with TACACS server: *****

Server port number: 49

Console#

Web Server Commands

This section describes commands used to configure web browser management access to the switch.

Table 21-7 Web Server Commands

Command ip http port ip http server

Function

Specifies the port to be used by the web browser interface

Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from a browser

Mode Page

21-16

ip http secure-server

Enables HTTPS (HTTP/SSL) for encrypted communications

GC ip http secure-port Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS GC

21-17

21-18

21-15

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

ip http port

This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface. Use the no form to use the default port.

Syntax ip http port port-number no ip http port port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface.

(Range: 1-65535)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#ip http port 769

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip http server (21-16)

ip http server

This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser. Use the no form to disable this function.

Syntax

[ no ] ip http server

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

21-16

ERVER

OMMANDS

Example

Console(config)#ip http server

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip http port (21-16)

ip http secure-server

This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTPS) over the Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an encrypted connection) to the switch’s web interface. Use the no form to disable this function.

Syntax

[ no ] ip http secure-server

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch. However, you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same UDP port.

• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser: https :// device [: port_number ]

• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:

- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.

- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection.

- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data.

21-17

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.

A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer

5.x and Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later versions.

• The following web browsers and operating systems currently support

HTTPS:

Table 21-8 HTTPS System Support

Web Browser

Internet Explorer 5.0 or later

Operating System

Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a), Windows 2000, Windows XP

Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a), Windows 2000, Windows XP,

Solaris 2.6

• To specify a secure-site certificate, see “Replacing the Default

Secure-site Certificate” on page 6-9. Also refer to the

copy command

on page 19-16.

Example

Console(config)#ip http secure-server

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip http secure-port (21-18)

copy tftp https-certificate (19-16)

ip http secure-port

This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS connection to the switch’s web interface. Use the no form to restore the default port.

Syntax ip http secure-port port_number no ip http secure-port port_number – The UDP port used for HTTPS.

(Range: 1-65535)

21-18

ERVER

OMMANDS

Default Setting

443

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port.

• If you change the HTTPS port number, clients attempting to connect to the HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL, in this format: https:// device : port_number

Example

Console(config)#ip http secure-port 1000

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip http secure-server (21-17)

21-19

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

Telnet Server Commands

This section describes commands used to configure Telnet management access to the switch.

Command ip telnet server

Table 21-9 Telnet Server Commands

Function

Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from Telnet; also specifies the port to be used by the Telnet interface

Mode Page

21-16

ip telnet server

This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from

Telnet. It also specifies the TCP port number used by the Telnet interface.

Use the no form without the “port” keyword to disable this function. Use the no from with the “port” keyword to use the default port.

Syntax ip telnet server [ port port-number ] no telnet server [ port ]

• port - The TCP port used by the Telnet interface.

• port-number - The TCP port number to be used by the browser interface. (Range: 1-65535)

Default Setting

Server: Enabled

Server Port: 23

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#ip telnet server

Console(config)#ip telnet port 123

Console(config)#

21-20

ECURE

HELL

OMMANDS

Secure Shell Commands

This section describes the commands used to configure the SSH server.

Note that you also need to install a SSH client on the management station when using this protocol to configure the switch.

Note: The switch supports both SSH Version 1.5 and 2.0 clients.

Table 21-10 Secure Shell Commands

Command ip ssh server ip ssh timeout

Function

Enables the SSH server on the switch

Specifies the authentication timeout for the

SSH server ip ssh authentication-retries

Specifies the number of retries allowed by a client ip ssh server-key size Sets the SSH server key size copy tftp public-key Copies the user’s public key from a TFTP server to the switch

Mode Page

PE delete public-key ip ssh crypto host-key generate

Deletes the public key for the specified user PE

Generates the host key ip ssh crypto zeroize Clear the host key from RAM ip ssh save host-key Saves the host key from RAM to flash memory

PE disconnect show ip ssh

Terminates a line connection

Displays the status of the SSH server and the configured values for authentication timeout and retries

PE show ssh show public-key show users

Displays the status of current SSH sessions PE

Shows the public key for the specified user or for the host

Shows SSH users, including privilege level and public key type

21-21

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

21-22

Configuration Guidelines

TACACS+ remote authentication server, as specified by the

authentication login command on page 21-5. If public key

authentication is specified by the client, then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section. Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication, you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch and enable the SSH server.

To use the SSH server, complete these steps:

Generate a Host Key Pair – Use the

ip ssh crypto host-key generate

command to create a host public/private key pair.

An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example:

10.1.0.54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254

15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233

76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206

519417467729848654686157177393901647793559423035774130980227370877945452408397

1752646358058176716709574804776117

Import Client’s Public Key to the Switch – Use the copy tftp public-key command to copy a file containing the public key for all the

SSH client’s granted management access to the switch. (Note that these

clients must be configured locally on the switch with the username command as described on page 21-2.) The clients are subsequently

authenticated using these keys. The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA key:

ECURE

HELL

OMMANDS

1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880

055536161631051775940838686311092912322268285192543746031009371877211996963178

136627741416898513204911720483033925432410163799759237144901193800609025394840

848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671316294325328189150453

06393916643 [email protected]

Set the Optional Parameters – Set other optional parameters, including the authentication timeout, the number of retries, and the server key size.

Enable SSH Service – Use the ip ssh server command to enable the

SSH server on the switch.

Authentication – One of the following authentication methods is employed:

Password Authentication (for SSH v1.5 or V2 Clients) a.

The client sends its password to the server.

The switch compares the client's password to those stored in memory. c.

If a match is found, the connection is allowed.

Note: To use SSH with only password authentication, the host public key must still be given to the client, either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file.

However, you do not need to configure the client’s keys.

Authenticating SSH v1.5 Clients a.

The client sends its RSA public key to the switch. b.

The switch compares the client's public key to those stored in memory.

21-23

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS c.

If a match is found, the switch uses its secret key to generate a random 256-bit string as a challenge, encrypts this string with the user’s public key, and sends it to the client. d.

The client uses its private key to decrypt the challenge string, computes the MD5 checksum, and sends the checksum back to the switch. e.

The switch compares the checksum sent from the client against that computed for the original string it sent. If the two checksums match, this means that the client's private key corresponds to an authorized public key, and the client is authenticated.

Authenticating SSH v2 Clients a.

The client first queries the switch to determine if DSA public key authentication using a preferred algorithm is acceptable. b.

If the specified algorithm is supported by the switch, it notifies the client to proceed with the authentication process. Otherwise, it rejects the request. c.

The client sends a signature generated using the private key to the switch.

When the server receives this message, it checks whether the supplied key is acceptable for authentication, and if so, it then checks whether the signature is correct. If both checks succeed, the client is authenticated.

Note: The SSH server supports up to four client sessions. The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions.

ip ssh server

This command enables the Secure Shell (SSH) server on this switch. Use the no form to disable this service.

Syntax

[ no ] ip ssh server

21-24

ECURE

HELL

OMMANDS

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• The SSH server supports up to four client sessions. The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and

SSH sessions.

• The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch, and then negotiates with the client to select either DES (56-bit) or 3DES (168-bit) for data encryption.

• You must generate DSA and RSA host keys before enabling the SSH server.

Example

Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa

Console#configure

Console(config)#ip ssh server

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip ssh crypto host-key generate (21-28)

show ssh (21-31)

ip ssh timeout

This command configures the timeout for the SSH server. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax ip ssh timeout seconds no ip ssh timeout seconds – The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation.

(Range: 1-120)

21-25

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

Default Setting

10 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the client during the SSH negotiation phase. Once an SSH session has been established, the timeout for user input is controlled by the exec-timeout command for vty sessions.

Example

Console(config)#ip ssh timeout 60

Console(config)#

Related Commands

exec-timeout (19-28)

show ip ssh (21-31)

ip ssh authentication-retries

This command configures the number of times the SSH server attempts to reauthenticate a user. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax ip ssh authentication-retries count no ip ssh authentication-retries count – The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the interface is reset. (Range: 1-5)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

21-26

ECURE

HELL

OMMANDS

Example

Console(config)#ip ssh authentication-retires 2

Console(config)#

Related Commands

show ip ssh (21-31)

ip ssh server-key size

This command sets the SSH server key size. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax ip ssh server-key size key-size no ip ssh server-key size key-size – The size of server key. (Range: 512-896 bits)

Default Setting

768 bits

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch.

The host key is shared with the SSH client, and is fixed at 1024 bits.

Example

Console(config)#ip ssh server-key size 512

Console(config)#

21-27

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

delete public-key

This command deletes the specified user’s public key.

Syntax delete public-key username [ dsa | rsa ]

• username – Name of an SSH user. (Range: 1-8 characters)

• dsa – DSA public key type.

• rsa – RSA public key type.

Default Setting

Deletes both the DSA and RSA key.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#delete public-key admin dsa

Console#

ip ssh crypto host-key generate

This command generates the host key pair (i.e., public and private).

Syntax ip ssh crypto host-key generate [ dsa | rsa ]

• dsa – DSA (Version 2) key type.

• rsa – RSA (Version 1) key type.

Default Setting

Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• The switch uses only RSA Version 1 for SSHv1.5 clients and DSA

Version 2 for SSHv2 clients.

21-28

ECURE

HELL

OMMANDS

• This command stores the host key pair in memory (i.e., RAM). Use the

ip ssh save host-key

command to save the host key pair to flash memory.

• Some SSH client programs automatically add the public key to the known hosts file as part of the configuration process. Otherwise, you must manually create a known hosts file and place the host public key in it.

• The SSH server uses this host key to negotiate a session key and encryption method with the client trying to connect to it.

Example

Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa

Console#

Related Commands

ip ssh crypto zeroize (21-29)

ip ssh save host-key (21-30)

ip ssh crypto zeroize

This command clears the host key from memory (i.e. RAM).

Syntax ip ssh crypto zeroize [ dsa | rsa ]

• dsa – DSA key type.

• rsa – RSA key type.

Default Setting

Clears both the DSA and RSA key.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• This command clears the host key from volatile memory (RAM). Use the no

ip ssh save host-key command to clear the host key from flash

memory.

21-29

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

• The SSH server must be disabled before you can execute this command.

Example

Console#ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa

Console#

Related Commands

ip ssh crypto host-key generate (21-28)

ip ssh save host-key (21-30)

no ip ssh server (21-24)

ip ssh save host-key

This command saves the host key from RAM to flash memory.

Syntax ip ssh save host-key [ dsa | rsa ]

• dsa – DSA key type.

• rsa – RSA key type.

Default Setting

Saves both the DSA and RSA key.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#ip ssh save host-key dsa

Console#

Related Commands

ip ssh crypto host-key generate (21-28)

21-30

ECURE

HELL

OMMANDS

show ip ssh

This command displays the connection settings used when authenticating client access to the SSH server.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show ip ssh

SSH Enabled - version 2.0

Negotiation timeout: 120 secs; Authentication retries: 3

Server key size: 768 bits

Console#

show ssh

This command displays the current SSH server connections.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show ssh

Connection Version State Username Encryption

0 2.0 Session-Started admin ctos aes128-cbc-hmac-md5

stoc aes128-cbc-hmac-md5

Console#

Field

Session

Version

State

Table 21-11 show ssh - display description

Description

The session number. (Range: 0-3)

The Secure Shell version number.

The authentication negotiation state.

(Values: Negotiation-Started, Authentication-Started,

Session-Started)

21-31

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

Table 21-11 show ssh - display description (Continued)

Field

Username

Description

The user name of the client.

Encryption The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the client and server.

Options for SSHv1.5 include: DES, 3DES

Options for SSHv2.0 can include different algorithms for the client-to-server (ctos) and server-to-client (stoc): aes128-cbc-hmac-sha1 aes192-cbc-hmac-sha1 aes256-cbc-hmac-sha1

3des-cbc-hmac-sha1 blowfish-cbc-hmac-sha1 aes128-cbc-hmac-md5 aes192-cbc-hmac-md5 aes256-cbc-hmac-md5

3des-cbc-hmac-md5 blowfish-cbc-hmac-md5

Terminology:

DES – Data Encryption Standard (56-bit key)

3DES – Triple-DES (Uses three iterations of DES, 112-bit key) aes – Advanced Encryption Standard (160 or 224-bit key) blowfish – Blowfish (32-448 bit key) cbc – cypher-block chaining sha1 – Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (160-bit hashes) md5 – Message Digest algorithm number 5 (128-bit hashes)

show public-key

This command shows the public key for the specified user or for the host.

Syntax show public-key [ user [ username ]| host ] username – Name of an SSH user. (Range: 1-8 characters)

Default Setting

Shows all public keys.

21-32

ECURE

HELL

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• If no parameters are entered, all keys are displayed. If the user keyword is entered, but no user name is specified, then the public keys for all users are displayed.

• When an RSA key is displayed, the first field indicates the size of the host key (e.g., 1024), the second field is the encoded public exponent

(e.g., 35), and the last string is the encoded modulus. When a DSA key is displayed, the first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard (DSS), and the last string is the encoded modulus.

Example

Console#show public-key host

Host:

RSA:

1024 65537

13236940658254764031382795526536375927835525327972629521130241

0719421061655759424590939236096954050362775257556251003866130989393

8345231033280214988866192159556859887989191950588394018138744046890

8779160305837768185490002831341625008348718449522087429212255691665

6552963281635169640408315547660664151657116381

DSA: ssh-dss AAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAPWKZTPbsRIB8ydEXcxM3dyV/yrDbKStIlnzD/

Dg0h2Hxc YV44sXZ2JXhamLK6P8bvuiyacWbUW/a4PAtp1KMSdqsKeh3hKoA3vRRSy1

N2XFfAKxl5fwFfvJlPdOkFgzLGMinvSNYQwiQXbKTBH0Z4mUZpE85PWxDZMaCNBPjBr

RAAAAFQChb4vsdfQGNIjwbvwrNLaQ77isiwAAAIEAsy5YWDC99ebYHNRj5kh47wY4i8 cZvH+/p9cnrfwFTMU01VFDly3IR 2G395NLy5Qd7ZDxfA9mCOfT/yyEfbobMJZi8oG

CstSNOxrZZVnMqWrTYfdrKX7YKBw/Kjw6BmiFq7O+jAhf1Dg45loAc27s6TLdtny1 wRq/ow2eTCD5nekAAACBAJ8rMccXTxHLFAczWS7EjOyDbsloBfPuSAb4oAsyjKXK

VYNLQkTLZfcFRu41bS2KV5LAwecsigF/+DjKGWtPNIQqabKgYCw2o/dVzX4Gg+yqdTl

YmGA7fHGm8ARGeiG4ssFKy4Z6DmYPXFum1Yg0fhLwuHpOSKdxT3kk475S7 w0W

Console#

21-33

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

802.1X Port Authentication

The switch supports IEEE 802.1X (dot1x) port-based access control that prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication. Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server using EAP (Extensible Authentication

Protocol).

Table 21-12 802.1X Port Authentication Commands

Command dot1x system-auth-control dot1x default

Function Mode

Enables dot1x globally on the switch. GC dot1x max-req

Resets all dot1x parameters to their default values

Sets the maximum number of times that the switch retransmits an EAP request/identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session

IC dot1x port-control dot1x operation-mode

Sets dot1x mode for a port interface IC

Allows single or multiple hosts on an dot1x port

IC dot1x re-authenticate Forces re-authentication on specific ports

Page

dot1x re-authentication Enables re-authentication for all ports IC dot1x timeout quiet-period

Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client

IC dot1x timeout re-authperiod

Sets the time period after which a connected client must be re-authenticated

21-39

21-40

21-34

802.1X P

ORT

UTHENTICATION

Table 21-12 802.1X Port Authentication Commands (Continued)

Command dot1x timeout tx-period Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet show dot1x

Function Mode

Shows all dot1x related information PE

Page

21-41

dot1x system-auth-control

This command enables IEEE 802.1X port authentication globally on the switch. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

[ no ] dot1x system-auth-control

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#dot1x system-auth-control

Console(config)#

dot1x default

This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default values.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#dot1x default

Console(config)#

21-35

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

dot1x max-req

This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request/identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax dot1x max-req count no dot1x max-req count – The maximum number of requests (Range: 1-10)

Default

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Example

Console(config)#interface eth 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x max-req 2

Console(config-if)#

dot1x port-control

This command sets the dot1x mode on a port interface. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax dot1x port-control { auto | force-authorized | force-unauthorized } no dot1x port-control

• auto – Requires a dot1x-aware connected client to be authorized by the RADIUS server. Clients that are not dot1x-aware will be denied access.

• force-authorized – Configures the port to grant access to all clients, either dot1x-aware or otherwise.

• force-unauthorized – Configures the port to deny access to all clients, either dot1x-aware or otherwise.

21-36

802.1X P

ORT

UTHENTICATION

Default force-authorized

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Example

Console(config)#interface eth 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto

Console(config-if)#

dot1x operation-mode

This command allows single or multiple hosts (clients) to connect to an

802.1X-authorized port. Use the no form with no keywords to restore the default to single host. Use the no form with the multi-host max-count keywords to restore the default maximum count.

Syntax dot1x operation-mode { single-host | multi-host

[ max-count count ]} no dot1x operation-mode [ multi-host max-count ]

• single-host – Allows only a single host to connect to this port.

• multi-host – Allows multiple host to connect to this port.

• max-count – Keyword for the maximum number of hosts.

count – The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port.

(Range: 1-1024; Default: 5)

Default

Single-host

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Command Usage

• The “max-count” parameter specified by this command is only effective if the dot1x mode is set to “auto” by the dot1x port-control command (page 4-105).

21-37

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

• In “multi-host” mode, only one host connected to a port needs to pass authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access.

Similarly, a port can become unauthorized for all hosts if one attached host fails re-authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message.

Example

Console(config)#interface eth 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x operation-mode multi-host max-count 10

Console(config-if)#

dot1x re-authenticate

This command forces re-authentication on all ports or a specific interface.

Syntax dot1x re-authenticate [ interface ] interface ethernet unit / port

unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

The re-authentication process verifies the connected client’s user ID and password on the RADIUS server. During re-authentication, the client remains connected the network and the process is handled transparently by the dot1x client software. Only if re-authentication fails is the port blocked.

Example

Console#dot1x re-authenticate

Console#

21-38

802.1X P

ORT

UTHENTICATION

dot1x re-authentication

This command enables periodic re-authentication for a specified port. Use the no form to disable re-authentication.

Syntax

[ no ] dot1x re-authentication

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Command Usage

• The re-authentication process verifies the connected client’s user ID and password on the RADIUS server. During re-authentication, the client remains connected the network and the process is handled transparently by the dot1x client software. Only if re-authentication fails is the port blocked.

• The connected client is re-authenticated after the interval specified by the dot1x timeout re-authperiod command. The default is 3600 seconds.

Example

Console(config)#interface eth 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x re-authentication

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

dot1x timeout re-authperiod (21-40)

dot1x timeout quiet-period

This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request

Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client. Use the no form to reset the default.

Syntax dot1x timeout quiet-period seconds no dot1x timeout quiet-period seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)

21-39

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

Default

60 seconds

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Example

Console(config)#interface eth 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 350

Console(config-if)#

dot1x timeout re-authperiod

This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be re-authenticated. Use the no form of this command to reset the default.

Syntax dot1x timeout re-authperiod seconds no dot1x timeout re-authperiod seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)

Default

3600 seconds

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Example

Console(config)#interface eth 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout re-authperiod 300

Console(config-if)#

21-40

802.1X P

ORT

UTHENTICATION

dot1x timeout tx-period

This command sets the time that an interface on the switch waits during an authentication session before re-transmitting an EAP packet. Use the no form to reset to the default value.

Syntax dot1x timeout tx-period seconds no dot1x timeout tx-period seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)

Default

30 seconds

Command Mode

Interface Configuration

Example

Console(config)#interface eth 1/2

Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout tx-period 300

Console(config-if)#

show dot1x

This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch or a specific interface.

Syntax show dot1x [ statistics ] [ interface interface ]

• statistics - Displays dot1x status for each port.

• interface

• ethernet unit / port

unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

port - Port number . (Range: 1-28)

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

21-41

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

21-42

Command Usage

This command displays the following information:

• Global 802.1X Parameters – Shows whether or not 802.1X port authentication is globally enabled on the switch.

• 802.1X Port Summary – Displays the port access control parameters for each interface that has enabled 802.1X, including the following items:

- Status – Administrative state for port access control.

- Operation Mode – Allows single or multiple hosts (page 21-37).

- Mode

- Authorized

– Dot1x port control mode (page 21-36).

– Authorization status (yes or n/a - not authorized).

• 802.1X Port Details – Displays the port access control parameters for each interface, including the following items:

- reauth-enabled

– Periodic re-authentication (page 21-39).

- reauth-period – Time after which a connected client must be

- quiet-period

re-authenticated (page 21-40).

– Time a port waits after Max Request Count is

- tx-period exceeded before attempting to acquire a new

client (page 21-39).

– Time a port waits during authentication session before re-transmitting EAP packet

(page 21-41).

- supplicant-timeout – Supplicant timeout.

- server-timeout

- reauth-max

– Server timeout.

– Maximum number of reauthentication

- max-req attempts.

– Maximum number of times a port will retransmit an EAP request/identity packet to the client before it times out the

- Status

authentication session (page 21-36).

– Authorization status (authorized or not).

- Operation Mode – Shows if single or multiple hosts (clients) can

- Max Count connect to an 802.1X-authorized port.

– The maximum number of hosts allowed to

access this port (page 21-37).

802.1X P

ORT

UTHENTICATION

- Port-control – Shows the dot1x mode on a port as auto, force-authorized, or force-unauthorized

- Supplicant

(page 21-36).

– MAC address of authorized client.

- Current Identifier – The integer (0-255) used by the

Authenticator to identify the current authentication session.

• Authenticator State Machine

- State

- Reauth Count

– Current state (including initialize, disconnected, connecting, authenticating, authenticated, aborting, held, force_authorized, force_unauthorized).

– Number of times connecting state is re-entered.

• Backend State Machine

- State – Current state (including request, response, success, fail, timeout, idle, initialize).

- Request Count – Number of EAP Request packets sent to the

Supplicant without receiving a response.

- Identifier(Server) – Identifier carried in the most recent EAP

Success, Failure or Request packet received from the Authentication Server.

• Reauthentication State Machine

- State – Current state (including initialize, reauthenticate).

21-43

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

Example

Console#show dot1x

Global 802.1X Parameters

system-auth-control: enable

802.1X Port Summary

Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized

1/1 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a

1/47 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized yes

1/48 enabled Single-Host Auto yes

802.1X Port Details

802.1X is enabled on port 1/1

802.1X is enabled on port 26 reauth-enabled: Enable reauth-period: 3600 quiet-period: 60 tx-period: 30 supplicant-timeout: 30 server-timeout: 10 reauth-max: 2 max-req: 2

Status Authorized

Operation mode Multi-Host

Max count 5

Port-control Auto

Supplicant 00-e0-29-94-34-65

Current Identifier 3

Authenticator State Machine

State Authenticated

Reauth Count 0

Backend State Machine

State Idle

Request Count 0

Identifier(Server) 2

Reauthentication State Machine

State Initialize

Console#

21-44

ANAGEMENT

IP F

ILTER

OMMANDS

Management IP Filter Commands

This section describes commands used to configure IP management access to the switch.

Table 21-13 Management IP Filter Commands

Command management

Function

Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access show management Displays the switch to be monitored or configured from a browser

Mode Page

21-45

21-46

management

This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

[ no ] management { all-client | http-client | snmp-client | telnet-client } start-address [ end-address ]

• all-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.

• http-client - Adds IP address(es) to the web group.

• snmp-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP group.

• telnet-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Telnet group.

• start-address - A single IP address, or the starting address of a range.

• end-address - The end address of a range.

Default Setting

All addresses

Command Mode

Global Configuration

21-45

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

Command Usage

• IP address can be configured for SNMP, web and Telnet access respectively. Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses, either individual addresses or address ranges.

• When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web or

Telnet), the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges. When entering addresses for different groups, the switch will accept overlapping address ranges.

• You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You must delete the entire range, and reenter the addresses.

• You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by specifying both the start address and end address.

Example

This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses.

Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.19

Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30

Console#

show management

This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols.

Syntax show management { all-client | http-client | snmp-client | telnet-client }

• all-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.

• http-client - Adds IP address(es) to the web group.

• snmp-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP group.

• telnet-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Telnet group.

21-46

ANAGEMENT

IP F

ILTER

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show management all-client

Management Ip Filter

HTTP-Client:

Start IP address End IP address

-----------------------------------------------

1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19

2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30

SNMP-Client:

Start IP address End IP address

-----------------------------------------------

1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19

2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30

TELNET-Client:

Start IP address End IP address

-----------------------------------------------

1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19

2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30

Console#

21-47

SER

UTHENTICATION

OMMANDS

21-48

HAPTER

LIENT

ECURITY

OMMANDS

22-1

LIENT

ECURITY

OMMANDS

Table 22-1 Client Security Commands

Command Group Function

Private VLANs Configures private VLANs, including uplink and downlink ports

Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802.1X

Port Security * Configures secure addresses for a port

IP Source Guard

Filters IP traffic on unsecure ports for which the source address cannot be identified via DHCP snooping nor static source bindings

DHCP Snooping *

Filters untrusted DHCP messages on unsecure ports by building and maintaining a DHCP snooping binding table

Page

* The priority of execution for these filtering commands is Port Security, IP

Source Guard, and then DHCP Snooping.

Port Security Commands

These commands can be used to enable port security on a port. When using port security, the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number. Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table for this port will be authorized to access the network.

The port will drop any incoming frames with a source MAC address that is unknown or has been previously learned from another port. If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port, the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message.

22-2

ORT

ECURITY

OMMANDS

Table 22-2 Port Security Commands

Command port security

Function

Configures a secure port

Mode Page

22-3

mac-address-table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC show mac-address-table Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding database

28-2

28-4

port security

This command enables or configures port security. Use the no form without any keywords to disable port security. Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to restore the default settings for a response to security violation or for the maximum number of allowed addresses.

Syntax port security [ action { shutdown | trap | trap-and-shutdown }

| max-mac-count address-count ] no port security [ action | max-mac-count ]

• action - Response to take when port security is violated.

shutdown - Disable port only.

trap - Issue SNMP trap message only.

trap-and-shutdown - Issue SNMP trap message and disable port.

• max-mac-count

address-count - The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port. (Range: 0 - 1024, where 0 means disabled)

Default Setting

Status: Disabled

Action: None

Maximum Addresses: 0

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

22-3

LIENT

ECURITY

OMMANDS

Command Usage

• If you enable port security, the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number. Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted.

• First use the port security max-mac-count command to set the number of addresses, and then use the port security command to enable security on the port.

• Use the no port security max-mac-count command to disable port security and reset the maximum number of addresses to the default.

• You can also manually add secure addresses with the

mac-address-table static

command.

• A secure port has the following restrictions:

- Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device.

- Cannot be a trunk port.

• If a port is disabled due to a security violation, it must be manually re-enabled using the no

shutdown

command.

Example

The following example enables port security for port 5, and sets the response to a security violation to issue a trap message:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#port security action trap

Related Commands

shutdown (24-9)

mac-address-table static (28-2)

IP Source Guard Commands

IP Source Guard is a security feature that filters IP traffic on network interfaces based on manually configured entries in the IP Source Guard table, or static and dynamic entries in the DHCP Snooping table when

enabled (see “DHCP Snooping Commands” on page 22-10). IP source

guard can be used to prevent traffic attacks caused when a host tries to use

22-4

IP S

OURCE

UARD

OMMANDS the IP address of a neighbor to access the network. This section describes commands used to configure IP Source Guard.

Table 22-3 IP Source Guard Commands

Command ip source-guard Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based on source IP address, or source IP address and corresponding MAC address ip source-guard binding show ip source-guard show ip source-guard binding

Function

Adds a static address to the source-guard binding table

Shows whether source guard is enabled or disabled on each interface

Shows the source guard binding table

Mode Page

22-5

22-7

22-9

ip source-guard

This command configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based source

IP address, or source IP address and corresponding MAC address. Use the no form to disable this function.

Syntax ip source-guard { sip | sip-mac } no ip source-guard

• sip - Filters traffic based on IP addresses stored in the binding table.

• sip-mac - Filters traffic based on IP addresses and corresponding

MAC addresses stored in the binding table.

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

22-5

LIENT

ECURITY

OMMANDS

22-6

Command Usage

• Source guard is used to filter traffic on an unsecure port which receives messages from outside the network or firewall, and therefore may be subject to traffic attacks caused by a host trying to use the IP address of a neighbor.

• Setting source guard mode to “sip” or “sip-mac” enables this function on the selected port. Use the “sip” option to check the VLAN ID, source IP address, and port number against all entries in the binding table. Use the “sip-mac” option to check these same parameters, plus the source MAC address. Use the no source guard command to disable this function on the selected port.

• When enabled, traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping, static entries configured in the DHCP snooping table, or static addresses configured in the source guard binding table.

• Table entries include a MAC address, IP address, lease time, entry type

(Static-IP-SG-Binding, Dynamic-DHCP-Binding,

Static-DHCP-Binding), VLAN identifier, and port identifier.

• Static addresses entered in the source guard binding table with the ip source-guard binding command (page 22-7) are automatically

configured with an infinite lease time. Dynamic entries learned via

DHCP snooping are configured by the DHCP server itself; static entries include a manually configured lease time.

• If the IP source guard is enabled, an inbound packet’s IP address (sip option) or both its IP address and corresponding MAC address

(sip-mac option) will be checked against the binding table. If no matching entry is found, the packet will be dropped.

• Filtering rules are implemented as follows:

- If the DHCP snooping is disabled (see page 22-11), IP source guard

will check the VLAN ID, source IP address, port number, and source MAC address (for the sip-mac option). If a matching entry is found in the binding table and the entry type is static IP source guard binding, the packet will be forwarded.

- If the DHCP snooping is enabled, IP source guard will check the

VLAN ID, source IP address, port number, and source MAC address (for the sip-mac option). If a matching entry is found in the binding table and the entry type is static IP source guard binding,

IP S

OURCE

UARD

OMMANDS static DHCP snooping binding or dynamic DHCP snooping binding, the packet will be forwarded.

- If IP source guard if enabled on an interface for which IP source bindings (dynamically learned via DHCP snooping or manually configured) are not yet configured, the switch will drop all IP traffic on that port, except for DHCP packets.

Example

This example enables IP source guard on port 5.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#ip source-guard sip

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

ip source-guard binding (22-7)

ip source-guard binding

This command adds a static address to the source-guard binding table. Use the no form to remove a static entry.

Syntax ip source-guard binding mac-address vlan vlan-id ip-address interface ethernet unit/port no ip source-guard binding mac-address vlan vlan-id

• mac-address - A valid unicast MAC address.

• vlan-id - ID of a configured VLAN (Range: 1-4093)

• ip-address - A valid unicast IP address, including classful types A, B or

• unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

• port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)

Default Setting

No configured entries

22-7

LIENT

ECURITY

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• Table entries include a MAC address, IP address, lease time, entry type

(Static-IP-SG-Binding, Dynamic-DHCP-Binding,

Static-DHCP-Binding), VLAN identifier, and port identifier.

• All static entries are configured with an infinite lease time, which is indicated with a value of zero by the

show ip source-guard

command

(page 22-9).

• When source guard is enabled, traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping, static entries configured in the

DHCP snooping table, or static addresses configured in the source guard binding table with this command.

• Static bindings are processed as follows:

- If there is no entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address, a new entry is added to binding table using the type of static IP source guard binding.

- If there is an entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address, and the type of entry is static IP source guard binding, then the new entry will replace the old one.

- If there is an entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address, and the type of the entry is dynamic DHCP snooping binding, then the new entry will replace the old one and the entry type will be changed to static IP source guard binding.

Example

This example configures a static source-guard binding on port 5.

Console(config)#ip source-guard binding 11-22-33-44-55-66 vlan 1

192.168.0.99 interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

ip source-guard (22-5)

ip dhcp snooping vlan command (page 22-13), DHCP messages received on

22-8

IP S

OURCE

UARD

OMMANDS

show ip source-guard

This command shows whether source guard is enabled or disabled on each interface.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show ip source-guard

Interface Filter-type

--------- -----------

Eth 1/1 DISABLED

Eth 1/2 DISABLED

Eth 1/3 DISABLED

Eth 1/4 DISABLED

Eth 1/5 SIP

show ip source-guard binding

This command shows the source guard binding table.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show ip source-guard binding

MacAddress IpAddress Lease(sec) Type VLAN

Interface

----------------- --------------- ---------- -------------------- ---- --------

11-22-33-44-55-66 192.168.0.99 0 Static-IP-SG-binding 1 Eth 1/5

Console#

22-9

LIENT

ECURITY

OMMANDS

DHCP Snooping Commands

DHCP snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP servers or other devices which send port-related information to a DHCP server. This information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port. This section describes commands used to configure DHCP snooping.

Command ip dhcp snooping ip dhcp snooping vlan ip dhcp snooping binding ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address ip dhcp snooping database flash ip dhcp snooping trust show ip dhcp snooping show ip dhcp snooping binding

Table 22-4 DHCP Snooping Commands

Function

Enables DHCP snooping globally

Enables DHCP snooping on the specified

VLAN

Adds a static address to the DHCP snooping table

Verifies the client’s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet against the source MAC address in the Ethernet header

Writes all dynamically learned snooping entries to flash memory

Configures the specified interface as trusted

Mode Page

Shows the DHCP snooping configuration settings

Shows the DHCP snooping binding table entries PE

22-17

22-18

22-19

22-10

DHCP S

NOOPING

OMMANDS

ip dhcp snooping

This command enables DHCP snooping globally. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

[ no ] ip dhcp snooping

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCP messages are received from an outside source. DHCP snooping is used to filter

DHCP messages received on an unsecure interface from outside the network or firewall. When DHCP snooping is enabled globally by this command, and enabled on a VLAN interface by the

an untrusted interface (as specified by the

no ip dhcp snooping trust command, page 22-17) from a device not listed in the DHCP

snooping table will be dropped.

• When enabled, DHCP messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping, and static entries configured in the DHCP snooping table.

• Table entries are only learned for untrusted interfaces. Each entry includes a MAC address, IP address, lease time, entry type

(Dynamic-DHCP-Binding, Static-DHCP-Binding), VLAN identifier, and port identifier.

• When DHCP snooping is enabled, the rate limit for the number of

DHCP messages that can be processed by the switch is 100 packets per second. Any DHCP packets in excess of this limit are dropped.

• Filtering rules are implemented as follows:

- If the global DHCP snooping is disabled, all DHCP packets are forwarded.

22-11

LIENT

ECURITY

OMMANDS

- If DHCP snooping is enabled globally, and also enabled on the

VLAN where the DHCP packet is received, all DHCP packets are forwarded for a trusted port. If the received packet is a DHCP ACK message, a dynamic DHCP snooping entry is also added to the binding table.

- If DHCP snooping is enabled globally, and also enabled on the

VLAN where the DHCP packet is received, but the port is not trusted , it is processed as follows:

* If the DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server

(including OFFER, ACK or NAK messages), the packet is dropped.

* If the DHCP packet is from a client, such as a DECLINE or

RELEASE message, the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding entry is found in the binding table.

* If the DHCP packet is from client, such as a DISCOVER,

REQUEST, INFORM, DECLINE or RELEASE message, the packet is forwarded if MAC address verification is disabled (as specified by the

ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address command, page 22-16). However, if MAC address verification is

enabled, then the packet will only be forwarded if the client’s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet is the same as the source MAC address in the Ethernet header.

* If the DHCP packet is not a recognizable type, it is dropped.

- If a DHCP packet from a client passes the filtering criteria above, it will only be forwarded to trusted ports in the same VLAN.

- If a DHCP packet is from server is received on a trusted port, it will be forwarded to both trusted and untrusted ports in the same

VLAN.

• If the DHCP snooping is globally disabled, all dynamic bindings are removed from the binding table; all static bindings are retained in the binding table but will have no effect until DHCP snooping is re-enabled.

• Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client – The port(s) through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted (

ip dhcp snooping trust , page 22-17).

Note that the switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to the

22-12

DHCP S

NOOPING

OMMANDS binding table when it receives an ACK message from a DHCP server.

Also, when the switch sends out DHCP client packets for itself, no filtering takes place. However, when the switch receives any messages from a DHCP server, any packets received from untrusted ports are dropped.

Example

This example enables DHCP snooping globally for the switch.

Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip dhcp snooping binding (22-14)

ip dhcp snooping vlan

This command enables DHCP snooping on the specified VLAN. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

[ no ] ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan-id vlan-id - ID of a configured VLAN (Range: 1-4093)

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• When DHCP snooping enabled globally using the ip dhcp snooping command (page 22-11), and enabled on a VLAN with this command,

DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN as specified by the

ip dhcp snooping trust command (page 22-17).

22-13

LIENT

ECURITY

OMMANDS

• When the DHCP snooping is globally disabled, DHCP snooping can still be configured for specific VLANs, but the changes will not take effect until DHCP snooping is globally re-enabled.

When DHCP snooping is globally enabled, configuration changes for specific VLANs have the following effects:

- If DHCP snooping is disabled on a VLAN, all dynamic bindings learned for this VLAN are removed from the binding table; all static bindings configured for this VLAN are retained in the binding table but have no effect.

- If DHCP snooping is re-enabled on a VLAN, any previously configured static bindings stored in the binding table will take effect again.

Example

This example enables DHCP snooping for VLAN 1.

Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping vlan 1

Console(config)#

Related Commands

ip dhcp snooping binding (22-14)

ip dhcp snooping binding

This command adds a static address to the DHCP snooping binding table.

Use the no form to remove an entry from the binding table.

Syntax ip dhcp binding mac-address vlan vlan-id ip-address interface ethernet unit/port lease-time no ip dhcp binding mac-address vlan vlan-id

• mac-address - A valid unicast MAC address.

• vlan-id - ID of a configured VLAN (Range: 1-4093)

• ip-address - A valid unicast IP address, including classful types A, B or

22-14

DHCP S

NOOPING

OMMANDS

• unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

• port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)

• lease-time - The time after which an entry is removed from the table.

(Range: 0-4294967295, where 0 indicates a permanent entry)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• If DHCP snooping is enabled globally, and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received on a trusted port, a dynamic

DHCP snooping entry is added to the binding table. An entry is added or removed dynamically whenever a client has gotten or released an IP address from a DHCP server.

• Table entries can also be statically configured using the ip dhcp binding command. Table entries includes a MAC address, IP address, lease time, entry type (Dynamic-DHCP-Binding,

Static-DHCP-Binding), VLAN identifier, and port identifier.

• If the DHCP snooping is disabled globally, all dynamic bindings are removed from the binding table; all static bindings are retained in the binding table but will have no effect until DHCP snooping is globally re-enabled.

• If DHCP snooping is enabled globally, and then disabled on a VLAN, all dynamic bindings learned for this VLAN are removed from the binding table; all static bindings configured for this VLAN are retained in the binding table but will have no effect until snooping is re-enabled on the VLAN.

• A static DHCP snooping entry can be added in the binding table under any of the following conditions:

- If there is no binding with same VLAN ID and MAC address.

- If there is a binding with same VLAN ID and MAC address, and the entry type is static IP source guard binding, static DHCP snooping binding, or dynamic DHCP snooping binding, the new entry will replace the old one.

22-15

LIENT

ECURITY

OMMANDS

• When the lease time for a dynamic or static DHCP binding entry expires, it is removed from the binding table.

Example

This example configures a static DHCP binding entry on port 5, and sets the lease time to make it a permanent entry.

Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping binding 11-22-33-44-55-66 vlan 1

192.168.0.99 interface ethernet 1/5 0

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address

This command verifies the client’s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet against the source MAC address in the Ethernet header. Use the no form to disable this function.

Syntax

[ no ] ip dhcp binding verify mac-address

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

If MAC address verification is enabled, and the source MAC address in the Ethernet header of the packet is not same as the client’s hardware address in the DHCP packet, the packet is dropped.

Example

This example enables MAC address verification.

Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address

Console(config)#

22-16

DHCP S

NOOPING

OMMANDS

Related Commands

ip dhcp snooping command (page 22-11), and enabled on a VLAN with this command,

ip dhcp snooping database flash

This command writes all dynamically learned snooping entries to flash memory.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

This command can be used to store the currently learned dynamic

DHCP snooping entries to flash memory. These entries will be restored to the snooping table when the switch is reset. However, note that the lease time shown for a dynamic entry that has been restored from flash memory will no longer be valid.

Example

Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping database flash

Console(config)#

ip dhcp snooping trust

This command configures the specified interface as trusted. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

[ no ] ip dhcp snooping trust

Default Setting

All interfaces are untrusted

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

22-17

LIENT

ECURITY

OMMANDS

Command Usage

• An untrusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall. A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network.

• When DHCP snooping enabled globally using the

DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN according to the default status, or as specifically configured for an interface with the no ip dhcp snooping trust command.

• When an untrusted port is changed to a trusted port, all the dynamic

DHCP snooping bindings associated with this port are removed. All static bindings are retained, but will have no effect unless the port is changed back to the untrusted state.

• Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client – The port(s) through which it submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted.

Example

This example sets port 5 to untrusted.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#no ip dhcp snooping trust

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

ip dhcp snooping binding (22-14)

show ip dhcp snooping

This command shows the DHCP snooping configuration settings.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

22-18

DHCP S

NOOPING

OMMANDS

Example

Console#show ip dhcp snooping

Global DHCP Snooping status: disable

DHCP Snooping is configured on the following VLANs:

Verify Source Mac-Address: enable

Interface Trusted

---------- ----------

Eth 1/1 No

Eth 1/2 No

Eth 1/3 No

Eth 1/4 No

Eth 1/5 Yes

show ip dhcp snooping binding

This command shows the DHCP snooping binding table entries.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show ip dhcp snooping binding

MacAddress IpAddress Lease(sec) Type VLAN

Interface

----------------- --------------- ---------- -------------------- ---- --------

11-22-33-44-55-66 192.168.0.99 0 Static-DHCPSNP 1 Eth 1/5

Console#

22-19

LIENT

ECURITY

OMMANDS

22-20

HAPTER

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

Access Control Lists (ACL) provide packet filtering for IP frames (based on address, protocol, Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code), or any frames (based on MAC address or Ethernet type). To filter packets, first create an access list, add the required rules, specify a mask to modify the precedence in which the rules are checked, and then bind the list to a specific port. This section describes the Access Control List commands.

Table 23-1 Access Control List Commands

Command Groups Function

IP ACLs

MAC ACLs

ACL Information

Configures ACLs based on IPv4 addresses, TCP/

UDP port number, protocol type, and TCP control code

Configures ACLs based on hardware addresses, packet format, and Ethernet type

Displays ACLs and associated rules; shows ACLs assigned to each port

Page

23-2

23-15

23-24

23-1

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

IP ACLs

The commands in this section configure ACLs based on IP addresses,

TCP/UDP port number, protocol type, and TCP control code. To configure IP ACLs, first create an access list containing the required permit or deny rules, set a precedence mask to control the filter sequence, and then bind the access list to one or more ports

Command

Table 23-2 IP ACL Commands

Function access-list ip permit, deny

Creates an IPv4 ACL and enters configuration mode for standard or extended IPv4 ACLs

Filters packets matching a specified source IPv4 address permit, deny Filters packets meeting the specified criteria, including source and destination IPv4 address, TCP/UDP port number, protocol type, and TCP control code show ip access-list Displays the rules for configured IPv4

ACLs access-list ip mask-precedence mask

Changes to the IP Mask mode used to configure access control masks

Sets a precedence mask for the ACL rules show access-list ip mask-precedence ip access-group show ip access-group

Shows the ingress or egress rule masks for IP ACLs

Adds a port to an IPv4 ACL

Shows port assignments for IPv4

ACLs

Mode

IP-

STD-ACL

IP-

EXT-ACL

IP-Mask

Page

23-2

IP ACL

access-list ip

This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or extended IP ACLs. Use the no form to remove the specified

ACL.

Syntax

[ no ] access-list ip { standard | extended } acl_name

• standard – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source

IP address.

• extended – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or destination IP address, and other more specific criteria.

• acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL, use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list. To create an ACL, you must add at least one rule to the list.

• To remove a rule, use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule.

An ACL can contain up to 32 rules.

Example

Console(config)#access-list ip standard david

Console(config-std-acl)#

Related Commands

permit, deny 23-4

show ip access-list (23-7)

23-3

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

permit

deny

(Standard ACL)

This command adds a rule to a Standard IP ACL. The rule sets a filter condition for packets emanating from the specified source. Use the no form to remove a rule.

Syntax

[ no ] { permit | deny } { any | source bitmask | host source }

• any – Any source IP address.

• source – Source IP address.

• bitmask – Decimal number representing the address bits to match.

• host – Keyword followed by a specific IP address.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Standard IP ACL

Command Usage

• New rules are appended to the end of the list.

• Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask, containing four integers from 0 to 255, each separated by a period. The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate “match” and 0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address, and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port(s) to which this ACL has been assigned.

Example

This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10.1.1.21 and another rule for the address range 168.92.16.x – 168.92.31.x using a bitmask.

Console(config-std-acl)#permit host 10.1.1.21

Console(config-std-acl)#permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0

Console(config-std-acl)#

Related Commands

access-list ip (23-3)

23-4

IP ACL

permit

deny

(Extended ACL)

This command adds a rule to an Extended IP ACL. The rule sets a filter condition for packets with specific source or destination IP addresses, protocol types, source or destination protocol ports, or TCP control codes.

Use the no form to remove a rule.

Syntax

[ no ] { permit | deny } [ protocol number | udp ]

{ any | source address-bitmask | host source }

{ any | destination address-bitmask | host destination }

[ precedence precedence ] [ tos tos ] [ dscp dscp ]

[ source-port sport [ bitmask ]] [ destination-port dport [ port bitmask ]]

[ no ] { permit | deny } tcp

{ any | source address-bitmask | host source }

{ any | destination address-bitmask | host destination }

[ precedence precedence ] [ tos tos ] [ dscp dscp ]

[ source-port sport [ bitmask ]] [ destination-port dport [ port bitmask ]]

[ control-flag control-flags flag-bitmask ]

• protocol-number – A specific protocol number. (Range: 0-255)

• source – Source IP address.

• destination – Destination IP address.

• address-bitmask – Decimal number representing the address bits to match.

• host – Keyword followed by a specific IP address.

• precedence – IP precedence level. (Range: 0-7)

• tos – Type of Service level. (Range: 0-15)

• dscp – DSCP priority level. (Range: 0-63)

• sport – Protocol 26 source port number. (Range: 0-65535)

• dport – Protocol

destination port number. (Range: 0-65535)

• port-bitmask – Decimal number representing the port bits to match.

(Range: 0-65535)

26. Includes TCP, UDP or other protocol types.

23-5

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

• control-flags – Decimal number (representing a bit string) that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header. (Range: 0-63)

• flag-bitmask – Decimal number representing the code bits to match.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Extended IP ACL

Command Usage

• All new rules are appended to the end of the list.

• You can specify both Precedence and ToS in the same rule. However, if DSCP is used, then neither Precedence nor ToS can be specified.

• The control-code bitmask is a decimal number (representing an equivalent bit mask) that is applied to the control code. Enter a decimal number, where the equivalent binary bit “1” means to match a bit and “0” means to ignore a bit. The following bits may be specified:

- 1 (fin) – Finish

- 2 (syn) – Synchronize

- 4 (rst) – Reset

- 8 (psh) – Push

- 16 (ack) – Acknowledgement

- 32 (urg) – Urgent pointer

For example, use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set:

- SYN flag valid, use “control-code 2 2”

- Both SYN and ACK valid, use “control-code 18 18”

- SYN valid and ACK invalid, use “control-code 2 18”

23-6

IP ACL

Example

This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet 10.7.1.x. For example, if the rule is matched; i.e., the rule (10.7.1.0

& 255.255.255.0) equals the masked address (10.7.1.2 & 255.255.255.0), the packet passes through.

Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any

Console(config-ext-acl)#

This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 (i.e., HTTP).

Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any destination-port 80

Console(config-ext-acl)#

This permits all TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 with the

TCP control code set to “SYN.”

Console(config-ext-acl)#permit tcp 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any control-flag 2 2

Console(config-ext-acl)#

Related Commands

access-list ip (23-3)

show ip access-list

This command displays the rules for configured IP ACLs.

Syntax show ip access-list { standard | extended } [ acl_name ]

• standard – Specifies a standard IP ACL.

• extended – Specifies an extended IP ACL.

• acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

23-7

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

Example

Console#show ip access-list standard

IP standard access-list david:

permit host 10.1.1.21

permit 168.92.0.0 255.255.15.0

Console#

Related Commands

permit, deny 23-4

access-list ip mask-precedence

This command changes to the IP Mask mode used to configure access control masks. Use the no form to delete the mask table.

Syntax

[ no ] access-list ip mask-precedence { in | out }

• in – Ingress mask for ingress ACLs.

• out – Egress mask for egress ACLs.

Default Setting

Default system mask: Filter inbound packets according to specified IP

ACLs.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• A mask can only be used by all ingress ACLs or all egress ACLs.

• The precedence of the ACL rules applied to a packet is not determined by order of the rules, but instead by the order of the masks; i.e., the first mask that matches a rule will determine the rule that is applied to a packet.

• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule.

23-8

IP ACL

Example

Console(config)#access-list ip mask-precedence in

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#

Related Commands

mask (IP ACL) (23-9)

show ip access-list (23-7)

mask

(IP ACL)

This command defines a mask for IP ACLs. This mask defines the fields to check in the IP header. Use the no form to remove a mask.

Syntax

[ no ] mask [ protocol ]

{ any | host | source-bitmask }

{ any | host | destination-bitmask }

[ precedence ] [ tos ] [ dscp ]

[ source-port [ port-bitmask ]] [ destination-port [ port-bitmask] ]

[ control-flag [ flag-bitmask ]]

• protocol – Check the protocol field.

• any – Any address will be matched.

• host – The address must be for a host device, not a subnetwork.

• source-bitmask – Source address of rule must match this bitmask.

• destination-bitmask – Destination address of rule must match this bitmask.

• precedence – Check the IP precedence field.

• tos – Check the TOS field.

• dscp – Check the DSCP field.

• source-port – Check the protocol source port field.

• destination-port – Check the protocol destination port field.

• port-bitmask – Protocol port of rule must match this bitmask.

(Range: 0-65535)

• control-flag – Check the field for control flags.

• flag-bitmask – Control flags of rule must match this bitmask.

(Range: 0-63)

23-9

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

IP Mask

Command Usage

• First create the required ACLs and ingress or egress masks before mapping an ACL to an interface.

• If you enter dscp , you cannot enter tos or precedence . You can enter both tos and precedence without dscp .

• Masks that include an entry for a Layer 4 protocol source port or destination port can only be applied to packets with a header length of exactly five bytes.

Example

This example creates an IP ingress mask with two rules. Each rule is checked in order of precedence to look for a match in the ACL entries.

The first entry matching a mask is applied to the inbound packet.

Console(config)#access-list ip mask-precedence in

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask host any

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask 255.255.255.0 any

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#

23-10

IP ACL

This shows that the entries in the mask override the precedence in which the rules are entered into the ACL. In the following example, packets with the source address 10.1.1.1 are dropped because the “deny 10.1.1.1

255.255.255.255” rule has the higher precedence according the “mask host any” entry.

Console(config)#access-list ip standard A2

Console(config-std-acl)#permit 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0

Console(config-std-acl)#deny 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.255

Console(config-std-acl)#exit

Console(config)#access-list ip mask-precedence in

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask host any

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask 255.255.255.0 any

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#

This shows how to create a standard ACL with an ingress mask to deny access to the IP host 171.69.198.102, and permit access to any others.

Console(config)#access-list ip standard A2

Console(config-std-acl)#permit any

Console(config-std-acl)#deny host 171.69.198.102

Console(config-std-acl)#end

Console#show access-list

IP standard access-list A2:

deny host 171.69.198.102

permit any

Console#configure

Console(config)#access-list ip mask-precedence in

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask host any

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#ip access-group A2 in

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show access-list

IP standard access-list A2:

deny host 171.69.198.102

permit any

Console#

23-11

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

This shows how to create an extended ACL with an egress mask to drop packets leaving network 171.69.198.0 when the Layer 4 source port is 23.

Console(config)#access-list ip extended A3

Console(config-ext-acl)#deny host 171.69.198.5 any

Console(config-ext-acl)#deny 171.69.198.0 255.255.255.0 any source-port 23

Console(config-ext-acl)#end

Console#show access-list

IP extended access-list A3:

deny host 171.69.198.5 any

deny 171.69.198.0 255.255.255.0 any source-port 23

Console#config

Console(config)#access-list ip mask-precedence out

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask 255.255.255.0 any source-port

Console(config-ip-mask-acl)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/15

Console(config-if)#ip access-group A3 out

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show access-list

IP extended access-list A3:

deny 171.69.198.0 255.255.255.0 any source-port 23

deny host 171.69.198.5 any

IP egress mask ACL:

mask 255.255.255.0 any source-port

Console#

23-12

IP ACL

This is a more comprehensive example. It denies any TCP packets in which the SYN bit is ON, and permits all other packets. It then sets the ingress mask to check the deny rule first, and finally binds port 1 to this

ACL. Note that once the ACL is bound to an interface (i.e., the ACL is active), the order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask.

Switch(config)#access-list ip extended 6

Switch(config-ext-acl)#permit any any

Switch(config-ext-acl)#deny tcp any any control-flag 2 2

Switch(config-ext-acl)#end

Console#show access-list

IP extended access-list A6:

permit any any

deny tcp any any control-flag 2 2

Console#configure

Switch(config)#access-list ip mask-precedence in

Switch(config-ip-mask-acl)#mask protocol any any control-flag 2

Switch(config-ip-mask-acl)#end

Console#sh access-list

IP extended access-list A6:

permit any any

deny tcp any any control-flag 2 2

IP ingress mask ACL:

mask protocol any any control-flag 2

Console#configure

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#ip access-group A6 in

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show access-list

IP extended access-list A6:

deny tcp any any control-flag 2 2

permit any any

IP ingress mask ACL:

mask protocol any any control-flag 2

Console#

show access-list ip mask-precedence

This command shows the ingress or egress rule masks for IP ACLs.

Syntax show access-list ip mask-precedence [ in | out ]

• in – Ingress mask precedence for ingress ACLs.

• out – Egress mask precedence for egress ACLs.

23-13

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show access-list ip mask-precedence

IP ingress mask ACL:

mask host any

mask 255.255.255.0 any

Console#

Related Commands

mask (IP ACL) (23-9)

ip access-group

This command binds a port to an IP ACL. Use the no form to remove the port.

Syntax

[ no ] ip access-group acl_name in

• acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)

• in – Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• A port can only be bound to one ACL.

• If a port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different

ACL, the switch will replace the old binding with the new one.

• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port.

Example

Console(config)#int eth 1/2

Console(config-if)#ip access-group standard david in

Console(config-if)#

23-14

MAC ACL

Related Commands

show ip access-group

This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show ip access-group

Interface ethernet 1/2

IP standard access-list david

Console#

Related Commands

MAC ACLs

The commands in this section configure ACLs based on hardware addresses, packet format, and Ethernet type. To configure MAC ACLs, first create an access list containing the required permit or deny rules, set a precedence mask to control the filter sequence, and then bind the access list to one or more ports

Command

Table 23-3 MAC ACL Commands

Function access-list mac permit, deny

Creates a MAC ACL and enters configuration mode

Filters packets matching a specified source and destination address, packet format, and Ethernet type show mac access-list Displays the rules for configured

MAC ACLs access-list mac mask-precedence

Changes to the mode for configuring access control masks

Mode

Page

MAC-ACL

23-15

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

Command mask

Table 23-3 MAC ACL Commands (Continued)

Function Mode Page

MAC-Mask

23-21

show access-list mac mask-precedence mac access-group show mac access-group

Sets a precedence mask for the ACL rules

Shows the ingress or egress rule masks for MAC ACLs

Adds a port to a MAC ACL

Shows port assignments for MAC

ACLs

23-23

23-24

access-list mac

This command adds a MAC access list and enters MAC ACL configuration mode. Use the no form to remove the specified ACL.

Syntax

[ no ] access-list mac acl_name acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• To remove a rule, use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule.

• An ACL can contain up to 32 rules.

Example

Console(config)#access-list mac jerry

Console(config-mac-acl)#

23-16

MAC ACL

Related Commands

permit, deny (23-17)

show mac access-list (23-19)

permit

deny

(MAC ACL)

This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL. The rule filters packets matching a specified MAC source or destination address (i.e., physical layer address), or Ethernet protocol type. Use the no form to remove a rule.

Syntax

[ no ] { permit | deny }

{ any | host source | source address-bitmask }

{ any | host destination | destination address-bitmask }

[ vid vid vid-bitmask ] [ ethertype protocol [ protocol bitmask ]]

Note: The default is for Ethernet II packets.

[ no ] { permit | deny } tagged-eth2

{ any | host source | source address-bitmask }

{ any | host destination | destination address-bitmask }

[ vid vid vid-bitmask ] [ ethertype protocol [ protocol bitmask ]]

[ no ] { permit | deny } untagged-eth2

{ any | host source | source address-bitmask }

{ any | host destination | destination address-bitmask }

[ ethertype protocol [ protocol bitmask ]]

[ no ] { permit | deny } tagged-802.3

{ any | host source | source address-bitmask }

{ any | host destination | destination address-bitmask }

[ vid vid vid-bitmask ]

[ no ] { permit | deny } untagged-802.3

{ any | host source | source address-bitmask }

{ any | host destination | destination address-bitmask }

23-17

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

• tagged-eth2 – Tagged Ethernet II packets.

• untagged-eth2 – Untagged Ethernet II packets.

• tagged-802.3 – Tagged Ethernet 802.3 packets.

• untagged-802.3 – Untagged Ethernet 802.3 packets.

• any – Any MAC source or destination address.

• host – A specific MAC address.

• source – Source MAC address.

• destination – Destination MAC address range with bitmask.

• address-bitmask 27 – Bitmask for MAC address (in hexidecimal format).

• vid – VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4093)

•

vid-bitmask 27 –

VLAN bitmask. (Range: 1-4093)

• protocol – A specific Ethernet protocol number. (Range: 600-fff hex.)

• protocol bitmask

27 – Protocol bitmask. (Range: 600-fff hex.)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

MAC ACL

Command Usage

• New rules are added to the end of the list.

• The ethertype option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets.

• A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC

1060. A few of the more common types include the following:

- 0800 - IP

- 0806 - ARP

- 8137 - IPX

27. For all bitmasks, “1” means care and “0” means ignore.

23-18

MAC ACL

Example

This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00-e0-29-94-34-de where the Ethernet type is 0800.

Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de ethertype

0800

Console(config-mac-acl)#

Related Commands

access-list mac (23-16)

show mac access-list

This command displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs.

Syntax show mac access-list [ acl_name ] acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show mac access-list

MAC access-list jerry:

permit any 00-e0-29-94-34-de ethertype 0800

Console#

Related Commands

permit, deny 23-17

23-19

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

access-list mac mask-precedence

This command changes to MAC Mask mode used to configure access control masks. Use the no form to delete the mask table.

Syntax

[ no ] access-list ip mask-precedence { in | out }

• in – Ingress mask for ingress ACLs.

• out – Egress mask for egress ACLs.

Default Setting

Default system mask: Filter inbound packets according to specified

MAC ACLs.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule.

• A mask can only be used by all ingress ACLs or all egress ACLs.

Example

Console(config)#access-list mac mask-precedence in

Console(config-mac-mask-acl)#

Related Commands

mask (MAC ACL) (23-21)

show mac access-list (23-19)

23-20

MAC ACL

mask

(MAC ACL)

This command defines a mask for MAC ACLs. This mask defines the fields to check in the packet header. Use the no form to remove a mask.

Syntax

[ no ] mask [ pktformat ]

{ any | host | source-bitmask } { any | host | destination-bitmask }

[ vid [ vid-bitmask ]] [ ethertype [ ethertype-bitmask ]]

• pktformat – Check the packet format field. (If this keyword must be used in the mask, the packet format must be specified in ACL rule to match.)

• any – Any address will be matched.

• host – The address must be for a single node.

• source-bitmask – Source address of rule must match this bitmask.

• destination-bitmask – Destination address of rule must match this bitmask.

• vid – Check the VLAN ID field.

• vid-bitmask – VLAN ID of rule must match this bitmask.

• ethertype – Check the Ethernet type field.

• ethertype-bitmask – Ethernet type of rule must match this bitmask.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

MAC Mask

Command Usage

• Up to seven masks can be assigned to an ingress or egress ACL.

• First create the required ACLs and inbound or outbound masks before mapping an ACL to an interface.

23-21

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

23-22

Example

This example shows how to create an Ingress MAC ACL and bind it to a port. You can then see that the order of the rules have been changed by the mask.

Console(config)#access-list mac M4

Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any any

Console(config-mac-acl)#deny tagged-eth2 00-11-11-11-11-11 ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff any vid 3

Console(config-mac-acl)#end

Console#show access-list

MAC access-list M4:

permit any any

deny tagged-eth2 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any vid 3

Console(config)#access-list mac mask-precedence in

Console(config-mac-mask-acl)#mask pktformat ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff any vid

Console(config-mac-mask-acl)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/12

Console(config-if)#mac access-group M4 in

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show access-list

MAC access-list M4:

deny tagged-eth2 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any vid 3

permit any any

MAC ingress mask ACL:

mask pktformat host any vid

Console#

This example creates an Egress MAC ACL.

Console(config)#access-list mac M5

Console(config-mac-acl)#deny tagged-802.3 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any

Console(config-mac-acl)#deny tagged-eth2 00-11-11-11-11-11 ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff any vid 3 ethertype 0806

Console(config-mac-acl)#end

Console#show access-list

MAC access-list M5:

deny tagged-802.3 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any

deny tagged-eth2 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any vid 3 ethertype 0806

Console(config)#access-list mac mask-precedence out

Console(config-mac-mask-acl)#mask pktformat ff-ff-ff-ff-ff-ff any vid

Console(config-mac-mask-acl)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#mac access-group M5 out

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show access-list

MAC access-list M5:

deny tagged-eth2 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any vid 3 ethertype 0806

deny tagged-802.3 host 00-11-11-11-11-11 any

MAC ingress mask ACL:

mask pktformat host any vid ethertype

Console#

MAC ACL

show access-list mac mask-precedence

This command shows the ingress or egress rule masks for MAC ACLs.

Syntax show access-list mac mask-precedence [ in | out ]

• in – Ingress mask precedence for ingress ACLs.

• out – Egress mask precedence for egress ACLs.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show access-list mac mask-precedence

MAC egress mask ACL:

mask pktformat host any vid ethertype

Console#

Related Commands

mask (MAC ACL) (23-21)

mac access-group

This command binds a port to a MAC ACL. Use the no form to remove the port.

Syntax mac access-group acl_name in

• acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)

• in – Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• A port can only be bound to one ACL.

23-23

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

• If a port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different

ACL, the switch will replace the old binding with the new one.

• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2

Console(config-if)#mac access-group jerry in

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

show mac access-group

This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show mac access-group

Interface ethernet 1/5

MAC access-list M5 in

Console#

Related Commands

capabilities (flowcontrol, symmetric) (24-6)

ACL Information

This section describes commands used to display ACL information.

Command

Table 23-4 ACL Information Commands

Function Mode show access-list show access-group

Show all IPv4 ACLs and associated rules PE

Shows the IPv4 ACLs assigned to each port

Page

23-25

23-24

ACL I

NFORMATION

show access-list

This command shows all IPv4 ACLs and associated rules.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

Once the ACL is bound to an interface (i.e., the ACL is active), the order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask.

Example

Console#show access-list

IP standard access-list david:

permit host 10.1.1.21

permit 168.92.0.0 255.255.15.0

IP extended access-list bob:

permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any

permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any destination-port 80 80

permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any protocol tcp control-code 2 2

MAC access-list jerry:

permit any host 00-30-29-94-34-de ethertype 800 800

IP extended access-list A6:

deny tcp any any control-flag 2 2

permit any any

IP ingress mask ACL:

mask protocol any any control-flag 2

Console#

show access-group

This command shows the port assignments of IPv4 ACLs.

Command Mode

Privileged Executive

Example

Console#show access-group

Interface ethernet 1/2

IP standard access-list david

MAC access-list jerry

Console#

23-25

CCESS

ONTROL

IST

OMMANDS

23-26

HAPTER

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an Ethernet port, aggregated link, or VLAN.

Command interface description speed-duplex negotiation capabilities flowcontrol media-type

Table 24-1 Interface Commands

Function

Configures an interface type and enters interface configuration mode

Adds a description to an interface configuration

Configures the speed and duplex operation of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled

Enables autonegotiation of a given interface

Advertises the capabilities of a given interface for use in autonegotiation

Enables flow control on a given interface

Force port type selected for combination ports

Mode Page

switchport packet-rate Configures broadcast and multicast storm control thresholds switchport block Prevents flooding of unknown unicast or multicast packets clear counters Clears statistics on an interface show interfaces status Displays status for the specified interface

NE, PE

24-1

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

Command show interfaces counters show interfaces switchport

Table 24-1 Interface Commands (Continued)

Function

Displays statistics for the specified interfaces

Displays the administrative and operational status of an interface

Mode Page

NE, PE

24-14

NE, PE

24-16

interface

This command configures an interface type and enter interface configuration mode. Use the no form to remove a trunk.

Syntax interface interface no interface port-channel channel-id

• interface

• ethernet unit / port

unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-32)

• vlan vlan-id (Range: 1-4093)

• channel-id - Tuunk identifier. (Range: 1-32)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

To specify port 4, enter the following command:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/4

Console(config-if)#

24-2

DESCRIPTION

description

This command adds a description to an interface. Use the no form to remove the description.

Syntax description string no description string - Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached to this interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Example

The following example adds a description to port 4.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/4

Console(config-if)#description RD-SW#3

Console(config-if)#

speed-duplex

This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax speed-duplex { 10000full | 1000full | 100full | 100half | 10full |

10half } no speed-duplex

• 1000full - Forces 1 Gbps full-duplex operation

• 100full - Forces 100 Mbps full-duplex operation

• 100half - Forces 100 Mbps half-duplex operation

• 10full - Forces 10 Mbps full-duplex operation

• 10half - Forces 10 Mbps half-duplex operation

24-3

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

Default Setting

• Auto-negotiation is enabled by default.

• When auto-negotiation is disabled, the default speed-duplex setting is:

- Fast Ethernet ports – 100full (100 Mbps full-duplex)

- Gigabit Ethernet ports – 1000full ( 1 Gbps full-duplex)

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed-duplex command, use the no negotiation command to disable auto-negotiation on the selected interface.

• When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation, the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command.

To set the speed/duplex mode under auto-negotiation, the required mode must be specified in the capabilities list for an interface.

• 100BASE-BX ports are fixed at 100 Mbps, full-duplex.

• The 1000BASE-T standard does not support forced mode.

Auto-negotiation must always be used to establish a connection over any 1000BASE-T port or trunk.

Example

The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#speed-duplex 100half

Console(config-if)#no negotiation

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

negotiation (24-5)

capabilities (24-6)

24-4

NEGOTIATION

negotiation

This command enables autonegotiation for a given interface. Use the no form to disable autonegotiation.

Syntax

[ no ] negotiation

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• When auto-negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command. When auto-negotiation is disabled, you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed-duplex and flowcontrol commands.

• If autonegotiation is disabled, auto-MDI/MDI-X pin signal configuration will also be disabled for the RJ-45 ports.

Example

The following example configures port 11 to use autonegotiation.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11

Console(config-if)#negotiation

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

capabilities (24-6)

speed-duplex (24-3)

24-5

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

capabilities

This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during autonegotiation. Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised capability, or the no form without parameters to restore the default values.

Syntax

[ no ] capabilities { 1000full | 100full | 100half | 10full | 10half | flowcontrol | symmetric }

• 1000full - Supports 1 Gbps full-duplex operation

• 100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation

• 100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation

• 10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation

• 10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation

• flowcontrol Supports flow control

• symmetric (Gigabit only) - When specified, the port transmits and receives pause frames; when not specified, the port will auto-negotiate to determine the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames. ( The current switch ASIC only supports symmetric pause frames.

)

Default Setting

100BASE-TX: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full

1000BASE-T: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full

1000BASE-SX/LX/LH (SFP): 1000full

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

When auto-negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command, the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilites command. When auto-negotiation is disabled, you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed-duplex and flowcontrol commands.

24-6

FLOWCONTROL

Example

The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to 100half and 100full.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#capabilities 100half

Console(config-if)#capabilities 100full

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

negotiation (24-5)

speed-duplex (24-3)

flowcontrol (24-7)

flowcontrol

This command enables flow control. Use the no form to disable flow control.

Syntax

[ no ] flowcontrol

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• Flow control can eliminate frame loss by “blocking” traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill. When enabled, back pressure is used for half-duplex operation and

IEEE 802.3-2005 (formally IEEE 802.3x) for full-duplex operation.

• To force flow control on or off (with the flowcontrol or no flowcontrol command), use the no negotiation command to disable auto-negotiation on the selected interface.

• When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation, the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command.

24-7

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

To enable flow control under auto-negotiation, “flowcontrol” must be included in the capabilities list for any port

• Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem. Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub.

Example

The following example enables flow control on port 5.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#flowcontrol

Console(config-if)#no negotiation

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

negotiation (24-5)

media-type

This command forces the port type selected for combination ports 27-28.

Use the no form to restore the default mode.

Syntax media-type mode no media-type mode

• copper-forced - Always uses the built-in RJ-45 port.

• sfp-forced - Always uses the SFP port (even if module not installed).

• sfp-preferred-auto - Uses SFP port if both combination types are functioning and the SFP port has a valid link.

Default Setting sfp-preferred-auto

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet - Ports 27-28)

24-8

SHUTDOWN

Example

This forces the switch to use the built-in RJ-45 port for the combination port 28.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/28

Console(config-if)#media-type copper-forced

Console(config-if)#

shutdown

This command disables an interface. To restart a disabled interface, use the no form.

Syntax

[ no ] shutdown

Default Setting

All interfaces are enabled.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior

(e.g., excessive collisions), and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved. You may also want to disable a port for security reasons.

Example

The following example disables port 5.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#shutdown

Console(config-if)#

24-9

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

switchport packet-rate

This command configures broadcast and multicast storm control. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax switchport { broadcast | multicast } packet-rate rate no switchport broadcast

• broadcast - Specifies storm control for broadcast traffic.

• multicast - Specifies storm control for multicast traffic.

• rate - Threshold level as a rate; i.e., packets per second.

(Range: 500-262143)

Default Setting

• Broadcast Storm Control: Enabled for all ports, packet-rate limit: 500 pps

• Multicast Storm Control: Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

When traffic exceeds the threshold specified for broadcast and multicast traffic, packets exceeding the threshold are dropped until the rate falls back down beneath the threshold.

Example

The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600 packets per second:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast packet-rate 600

Console(config-if)#

24-10

SWITCHPORT BLOCK

switchport block

This command prevents flooding of unknown unicast or multicast packets to an interface. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax

[ no ] switchport block { unicast | multicast }

• unicast - Specifies unknown unicast packets.

• multicast - Specifies unknown multicast packets.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Default Setting

Unknown unicast and multicast packets are not blocked.

Command Usage

By default, unknown unicast or multicast traffic is flooded to all ports.

This occurs if a MAC address has been timed out or not yet learned by the switch. If this kind of traffic is flooded to an isolated port on a private VLAN, there could be security issues.

Example

The following example blocks unknown multicast traffic on port 5:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#switchport switchport block multicast

Console(config-if)#

24-11

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

clear counters

This command clears statistics on an interface.

Syntax clear counters interface interface

• ethernet unit / port

unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-32)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

Statistics are only initialized for a power reset. This command sets the base value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session. However, if you log out and back into the management interface, the statistics displayed will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power reset.

Example

The following example clears statistics on port 5.

Console#clear counters ethernet 1/5

Console#

24-12

SHOW INTERFACES STATUS

show interfaces status

This command displays the status for an interface.

Syntax show interfaces status [ interface ] interface

• ethernet unit / port

unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-32)

• vlan vlan-id (Range: 1-4093)

Default Setting

Shows the status for all interfaces.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed.

For a description of the items displayed by this command, see

“Displaying Connection Status” on page 9-1.

24-13

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

Example

Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/5

Information of Eth 1/5

Basic information:

Port type: 1000T

Mac address: 00-30-F1-D4-73-A5

Configuration:

Name:

Port admin: Up

Speed-duplex: Auto

Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full

Broadcast storm: Enabled

Broadcast storm limit: 500 packets/second

Flow control: Disabled

LACP: Disabled

Port security: Disabled

Max MAC count: 0

Port security action: None

Media type: None

Current status:

Link status: Up

Port operation status: Up

Operation speed-duplex: 1000full

Flow control type: None

Console#show interfaces status vlan 1

Information of VLAN 1

MAC address: 00-00-AB-CD-00-00

Console#

show interfaces counters

This command displays interface statistics.

Syntax show interfaces counters [ interface ] interface

• ethernet unit / port

unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-32)

Default Setting

Shows the counters for all interfaces.

24-14

SHOW INTERFACES COUNTERS

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed.

For a description of the items displayed by this command, see

“Showing Port Statistics” on page 9-28.

Example

Console#show interfaces counters ethernet 1/7

Ethernet 1/7

Iftable stats:

Octets input: 30658, Octets output: 196550

Unicast input: 6, Unicast output: 5

Discard input: 0, Discard output: 0

Error input: 0, Error output: 0

Unknown protos input: 0, QLen output: 0

Extended iftable stats:

Multi-cast input: 0, Multi-cast output: 3064

Broadcast input: 262, Broadcast output: 1

Ether-like stats:

Alignment errors: 0, FCS errors: 0

Single Collision frames: 0, Multiple collision frames: 0

SQE Test errors: 0, Deferred transmissions: 0

Late collisions: 0, Excessive collisions: 0

Internal mac transmit errors: 0, Internal mac receive errors: 0

Frame too longs: 0, Carrier sense errors: 0

Symbol errors: 0

RMON stats:

Drop events: 0, Octets: 227208, Packets: 3338

Broadcast pkts: 263, Multi-cast pkts: 3064

Undersize pkts: 0, Oversize pkts: 0

Fragments: 0, Jabbers: 0

CRC align errors: 0, Collisions: 0

Packet size <= 64 octets: 3150, Packet size 65 to 127 octets: 139

Packet size 128 to 255 octets: 49, Packet size 256 to 511 octets: 0

Packet size 512 to 1023 octets: 0, Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets: 0

Console#

24-15

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

show interfaces switchport

This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified interfaces.

Syntax show interfaces switchport [ interface ] interface

• ethernet unit / port

unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-32)

Default Setting

Shows all interfaces.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Command Usage

If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed.

Example

This example shows the configuration setting for port 4.

Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/4

Broadcast Threshold: Enabled, 500 packets/second

Muilticast Threshold: Disabled

LACP Status: Disabled

Ingress Rate Limit: Disable, 1000M bits per second

Egress Rate Limit: Disable, 1000M bits per second

VLAN Membership Mode: Hybrid

Ingress Rule: Disabled

Acceptable Frame Type: All frames

Native VLAN: 1

Priority for Untagged Traffic: 0

GVRP Status: Disabled

Allowed VLAN: 1(u),

Forbidden VLAN:

Unknown multicast block: Disabled

Unknown unicast block: Disabled

Console#

24-16

SHOW INTERFACES SWITCHPORT

Table 24-2 show interfaces switchport - display description

Field Description

Broadcast threshold Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled; if enabled it also shows the threshold level

(page 24-10).

Muilticast Threshold Shows if multicast storm suppression is enabled or disabled; if enabled it also shows the threshold level

(page 24-10).

LACP status

Ingress/Egress rate limit

VLAN membership mode

Ingress rule

Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been

enabled or disabled (page 25-4).

Shows if rate limiting is enabled, and the current rate limit

(page 27-2).

Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid

(page 30-10).

Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled

(page 30-12).

Acceptable frame type

Native VLAN

Priority for untagged traffic

GVRP status

Allowed VLAN

Forbidden VLAN

Unknown multicast block

Unknown unicast block

Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or

tagged frames only (page 30-11).

Indicates the default Port VLAN ID (page 30-13).

Indicates the default priority for untagged frames

(page 31-4).

Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or

disabled (page 30-4).

Shows the VLANs this interface has joined, where “(u)”

indicates untagged and “(t)” indicates tagged (page 30-14).

Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join

via GVRP (page 30-15).

Shows if the unknown multicast packets are blocked

(page 24-11).

Shows if the unknown unicast packets are blocked

(page 24-11).

24-17

NTERFACE

OMMANDS

24-18

HAPTER

INK

GGREGATION

OMMANDS

Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link (i.e., trunk) to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery. Or you can use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) to automatically negotiate a trunk link between this switch and another network device. For static trunks, the switches have to comply with the

Cisco EtherChannel standard. For dynamic trunks, the switches have to comply with LACP. This switch supports up to 12 trunks. For example, a trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of 4 Gbps when operating at full duplex.

Table 25-1 Link Aggregation Commands

Command Function

Manual Configuration Commands interface port-channel Configures a trunk and enters interface configuration mode for the trunk channel-group Adds a port to a trunk

Dynamic Configuration Commands lacp lacp system-priority Configures a port's LACP system priority lacp admin-key

Configures LACP for the current interface

Configures a port's administration key

Mode

IC (Ethernet)

Page

25-1

INK

GGREGATION

OMMANDS

Table 25-1 Link Aggregation Commands (Continued)

Command lacp admin-key

Function

Configures an port channel’s administration key

Mode

IC (Port Channel) lacp port-priority Configures a port's LACP port priority

IC (Ethernet)

Trunk Status Display Commands show interfaces status port-channel

Shows trunk information NE, PE show lacp Shows LACP information PE

Page

Guidelines for Creating Trunks

General Guidelines –

• Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop.

• A trunk can have up to 8 ports.

• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports.

• All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner, including communication mode (i.e., speed and duplex mode), VLAN assignments, and CoS settings.

• Any of the Gigabit ports on the front panel can be trunked together, including ports of different media types.

• All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to, added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified port-channel.

• STP, VLAN, and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the specified port-channel.

Dynamically Creating a Port Channel –

Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria:

• Ports must have the same LACP system priority.

• Ports must have the same port admin key (Ethernet Interface).

25-2

CHANNEL

GROUP

• If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not set when a channel group is formed (i.e., it has the null value of 0), this key is set to the same value as the port admin key (lacp admin key -

Ethernet Interface) used by the interfaces that joined the group.

• However, if the port channel admin key is set, then the port admin key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group.

• If a link goes down, LACP port priority is used to select the backup link.

channel-group

This command adds a port to a trunk. Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk.

Syntax channel-group channel-id no channel-group channel-id - Trunk index (Range: 1-32)

Default Setting

The current port will be added to this trunk.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• When configuring static trunks, the switches must comply with the

Cisco EtherChannel standard.

• Use no channel-group to remove a port group from a trunk.

• Use no interfaces port-channel to remove a trunk from the switch.

25-3

INK

GGREGATION

OMMANDS

Example

The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 11:

Console(config)#interface port-channel 1

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11

Console(config-if)#channel-group 1

Console(config-if)#

lacp

This command enables 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol

(LACP) for the current interface. Use the no form to disable it.

Syntax

[ no ] lacp

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex, either by forced mode or auto-negotiation.

• A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available port-channel ID.

• If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports, the trunk will be activated automatically.

• If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have

LACP enabled, the additional ports will be placed in standby mode, and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails.

25-4

LACP

Example

The following shows LACP enabled on ports 46-48. Because LACP has also been enabled on the ports at the other end of the links, the show interfaces status port-channel 1 command shows that Trunk1 has been established.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/46

Console(config-if)#lacp

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/47

Console(config-if)#lacp

Console(config-if)#exit

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/48

Console(config-if)#lacp

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1

Information of Trunk 1

Basic information:

Port type: 1000T

Mac address: 00-30-F1-D4-73-A4

Configuration:

Name:

Port admin: Up

Speed-duplex: Auto

Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full

Flow control: Disabled

Port security: Disabled

Max MAC count: 0

Current status:

Created by: Lacp

Link status: Up

Operation speed-duplex: 1000full

Flow control type: None

Member Ports: Eth1/46, Eth1/47, Eth1/48,

Console#

25-5

INK

GGREGATION

OMMANDS

lacp system-priority

This command configures a port's LACP system priority. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax lacp { actor | partner } system-priority priority no lacp { actor | partner } system-priority

• actor - The local side an aggregate link.

• partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.

• priority - This priority is used to determine link aggregation group

(LAG) membership, and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations. (Range: 0-65535)

Default Setting

32768

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• Port must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG.

• System priority is combined with the switch’s MAC address to form the LAG identifier. This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems.

• Once the remote side of a link has been established, LACP operational settings are already in use on that side. Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3

Console(config-if)#

25-6

LACP ADMIN

KEY

THERNET

NTERFACE

)

lacp admin-key

(Ethernet Interface)

This command configures a port's LACP administration key. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax lacp { actor | partner } admin-key key

[ no ] lacp { actor | partner } admin-key

• actor - The local side an aggregate link.

• partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.

• key - The port admin key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same link aggregation group (LAG).

(Range: 0-65535)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if (1) the LACP system priority matches, (2) the LACP port admin key matches, and (3) the

LACP port channel key matches (if configured).

• If the port channel admin key ( lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not set when a channel group is formed (i.e., it has the null value of 0), this key is set to the same value as the port admin key ( lacp admin key -

Ethernet Interface) used by the interfaces that joined the group.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120

Console(config-if)#

25-7

INK

GGREGATION

OMMANDS

lacp admin-key

(Port Channel)

This command configures a port channel's LACP administration key string. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax lacp admin-key key

[ no ] lacp admin-key key - The port channel admin key is used to identify a specific link aggregation group (LAG) during local LACP setup on this switch.

(Range: 0-65535)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Port Channel)

Command Usage

• Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if (1) the LACP system priority matches, (2) the LACP port admin key matches, and (3) the

LACP port channel key matches (if configured).

• If the port channel admin key ( lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not set when a channel group is formed (i.e., it has the null value of 0), this key is set to the same value as the port admin key ( lacp admin key -

Ethernet Interface) used by the interfaces that joined the group. Note that when the LAG is no longer used, the port channel admin key is reset to 0.

Example

Console(config)#interface port-channel 1

Console(config-if)#lacp admin-key 3

Console(config-if)#

25-8

LACP PORT

PRIORITY

lacp port-priority

This command configures LACP port priority. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax lacp { actor | partner } port-priority priority no lacp { actor | partner } port-priority

• actor - The local side an aggregate link.

• partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.

• priority - LACP port priority is used to select a backup link.

(Range: 0-65535)

Default Setting

32768

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet)

Command Usage

• Setting a lower value indicates a higher effective priority.

• If an active port link goes down, the backup port with the highest priority is selected to replace the downed link. However, if two or more ports have the same LACP port priority, the port with the lowest physical port number will be selected as the backup port.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 128

Console(config-if)#

25-9

INK

GGREGATION

OMMANDS

show lacp

This command displays LACP information.

Syntax show lacp [ port-channel ] { counters | internal | neighbors | sys-id }

• port-channel - Local identifier for a link aggregation group.

(Range: 1-32)

• counters - Statistics for LACP protocol messages.

• internal - Configuration settings and operational state for local side.

• neighbors - Configuration settings and operational state for remote side.

• sys-id - Summary of system priority and MAC address for all channel groups.

Default Setting

Port Channel: all

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show lacp 1 counters

Port channel: 1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Eth 1/ 2

-------------------------------------------------------------------

LACPDUs Sent: 10

LACPDUs Receive: 5

Marker Sent: 0

Marker Receive: 0

LACPDUs Unknown Pkts: 0

25-10

SHOW LACP

Table 25-2 show lacp counters - display description

Field

LACPDUs Sent

LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group.

Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group.

Marker Received

Description

Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group.

LACPDUs Unknown

Pkts

Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group.

Number of frames received that either (1) Carry the Slow

Protocols Ethernet Type value, but contain an unknown

PDU, or (2) are addressed to the Slow Protocols group

MAC Address, but do not carry the Slow Protocols

Ethernet Type.

LACPDUs Illegal

Pkts

Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet

Type value, but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype.

Console#show lacp 1 internal

Port channel: 1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Oper Key: 3

Admin Key: 0

Eth 1/ 2

-------------------------------------------------------------------

LACPDUs Internal: 30 sec

LACP System Priority: 32768

LACP Port Priority: 32768

Admin Key: 3

Oper Key: 3

Admin State: defaulted, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity

Oper State: distributing, collecting, synchronization,

aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity

Table 25-3 show lacp internal - display description

Field

Oper Key

Admin Key

Description

Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port.

Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port.

25-11

INK

GGREGATION

OMMANDS

Table 25-3 show lacp internal - display description (Continued)

Field

LACPDUs

Internal

LACP System

Priority

LACP Port

Priority

Admin State,

Oper State

Description

Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information.

LACP system priority assigned to this port channel.

LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group.

Administrative or operational values of the actor’s state parameters:

• Expired – The actor’s receive machine is in the expired state;

• Defaulted – The actor’s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information, administratively configured for the partner.

• Synchronization – The System considers this link to be

IN_SYNC; i.e., it has been allocated to the correct Link

Aggregation Group, the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator, and the identity of the Link

Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted.

• Aggregation – The system considers this link to be aggregatable; i.e., a potential candidate for aggregation.

• Long timeout – Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate.

• LACP-Activity – Activity control value with regard to this link. (0: Passive; 1: Active)

25-12

SHOW LACP

Console#show lacp 1 neighbors

Port channel 1 neighbors

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Eth 1/1

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Partner Admin System ID: 32768, 00-00-00-00-00-00

Partner Oper System ID: 32768, 00-01-F4-78-AE-C0

Partner Admin Port Number: 2

Partner Oper Port Number: 2

Port Admin Priority: 32768

Port Oper Priority: 32768

Admin Key: 0

Oper Key: 3

Admin State: defaulted, distributing, collecting,

synchronization, long timeout,

Oper State: distributing, collecting, synchronization,

LACP-activity

Table 25-4 show lacp neighbors - display description

Field

Partner Admin

System ID

Partner Oper System

Partner Admin

Port Number

Partner Oper

Port Number

Oper Key

Description

LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the user.

LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol.

Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner.

Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port’s protocol partner.

Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner.

Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner.

Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner.

Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner.

Admin State

Oper State

Administrative values of the partner’s state parameters.

(See preceding table.)

Operational values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)

25-13

INK

GGREGATION

OMMANDS

Console#show lacp sysid

Port Channel System Priority System MAC Address

-------------------------------------------------------------------

1 32768 00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7

2 32768 00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7

3 32768 00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7

4 32768 00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7

5 32768 00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7

6 32768 00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7

7 32768 00-30-F1-D4-73-A0

8 32768 00-30-F1-D4-73-A0

9 32768 00-30-F1-D4-73-A0

10 32768 00-30-F1-D4-73-A0

11 32768 00-30-F1-D4-73-A0

Field

Channel group

System Priority *

System MAC

Address *

Table 25-5 show lacp sysid - display description

Description

A link aggregation group configured on this switch.

LACP system priority for this channel group.

System MAC address.

* The LACP system priority and system MAC address are concatenated to form the

LAG system ID.

25-14

HAPTER

IRROR

ORT

OMMANDS

This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port.

Table 26-1 Mirror Port Commands

Command port monitor

Function

Configures a mirror session

Mode Page

26-1

show port monitor Shows the configuration for a mirror port PE

26-2

port monitor

This command configures a mirror session. Use the no form to clear a mirror session.

Syntax port monitor interface [ rx | tx | both ] no port monitor interface

• interface - ethernet unit / port (source port)

unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)

• rx - Mirror received packets.

• tx - Mirror transmitted packets.

• both - Mirror both received and transmitted packets.

Default Setting

No mirror session is defined. When enabled, the default mirroring is for both received and transmitted packets.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, destination port)

26-1

IRROR

ORT

OMMANDS

Command Usage

• You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real-time analysis. You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the destination port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner.

• The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface.

• The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match, otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port.

• You can create multiple mirror sessions, but all sessions must share the same destination port. However, you should avoid sending too much traffic to the destination port from multiple source ports.

Example

The following example configures the switch to mirror all packets from port 6 to 11:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11

Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6 both

Console(config-if)#

show port monitor

This command displays mirror information.

Syntax show port monitor [ interface ] interface - ethernet unit / port (source port)

• unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

• port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)

Default Setting

Shows all sessions.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

26-2

SHOW PORT MONITOR

Command Usage

This command displays the currently configured source port, destination port, and mirror mode (i.e., RX, TX, RX/TX).

Example

The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11

Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show port monitor

Port Mirroring

-------------------------------------

Destination port(listen port):Eth1/1

Source port(monitored port) :Eth1/6

Mode :RX/TX

Console#

26-3

IRROR

ORT

OMMANDS

26-4

HAPTER

ATE

IMIT

OMMANDS

This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface. The maximum data rate may also be set for specific Class of Service (CoS) priorities for traffic transmitted out of an interface.

Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network. Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted, while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped.

Table 27-1 Rate Limit Commands

Command rate-limit

Function

Configures the maximum input or output rate for a port rate-limit cos Configures the maximum output rate based on CoS priorities show rate-limit cos Displays the output rate limit for CoS priorities

Mode Page

27-2

27-3

27-5

27-1

ATE

IMIT

OMMANDS

rate-limit

This command defines the rate limit for a specific interface. Use this command without specifying a rate to restore the default rate. Use the no form to restore the default status of disabled.

Syntax rate-limit { input | output } [ rate ] no rate-limit { input | output }

• input – Input rate

• output – Output rate

• rate – Maximum value in Mbps. (Range:

Fast Ethernet - 1 to 100 Mbps, Gigabit Ethernet - 1 to 1000 Mbps)

Default Setting

Fast Ethernet: 100 Mbps

Gigabit Ethernet: 1000 Mbps

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#rate-limit input 600

Console(config-if)#

Related Command

the overall limit set the rate-limit

27-2

RATE

LIMIT COS

rate-limit cos

This command defines the output rate limit for an interface based on specified CoS priorities. Use the no form to restore the default status of disabled.

Syntax rate-limit cos cos_value rate no rate-limit cos

• cos_value – A number from 0 to 7, where 7 is the highest priority.

• rate – Maximum value in Mbps. (Range: Fast Ethernet - 1 to 100

Mbps, Gigabit Ethernet - 1 to 1000 Mbps)

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• When priority-based rate limiting is implemented, the combined rate of all traffic matching the specified priority-based rate limits cannot exceed the overall output rate limit specified by the

rate-limit

output

command (see page 27-2).

• If the rate exceeds the limit set for a specific priority, frames of that type are dropped until the rate falls below the limit. If the rate exceeds

output command, frames of any priority type may be dropped until the rate falls back below the limit.

• This switch supports Class of Service by using eight priority queues.

Eight separate traffic classes are defined in IEEE 802.1p. The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the

IEEE 802.1p standard as shown below. To maintain line rate throughput when setting rate limits for CoS priorities, only four priority classes are supported by the switch, and are mapped from the eight default priority classes as shown below.

27-3

ATE

IMIT

OMMANDS

Table 27-2 Mapping Default to Per Port CoS Priority Levels

Queue

Priority

(default CoS)

Priority

(per port CoS)

Example

This example sets the maximum output rate for CoS traffic of priority level

0 to 50 Mbps on Port 1.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#rate-limit cos 0 50

Console(config-if)#

27-4

SHOW RATE

LIMIT COS

show rate-limit cos

This command displays the output rate limit for CoS priorities.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

If no rate limit is set, this command displays a value of “0” for the corresponding interface.

Example

The following example shows that the rate limit set in the preceding example for CoS priority class 0 affects both priority class 0 and 3, which

are now effectively treated as priority class 1. Table 27-2 on page 27-4

illustrates the priority mapping.

Console#show rate-limit cos

Interface Cos Ratelimit

--------- --- ---------

Eth 1/1 0 50

Eth 1/1 1 0

Eth 1/1 2 0

Eth 1/1 3 50

Eth 1/1 4 0

Eth 1/1 5 0

Eth 1/1 6 0

27-5

ATE

IMIT

OMMANDS

27-6

HAPTER

DDRESS

ABLE

OMMANDS

These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified addresses, displaying current entries, clearing the table, or setting the aging time.

Table 28-1 Address Table Commands

Command mac-address-table static clear mac-address-table dynamic show mac-address-table

Function

Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN

Removes any learned entries from the forwarding database

Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding database mac-address-table aging-time Sets the aging time of the address table show mac-address-table aging-time

Shows the aging time for the address table

Mode Page

28-1

DDRESS

ABLE

OMMANDS

mac-address-table static

This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN. Use the no form to remove an address.

Syntax mac-address-table static mac-address interface interface vlan vlan-id [ action ] no mac-address-table static mac-address vlan vlan-id

• mac-address - MAC address.

• interface

• ethernet unit / port

unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-32)

• vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4093)

• action -

delete-on-reset - Assignment lasts until the switch is reset.

permanent - Assignment is permanent.

Default Setting

No static addresses are defined. The default mode is permanent .

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within a specific VLAN. Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC Address Table. Static addresses have the following characteristics:

• Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given interface link is down.

• Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved. When a static address is seen on another interface, the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table.

28-2

CLEAR MAC

ADDRESS

TABLE DYNAMIC

• A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is removed with the no form of this command.

Example

Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-e0-29-94-34-de interface ethernet 1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset

Console(config)#

clear mac-address-table dynamic

This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database and clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#clear mac-address-table dynamic

Console#

28-3

DDRESS

ABLE

OMMANDS

show mac-address-table

This command shows classes of entries in the bridge-forwarding database.

Syntax show mac-address-table [ address mac-address [ mask ]]

[ interface interface ] [ vlan vlan-id ]

[ sort { address | vlan | interface }]

• mac-address - MAC address.

• mask - Bits to match in the address.

• interface

• ethernet unit / port

unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-32)

• vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4093)

• sort - Sort by address, vlan or interface.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each interface. Note that the Type field may include the following types:

- Learned - Dynamic address entries

- Permanent - Static entry

- Delete-on-reset - Static entry to be deleted when system is reset

• The mask should be hexadecimal numbers (representing an equivalent bit mask) in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx that is applied to the specified

MAC address. Enter hexadecimal numbers, where an equivalent binary bit “0” means to match a bit and “1” means to ignore a bit. For example, a mask of 00-00-00-00-00-00 means an exact match, and a mask of FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF means “any.”

28-4

MAC

ADDRESS

TABLE AGING

TIME

• The maximum number of address entries is 8191.

Example

Console#show mac-address-table

Interface MAC Address VLAN Type

--------- ----------------- ---- -----------------

Eth 1/ 1 00-e0-29-94-34-de 1 Delete-on-reset

Console#

mac-address-table aging-time

This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table. Use the no form to restore the default aging time.

Syntax mac-address-table aging-time seconds no mac-address-table aging-time seconds - Aging time. (Range: 10-1000000 seconds; 0 to disable aging)

Default Setting

300 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information.

Example

Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 100

Console(config)#

28-5

DDRESS

ABLE

OMMANDS

show mac-address-table aging-time

This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show mac-address-table aging-time

Aging time: 300 sec.

Console#

28-6

HAPTER

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree

Algorithm (STA) globally for the switch, and commands that configure

STA for the selected interface.

Table 29-1 Spanning Tree Commands

Command spanning-tree

Function

Enables the spanning tree protocol spanning-tree mode spanning-tree forward-time

Configures STP, RSTP or MSTP mode GC

Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time spanning-tree hello-time Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time

Mode Page

spanning-tree max-age Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age spanning-tree priority Configures the spanning tree bridge priority spanning-tree path-cost method spanning-tree transmission-limit

Configures the path cost method for

RSTP/MSTP

Configures the transmission limit for

RSTP/MSTP

Changes to MSTP configuration mode GC spanning-tree mst-configuration mst vlan MST

mst priority name

Adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance

Configures the priority of a spanning tree instance

Configures the name for the multiple spanning tree

MST

29-12

29-13

29-1

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

Table 29-1 Spanning Tree Commands (Continued)

Command revision

Mode Page

MST

29-14

max-hops Configures the maximum number of hops allowed in the region before a

BPDU is discarded

MST

Disables spanning tree for an interface IC

29-14

29-15

spanning-tree spanning-disabled spanning-tree cost spanning-tree port-priority

Configures the spanning tree path cost of an interface

Configures the spanning tree priority of an interface

IC spanning-tree edge-port Enables fast forwarding for edge ports IC spanning-tree portfast Sets an interface to fast forwarding IC

IC spanning-tree link-type Configures the link type for RSTP/

MSTP spanning-tree mst cost Configures the path cost of an instance in the MST spanning-tree mst port-priority

Configures the priority of an instance in the MST

spanning-tree protocol-migration show spanning-tree show spanning-tree mst configuration

Function

Configures the revision number for the multiple spanning tree

Re-checks the appropriate BPDU format

Shows spanning tree configuration for the common spanning tree (i.e., overall bridge), a selected interface, or an instance within the multiple spanning tree

Shows the multiple spanning tree configuration

29-24

29-25

29-27

29-2

SPANNING

TREE

spanning-tree

This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch. Use the no form to disable it.

Syntax

[ no ] spanning-tree

Default Setting

Spanning tree is enabled.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

Example

This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch:

Console(config)#spanning-tree

Console(config)#

29-3

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

spanning-tree mode

This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax spanning-tree mode { stp | rstp | mstp } no spanning-tree mode

• stp - Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)

• rstp - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)

• mstp - Multiple Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1s)

Default Setting rstp

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• Spanning Tree Protocol

Uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D

BPDUs. This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network. If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network, the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops, thus isolating group members. When operating multiple VLANs, we recommend selecting the MSTP option.

• Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits, as described below:

- STP Mode – If the switch receives an 802.1D BPDU after a port’s migration delay timer expires, the switch assumes it is connected to an 802.1D bridge and starts using only 802.1D BPDUs.

- RSTP Mode – If RSTP is using 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires, RSTP

29-4

SPANNING

TREE FORWARD

TIME restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port.

• Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

- A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments.

- Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes.

Changing modes stops all spanning-tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode, temporarily disrupting user traffic.

Example

The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree:

Console(config)#spanning-tree mode rstp

Console(config)#

spanning-tree forward-time

This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax spanning-tree forward-time seconds no spanning-tree forward-time seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 4 - 30 seconds)

The minimum value is the higher of 4 or [(max-age / 2) + 1].

Default Setting

15 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

29-5

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

Command Usage

This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding).

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree forward-time 20

Console(config)#

spanning-tree hello-time

This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax spanning-tree hello-time time no spanning-tree hello-time time - Time in seconds. (Range: 1-10 seconds).

The maximum value is the lower of 10 or [(max-age / 2) -1].

Default Setting

2 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

This command sets the time interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a configuration message.

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree hello-time 5

Console(config)#

29-6

SPANNING

TREE MAX

AGE

Related Commands

spanning-tree forward-time (29-5)

spanning-tree max-age (29-7)

spanning-tree max-age

This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax spanning-tree max-age seconds no spanning-tree max-age seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 6-40 seconds)

The minimum value is the higher of 6 or [2 x (hello-time + 1)].

The maximum value is the lower of 40 or [2 x (forward-time - 1)].

Default Setting

20 seconds

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network.

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree max-age 40

Console(config)#

29-7

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

Related Commands

spanning-tree forward-time (29-5)

spanning-tree hello-time (29-6)

spanning-tree priority

This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax spanning-tree priority priority no spanning-tree priority priority - Priority of the bridge. (Range: 0 - 65535)

(Range – 0-61440, in steps of 4096; Options: 0, 4096,

8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864,

40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440)

Default Setting

32768

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated port. The device with the highest priority (i.e., lower numeric value) becomes the STA root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device.

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree priority 40000

Console(config)#

29-8

SPANNING

TREE PATHCOST METHOD

spanning-tree pathcost method

This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning

Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax spanning-tree pathcost method { long | short } no spanning-tree pathcost method

• long - Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 1-200,000,000.

This method is based on the IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree

Protocol.

• short - Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 1-65535.

This method is based on the IEEE 802.1 Spanning Tree Protocol.

Default Setting

Long method

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media.

Note that path cost (page 29-16) takes precedence over port priority

(page 29-18).

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree pathcost method long

Console(config)#

29-9

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

spanning-tree transmission-limit

This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP/MSTP BPDUs. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax spanning-tree transmission-limit count no spanning-tree transmission-limit count - The transmission limit in seconds. (Range: 1-10)

Default Setting

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs.

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree transmission-limit 4

Console(config)#

spanning-tree mst-configuration

This command changes to Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) configuration mode.

Default Setting

No VLANs are mapped to any MST instance.

The region name is set the switch’s MAC address.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

Console(config)#spanning-tree mst-configuration

Console(config-mstp)#

29-10

MST VLAN

Related Commands

mst vlan (29-11)

mst priority (29-12)

name (29-13)

revision (29-14) max-hops (29-14)

mst vlan

This command adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance. Use the no form to remove the specified VLANs. Using the no form without any VLAN parameters to remove all VLANs.

Syntax

[ no ] mst instance_id vlan vlan-range

• instance_id - Instance identifier of the spanning tree. (Range: 0-4094)

• vlan-range - Range of VLANs. (Range: 1-4093)

Default Setting none

Command Mode

MST Configuration

Command Usage

• Use this command to group VLANs into spanning tree instances.

• By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree

(MSTI 0) that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region.

This switch supports up to 58 instances. You should try to group

VLANs which cover the same general area of your network. However, remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI

Region (page 29-13) with the same set of instances, and the same

29-11

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS instance (on each bridge) with the same set of VLANs. Also, note that

RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node, connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree.

Example

Console(config-mstp)#mst 1 vlan 2-5

Console(config-mstp)#

mst priority

This command configures the priority of a spanning tree instance. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax mst instance_id priority priority no mst instance_id priority

• instance_id - Instance identifier of the spanning tree. (Range: 0-4094)

• priority - Priority of the a spanning tree instance.

(Range: 0-61440 in steps of 4096; Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288,

16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152,

53248, 57344, 61440)

Default Setting

32768

Command Mode

MST Configuration

Command Usage

• MST priority is used in selecting the root bridge and alternate bridge of the specified instance. The device with the highest priority (i.e., lowest numerical value) becomes the MSTI root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device.

• You can set this switch to act as the MSTI root device by specifying a priority of 0, or as the MSTI alternate device by specifying a priority of 16384.

29-12

NAME

Example

Console(config-mstp)#mst 1 priority 4096

Console(config-mstp)#

name

This command configures the name for the multiple spanning tree region in which this switch is located. Use the no form to clear the name.

Syntax name name name - Name of the spanning tree.

Default Setting

Switch’s MAC address

Command Mode

MST Configuration

Command Usage

The MST region name and revision number (page 29-14) are used to

designate a unique MST region. A bridge (i.e., spanning-tree compliant device such as this switch) can only belong to one MST region. And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances.

Example

Console(config-mstp)#name R&D

Console(config-mstp)#

Related Commands

revision (29-14)

29-13

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

revision

This command configures the revision number for this multiple spanning tree configuration of this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax revision number number - Revision number of the spanning tree.

(Range: 0-65535)

Default Setting

Command Mode

MST Configuration

Command Usage

The MST region name (page 29-13) and revision number are used to

Example

Console(config-mstp)#revision 1

Console(config-mstp)#

Related Commands

name (29-13)

max-hops

This command configures the maximum number of hops in the region before a BPDU is discarded. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax max-hops hop-number hop-number - Maximum hop number for multiple spanning tree. (Range: 1-40)

29-14

SPANNING

TREE SPANNING

DISABLED

Default Setting

Command Mode

MST Configuration

Command Usage

An MSTI region is treated as a single node by the STP and RSTP protocols. Therefore, the message age for BPDUs inside an MSTI region is never changed. However, each spanning tree instance within a region, and the internal spanning tree (IST) that connects these instances use a hop count to specify the maximum number of bridges that will propagate a BPDU. Each bridge decrements the hop count by one before passing on the BPDU. When the hop count reaches zero, the message is dropped.

Example

Console(config-mstp)#max-hops 30

Console(config-mstp)#

spanning-tree spanning-disabled

This command disables the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface. Use the no form to reenable the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface.

Syntax

[ no ] spanning-tree spanning-disabled

Default Setting

Enabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

29-15

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

Example

This example disables the spanning tree algorithm for port 5.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree spanning-disabled

Console(config-if)#

spanning-tree cost

This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface. Use the no form to restore the default auto-configuration mode.

Syntax spanning-tree cost cost no spanning-tree cost cost - The path cost for the port.

(Range: 0 for auto-configuration, 1-65535 for short path cost method 28 , 1-200,000,000 for long path cost method)

Table 29-2 Recommended STA Path Cost Range

Port Type

Fast Ethernet

Gigabit Ethernet

IEEE 802.1D-1998

10-60

3-10

IEEE 802.1w-2001

20,000-2,000,000

2,000-200,000

Table 29-3 Recommended STA Path Cost

Port Type Link Type IEEE 802.1D-1998 IEEE 802.1w-2001

Fast

Ethernet

Half Duplex

Full Duplex

Trunk

200,000

100,000

50,000

Gigabit

Ethernet

Full Duplex

Trunk

10,000

5,000

28. Use the spanning-tree pathcost method command on page 29-9 to set the path cost method.

29-16

SPANNING

TREE COST

Default Setting

By default, the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port, and configures the path cost according to the values shown below. Path cost “0” is used to indicate auto-configuration mode. When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65,535, the default is set to 65,535.

Table 29-4 Default STA Path Costs

Port Type

Fast Ethernet

Link Type

Half Duplex

Full Duplex

Trunk

Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex

Trunk

IEEE 802.1w-2001

200,000

100,000

50,000

10,000

5,000

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media.

• Path cost takes precedence over port priority.

• When the spanning-tree pathcost method (page 29-9) is set to short,

the maximum value for path cost is 65,535.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 50

Console(config-if)#

29-17

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

spanning-tree port-priority

This command configures the priority for the specified interface. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax spanning-tree port-priority priority no spanning-tree port-priority priority - The priority for a port. (Range: 0-240, in steps of 16)

Default Setting

128

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the

Spanning Tree Algorithm. If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree.

• Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-priority 0

Related Commands

spanning-tree cost (29-16)

spanning-tree edge-port

This command specifies an interface as an edge port. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

[ no ] spanning-tree edge-port

29-18

SPANNING

TREE PORTFAST

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node. Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state, and also overcomes other STA-related timeout problems. However, remember that Edge

Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end-node device.

• This command has the same effect as the

spanning-tree portfast

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree edge-port

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

spanning-tree portfast (29-19)

spanning-tree portfast

This command sets an interface to fast forwarding. Use the no form to disable fast forwarding.

Syntax

[ no ] spanning-tree portfast

Default Setting

Disabled

29-19

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• This command is used to enable/disable the fast spanning-tree mode for the selected port. In this mode, ports skip the Discarding and

Learning states, and proceed straight to Forwarding.

• Since end-nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can be passed through the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard convergence time. Fast forwarding can achieve quicker convergence for end-node workstations and servers, and also overcome other STA related timeout problems. (Remember that fast forwarding should only be enabled for ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for an end-node device.)

• This command is the same as spanning-tree edge-port , and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products. Note that this command may be removed for future software versions.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#bridge-group 1 portfast

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

spanning-tree edge-port (29-18)

29-20

SPANNING

TREE LINK

TYPE

spanning-tree link-type

This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree and

Multiple Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax spanning-tree link-type { auto | point-to-point | shared } no spanning-tree link-type

• auto - Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting.

• point-to-point - Point-to-point link.

• shared - Shared medium.

Default Setting auto

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• Specify a point-to-point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly one other bridge, or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges.

• When automatic detection is selected, the switch derives the link type from the duplex mode. A full-duplex interface is considered a point-to-point link, while a half-duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link.

• RSTP only works on point-to-point links between two bridges. If you designate a port as a shared link, RSTP is forbidden. Since MSTP is an extension of RSTP, this same restriction applies.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree link-type point-to-point

29-21

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

spanning-tree mst cost

This command configures the path cost on a spanning instance in the

Multiple Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default auto-configuration mode.

Syntax spanning-tree mst instance_id cost cost no spanning-tree mst instance_id cost

• instance_id - Instance identifier of the spanning tree.

(Range: 0-4094, no leading zeroes)

• cost - Path cost for an interface. (Range: 1-200,000,000)

(Range: 0 for auto-configuration, 1-65535 for short path cost method 29 , 1-200,000,000 for long path cost method)

Table 29-3 on page 29-16.

Default Setting

When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65,535, the default

is set to 65,535. The default path costs are listed in Table 29-4 on page 29-17.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• Each spanning-tree instance is associated with a unique set of VLAN

IDs.

• This command is used by the multiple spanning-tree algorithm to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values

29. Use the spanning-tree pathcost method command on page 29-9 to set the path cost method.

29-22

SPANNING

TREE MST PORT

PRIORITY should be assigned to interfaces attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to interfaces with slower media.

• Use the no spanning-tree mst cost command to specify auto-configuration mode.

• Path cost takes precedence over interface priority.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst 1 cost 50

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

spanning-tree mst port-priority (29-23)

spanning-tree mst port-priority

This command configures the interface priority on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax spanning-tree mst instance_id port-priority priority no spanning-tree mst instance_id port-priority

• instance_id - Instance identifier of the spanning tree.

(Range: 0-4094, no leading zeroes)

• priority - Priority for an interface. (Range: 0-240 in steps of 16)

Default Setting

128

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

This command defines the priority for the use of an interface in the multiple spanning-tree. If the path cost for all interfaces on a switch are the same, the interface with the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree.

29-23

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

Where more than one interface is assigned the highest priority, the interface with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5

Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst 1 port-priority 0

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

spanning-tree mst cost (29-22)

spanning-tree protocol-migration

This command re-checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interface.

Syntax spanning-tree protocol-migration interface interface

• ethernet unit / port

unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-32)

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP-compatible mode. However, you can also use the spanning-tree protocol-migration command at any time to manually re-check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces (i.e., RSTP or STP-compatible).

29-24

SHOW SPANNING

TREE

Example

Console#spanning-tree protocol-migration eth 1/5

Console#

show spanning-tree

This command shows the configuration for the common spanning tree

(CST) or for an instance within the multiple spanning tree (MST).

Syntax show spanning-tree [ interface | mst instance_id ]

• interface

• ethernet unit / port

unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-32)

• instance_id - Instance identifier of the multiple spanning tree.

(Range: 0-4094, no leading zeroes)

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

• Use the show spanning-tree command with no parameters to display the spanning tree configuration for the switch for the

Common Spanning Tree (CST) and for every interface in the tree.

• Use the show spanning-tree interface command to display the spanning tree configuration for an interface within the Common

Spanning Tree (CST).

• Use the show spanning-tree mst instance_id command to display the spanning tree configuration for an instance within the Multiple

Spanning Tree (MST).

• For a description of the items displayed under “Spanning-tree

information,” see “Configuring Global Settings” on page 11-8. For a

29-25

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS description of the items displayed for specific interfaces, see

“Displaying Interface Settings” on page 11-13.

Example

Console#show spanning-tree

Spanning-tree information

---------------------------------------------------------------

Spanning tree mode: MSTP

Spanning tree enable/disable: enable

Instance: 0

Vlans configuration: 1-4093

Priority: 32768

Bridge Hello Time (sec.): 2

Bridge Max Age (sec.): 20

Bridge Forward Delay (sec.): 15

Root Hello Time (sec.): 2

Root Max Age (sec.): 20

Root Forward Delay (sec.): 15

Max hops: 20

Remaining hops: 20

Designated Root: 32768.0.0000ABCD0000

Current root port: 1

Current root cost: 10000

Number of topology changes: 1

Last topology changes time (sec.): 22

Transmission limit: 3

Path Cost Method: long

---------------------------------------------------------------

Eth 1/ 1 information

---------------------------------------------------------------

Admin status: enable

Role: root

State: forwarding

External admin path cost: 10000

Internal admin cost: 10000

External oper path cost: 10000

Internal oper path cost: 10000

Priority: 128

Designated cost: 200000

Designated port: 128.24

Designated root: 32768.0.0000ABCD0000

Designated bridge: 32768.0.0030F1552000

Fast forwarding: disable

Forward transitions: 1

Admin edge port: enable

Oper edge port: disable

Admin Link type: auto

Oper Link type: point-to-point

Spanning Tree Status: enable

29-26

SHOW SPANNING

TREE MST CONFIGURATION

show spanning-tree mst configuration

This command shows the configuration of the multiple spanning tree.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show spanning-tree mst configuration

Mstp Configuration Information

--------------------------------------------------------------

Configuration name: R&D

Revision level:0

Instance Vlans

--------------------------------------------------------------

1 2

Console#

29-27

PANNING

REE

OMMANDS

29-28

HAPTER

VLAN C

OMMANDS

A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network, but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment.

This section describes commands used to create VLAN groups, add port members, specify how VLAN tagging is used, and enable automatic

VLAN registration for the selected interface.

Table 30-1 VLAN Commands

Command Groups Function

GVRP and

Bridge Extension

Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic

VLAN learning; shows the configuration for bridge extension MIB

Editing VLAN Groups Sets up VLAN groups, including name, VID and state

Configuring VLAN

Interfaces

Configures VLAN interface parameters, including ingress and egress tagging mode, ingress filtering, PVID, and GVRP

Displaying VLAN

Information

Configuring Private

VLANs

Configuring Protocol

VLANs

Configuring 802.1Q

Tunneling

Displays VLAN groups, status, port members, and MAC addresses

Configures private VLANs, including uplink and downlink ports

Configures protocol-based VLANs based on frame type and protocol

Configures IEEE 802.1Q tunneling (QinQ) to segregate and preserve customer VLAN IDs for traffic crossing the service provider network

Page

30-1

VLAN C

OMMANDS

GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands

GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network. This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces and globally for the switch, as well as how to display default configuration settings for the Bridge Extension

MIB.

Table 30-2 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands

Command bridge-ext gvrp

Function

Enables GVRP globally for the switch show bridge-ext Shows the global bridge extension configuration

Enables GVRP for an interface switchport gvrp switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface show gvrp configuration Displays GVRP configuration for the selected interface garp timer Sets the GARP timer for the selected function show garp timer Shows the GARP timer for the selected function

Mode Page

NE,

bridge-ext gvrp

This command enables GVRP globally for the switch. Use the no form to disable it.

Syntax

[ no ] bridge-ext gvrp

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Global Configuration

30-2

GVRP

AND

RIDGE

XTENSION

OMMANDS

Command Usage

GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network. This function should be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration, and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch.

Example

Console(config)#bridge-ext gvrp

Console(config)#

show bridge-ext

This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Command Usage

See “Displaying Basic VLAN Information” on page 12-6 and

“Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities” on page 4-10 for a

description of the displayed items.

Example

Console#show bridge-ext

Max support VLAN numbers: 256

Max support VLAN ID: 4093

Extended multicast filtering services: No

Static entry individual port: Yes

VLAN learning: IVL

Configurable PVID tagging: Yes

Local VLAN capable: No

Traffic classes: Enabled

Global GVRP status: Disabled

GMRP: Disabled

Console#

30-3

VLAN C

OMMANDS

switchport gvrp

This command enables GVRP for a port. Use the no form to disable it.

Syntax

[ no ] switchport gvrp

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport gvrp

Console(config-if)#

show gvrp configuration

This command shows if GVRP is enabled.

Syntax show gvrp configuration [ interface ] interface

• ethernet unit / port

unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-32)

Default Setting

Shows both global and interface-specific configuration.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show gvrp configuration ethernet 1/7

Eth 1/ 7:

GVRP configuration: Disabled

Console#

30-4

GVRP

AND

RIDGE

XTENSION

OMMANDS

garp timer

This command sets the values for the join, leave and leaveall timers. Use the no form to restore the timers’ default values.

Syntax garp timer { join | leave | leaveall } timer_value no garp timer { join | leave | leaveall }

• { join | leave | leaveall } - Which timer to set.

• timer_value - Value of timer.

Ranges: join: 20-1000 centiseconds leave: 60-3000 centiseconds leaveall: 500-18000 centiseconds

Default Setting join: 20 centiseconds leave: 60 centiseconds leaveall: 1000 centiseconds

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN. The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate. These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with

GMRP or GVRP registration/deregistration.

• Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs.

• Timer values must meet the following restrictions:

- leave >= (2 x join)

- leaveall > leave

Note: Set GVRP timers on all Layer 2 devices connected in the same network to the same values. Otherwise, GVRP may not operate successfully.

30-5

VLAN C

OMMANDS

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#garp timer join 100

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

show garp timer (30-6)

show garp timer

This command shows the GARP timers for the selected interface.

Syntax show garp timer [ interface ] interface

• ethernet unit / port

unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-32)

Default Setting

Shows all GARP timers.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show garp timer ethernet 1/1

Eth 1/ 1 GARP timer status:

Join timer: 20 centiseconds

Leave timer: 60 centiseconds

Leaveall timer: 1000 centiseconds

Console#

Related Commands

garp timer (30-5)

30-6

DITING

VLAN G

ROUPS

Editing VLAN Groups

Table 30-3 Commands for Editing VLAN Groups

Command vlan database vlan

Function

Enters VLAN database mode to add, change, and delete VLANs

Configures a VLAN, including VID, name and state

Mode Page

30-7

30-8

vlan database

This command enters VLAN database mode. All commands in this mode will take effect immediately.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• Use the VLAN database command mode to add, change, and delete

VLANs. After finishing configuration changes, you can display the

VLAN settings by entering the show vlan command.

• Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode and add or remove ports from a VLAN. The results of these commands are written to the running-configuration file, and you can display this file by entering the show running-config command.

Example

Console(config)#vlan database

Console(config-vlan)#

Related Commands

show vlan (30-16)

30-7

VLAN C

OMMANDS

vlan

This command configures a VLAN. Use the no form to restore the default settings or delete a VLAN.

Syntax vlan vlan-id [ name vlan-name ] media ethernet

[ state { active | suspend }] no vlan vlan-id [ name | state ]

• vlan-id - ID of configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4093, no leading zeroes)

• name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.

vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.

• media ethernet - Ethernet media type.

• state - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state.

active - VLAN is operational.

suspend - VLAN is suspended. Suspended VLANs do not pass packets.

Default Setting

By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active.

Command Mode

VLAN Database Configuration

Command Usage

• no vlan vlan-id deletes the VLAN.

• no vlan vlan-id name removes the VLAN name.

• no vlan vlan-id state returns the VLAN to the default state

(i.e., active).

• You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch.

Example

The following example adds a VLAN, using VLAN ID 105 and name

RD5. The VLAN is activated by default.

Console(config)#vlan database

Console(config-vlan)#vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet

Console(config-vlan)#

30-8

ONFIGURING

VLAN I

NTERFACES

Related Commands

show vlan (30-16)

Configuring VLAN Interfaces

Table 30-4 Commands for Configuring VLAN Interfaces

Command interface vlan switchport mode switchport acceptable-frame-types switchport ingress-filtering

Function

Enters interface configuration mode for a specified VLAN

Configures VLAN membership mode for an interface

Configures frame types to be accepted by an interface

Enables ingress filtering on an interface IC switchport native vlan Configures the PVID (native VLAN) of an interface switchport allowed vlan Configures the VLANs associated with an interface switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface switchport forbidden vlan switchport priority default

Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface

Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames

Mode Page

interface vlan

This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs, which is used to configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface.

Syntax interface vlan vlan-id vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4093, no leading zeroes)

30-9

VLAN C

OMMANDS

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to VLAN 1, and then assign an IP address to the VLAN:

Console(config)#interface vlan 1

Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.254 255.255.255.0

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

shutdown (24-9)

switchport mode

This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax switchport mode { hybrid | trunk | dot1q-tunnel } no switchport mode

• hybrid - Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface. The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames.

• trunk - Specifies a port as an end-point for a VLAN trunk. A trunk is a direct link between two switches, so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN. Note that frames belonging to the port’s default VLAN (i.e., associated with the PVID) are also transmitted as tagged frames.

• dot1q-tunnel

- For an explanation of this command see page 30-25.

Default Setting

All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

30-10

ONFIGURING

VLAN I

NTERFACES

Example

The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1, and then set the switchport mode to hybrid:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport mode hybrid

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

switchport acceptable-frame-types (30-11)

switchport acceptable-frame-types

This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax switchport acceptable-frame-types { all | tagged } no switchport acceptable-frame-types

• all - The port accepts all frames, tagged or untagged.

• tagged - The port only receives tagged frames.

Default Setting

All frame types

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

When set to receive all frame types, any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN.

Example

The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to tagged frames:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport acceptable-frame-types tagged

Console(config-if)#

30-11

VLAN C

OMMANDS

Related Commands

switchport mode (30-10)

switchport ingress-filtering

This command enables ingress filtering for an interface. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax

[ no ] switchport ingress-filtering

Default Setting

Disabled

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames.

• If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for

VLANs for which it is not a member, these frames will be flooded to all other ports (except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port).

• If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for

VLANs for which it is not a member, these frames will be discarded.

• Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames, such as GVRP or STA. However, they do affect VLAN dependent

BPDU frames, such as GMRP.

Example

The following example shows how to set the interface to port 1 and then enable ingress filtering:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport ingress-filtering

Console(config-if)#

30-12

ONFIGURING

VLAN I

NTERFACES

switchport native vlan

This command configures the PVID (i.e., default VLAN ID) for a port.

Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax switchport native vlan vlan-id no switchport native vlan vlan-id - Default VLAN ID for a port. (Range: 1-4093, no leading zeroes)

Default Setting

VLAN 1

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN, the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member. For all other VLANs, an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group.

• If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid , the PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port.

Example

The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport native vlan 3

Console(config-if)#

30-13

VLAN C

OMMANDS

switchport allowed vlan

This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface. Use the no form to restore the default.

Syntax switchport allowed vlan { add vlan-list [ tagged | untagged ] | remove vlan-list } no switchport allowed vlan

• add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add.

• remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove.

• vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. Do not enter leading zeros. (Range: 1-4093).

Default Setting

All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default.

The default frame type is untagged.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• A port, or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid , must be assigned to at least one VLAN as untagged.

• If a trunk has switchport mode set to trunk (i.e., 1Q Trunk), then you can only assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member.

• Frames are always tagged within the switch. The tagged/untagged parameter used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress.

• If none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs, the interface should be added to these VLANs as an untagged member. Otherwise, it is only necessary to add at most one VLAN as untagged, and this should correspond to the native VLAN for the interface.

30-14

ONFIGURING

VLAN I

NTERFACES

• If a VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that interface, the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that interface.

Example

The following example shows how to add VLANs 1, 2, 5 and 6 to the allowed list as tagged VLANs for port 1:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 1,2,5,6 tagged

Console(config-if)#

switchport forbidden vlan

This command configures forbidden VLANs. Use the no form to remove the list of forbidden VLANs.

Syntax switchport forbidden vlan { add vlan-list | remove vlan-list } no switchport forbidden vlan

• add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add.

• remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove.

• vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. Do not enter leading zeros. (Range: 1-4093).

Default Setting

No VLANs are included in the forbidden list.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to the specified interface via GVRP.

• If a VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an interface, then you cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs for that same interface.

30-15

VLAN C

OMMANDS

Example

The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to

VLAN 3:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport forbidden vlan add 3

Console(config-if)#

Displaying VLAN Information

This section describes commands used to display VLAN information.

Table 30-5 Commands for Displaying VLAN Information

Command show vlan show interfaces status vlan show interfaces switchport

Function

Shows VLAN information

Displays status for the specified VLAN interface

Displays the administrative and operational status of an interface

Mode Page

NE,

30-16

24-13

NE,

24-16

show vlan

This command shows VLAN information.

Syntax show vlan [ id vlan-id | name vlan-name ]

• id - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID. vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4093, no leading zeroes)

• name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name. vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.

Default Setting

Shows all VLANs.

Command Mode

Normal Exec, Privileged Exec

30-16

ONFIGURING

RIVATE

VLAN

Example

The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1:

Console#show vlan id 1

VLAN ID: 1

Type: Static

Name: DefaultVlan

Status: Active

Ports/Port Channels: Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 4(S) Eth1/ 5(S)

Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S) Eth1/ 8(S) Eth1/ 9(S) Eth1/10(S)

Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S) Eth1/13(S) Eth1/14(S) Eth1/15(S)

Eth1/16(S) Eth1/17(S) Eth1/18(S) Eth1/19(S) Eth1/20(S)

Eth1/21(S) Eth1/22(S) Eth1/23(S) Eth1/24(S)

Console#

Configuring Private VLANs

Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN. This section describes commands used to configure private VlANs.

Command pvlan show pvlan

Table 30-6 Private VLAN Commands

Function

Enables and configured private

VLANS

Displays the configured private

VLANS

Mode Page

30-17

PE 30-18

pvlan

This command enables or configures a private VLAN. Use the no form to disable the private VLAN.

Syntax pvlan [ up-link interface-list down-link interface-list ] no pvlan

• up-link – Specifies an uplink interface.

• down-link – Specifies a downlink interface.

Default Setting

No private VLANs are defined.

30-17

VLAN C

OMMANDS

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

• A private VLAN provides port-based security and isolation between ports within the VLAN. Data traffic on the downlink ports can only be forwarded to, and from, the uplink port.

• Private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch.

• Entering the pvlan command without any parameters enables the private VLAN. Entering no pvlan disables the private VLAN.

Example

This example enables the private VLAN, and then sets port 12 as the uplink and ports 5-8 as the downlinks.

Console(config)#pvlan

Console(config)#pvlan up-link ethernet 1/12 down-link ethernet 1/5-8

Console(config)#

show pvlan

This command displays the configured private VLAN.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#show pvlan

Private VLAN status: Enabled

Up-link port:

Ethernet 1/12

Down-link port:

Ethernet 1/5

Ethernet 1/6

Ethernet 1/7

Ethernet 1/8

Console#

30-18

ONFIGURING

ROTOCOL

BASED

VLAN

Configuring Protocol-based VLANs

To avoid these problems, you can configure this switch with protocol-based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical

VLAN groups for each required protocol. When a frame is received at a port, its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type in use by the inbound packets.

Table 30-7 Protocol-based VLAN Commands

Command protocol-vlan protocol-group protocol-vlan protocol-group show protocol-vlan protocol-group show interfaces protocol-vlan protocol-group

Function

Create a protocol group, specifying the supported protocols

Maps a protocol group to a VLAN

Shows the configuration of protocol groups

Shows the interfaces mapped to a protocol group and the corresponding

VLAN

Mode Page

To configure protocol-based VLANs, follow these steps:

First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use

(page 30-8). Although not mandatory, we suggest configuring a

separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network.

Do not add port members at this time.

Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN using the protocol-vlan protocol-group command

(General Configuration mode).

30-19

VLAN C

OMMANDS

Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the protocol-vlan protocol-group command (Interface

Configuration mode).

protocol-vlan protocol-group

(Configuring Groups)

This command creates a protocol group, or to add specific protocols to a group. Use the no form to remove a protocol group.

Syntax protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id [{ add | remove } frame-type frame protocol-type protocol ] no protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id

• group-id - Group identifier of this protocol group. (Range:

1-2147483647)

• frame 28 - Frame type used by this protocol. (Options: ethernet, rfc_1042, llc_other)

• protocol - Protocol type. The only option for the llc_other frame type is ipx_raw. The options for all other frames types include: ip, arp, rarp.

Default Setting

No protocol groups are configured.

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Example

The following creates protocol group 1, and specifies Ethernet frames with IP and ARP protocol types:

Console(config)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 1 add frame-type ethernet protocol-type ip

Console(config)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 1 add frame-type ethernet protocol-type arp

Console(config)#

28. SNAP frame types are not supported by this switch due to hardware limitations.

30-20

ONFIGURING

ROTOCOL

BASED

VLAN

protocol-vlan protocol-group

(Configuring Interfaces)

This command maps a protocol group to a VLAN for the current interface. Use the no form to remove the protocol mapping for this interface.

Syntax protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id vlan vlan-id no protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id vlan

• group-id - Group identifier of this protocol group.

(Range: 1-2147483647)

• vlan-id - VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded.

(Range: 1-4093)

Default Setting

No protocol groups are mapped for any interface.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• When creating a protocol-based VLAN, only assign interfaces via this command. If you assign interfaces using any of the other VLAN

commands (such as vlan on page 30-8), these interfaces will admit

traffic of any protocol type into the associated VLAN.

• When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol

VLAN, it is processed in the following manner:

- If the frame is tagged, it will be processed according to the standard rules applied to tagged frames.

- If the frame is untagged and the protocol type matches, the frame is forwarded to the appropriate VLAN.

- If the frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match, the frame is forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface.

30-21

VLAN C

OMMANDS

Example

The following example maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol type specified in protocol group 1 to VLAN 2.

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 1 vlan 2

Console(config-if)#

show protocol-vlan protocol-group

This command shows the frame and protocol type associated with protocol groups.

Syntax show protocol-vlan protocol-group [ group-id ] group-id - Group identifier for a protocol group.

(Range: 1-2147483647)

Default Setting

All protocol groups are displayed.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

This shows protocol group 1 configured for IP over Ethernet:

Console#show protocol-vlan protocol-group

ProtocolGroup ID Frame Type Protocol Type

------------------ ------------- ---------------

1 ethernet 08 00

Console#

30-22

ONFIGURING

ROTOCOL

BASED

VLAN

show interfaces protocol-vlan protocol-group

This command shows the mapping from protocol groups to VLANs for the selected interfaces.

Syntax show interfaces protocol-vlan protocol-group [ interface ] interface

• ethernet unit / port

unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)

port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)

• port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-32)

Default Setting

The mapping for all interfaces is displayed.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

This shows that traffic entering Port 1 that matches the specifications for protocol group 1 will be mapped to VLAN 2:

Console#show interfaces protocol-vlan protocol-group

Port ProtocolGroup ID Vlan ID

---------- ------------------ -----------

Eth 1/1 1 vlan2

Console#

30-23

VLAN C

OMMANDS

Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling

IDs. QinQ tunneling expands VLAN space by using a VLAN-in-VLAN hierarchy, preserving the customer’s original tagged packets, and adding

SPVLAN tags to each frame (also called double tagging).

This section describes commands used to configure QinQ tunneling.

Table 30-8 IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling Commands

Command system mode

Function

Configures the switch to operate in normal mode or QinQ mode show system mode Displays the switch’s system mode switchport mode dot1q-tunnel

Configures an interface as a QinQ tunnel port show dot1q-tunnel Displays information about QinQ tunnel ports switchport dot1q-ethertype system mtu show system mtu

Sets the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) value of a tunnel port

Sets the maximum transfer unit for the switch

Shows the maximum transfer unit size for

Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ports

Mode Page

General Configuration Guidelines for QinQ

Configure the switch to QinQ mode ( system mode

, page 19-10).

Create a SPVLAN ( vlan

, page 30-8).

Configure the QinQ tunnel port to dot1Q tunnel port mode

(

switchport mode dot1q-tunnel , page 30-25).

Set the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) value of the tunnel port. This step is required if the attached client is using a nonstandard 2-byte

30-24

ONFIGURING

IEEE 802.1Q T

UNNELING ethertype to identify 802.1Q tagged frames. The standard ethertype

value is 0x8100. (See switchport dot1q-ethertype , page 30-27.)

Configure the QinQ tunnel port to join the SPVLAN as an untagged

member ( switchport allowed vlan , page 30-14).

Configure the SPVLAN ID as the native VID on the QinQ tunnel port (

switchport native vlan , page 30-13).

Configure system MTU to 1526 if jumbo frames are not enabled (see

“System MTU Commands” on page 19-12).

Configure the QinQ uplink port to join the SPVLAN as a tagged

member ( switchport allowed vlan , page 30-14).

switchport mode dot1q-tunnel

This command configures an interface as a QinQ tunnel port. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax switchport mode dot1q-tunnel no switchport mode dot1q-tunnel – Sets the port as an 802.1Q tunnel port.

Default Setting

All ports are in hybrid mode.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

Use the switchport mode command to set the switch to QinQ mode before entering this command.

30-25

VLAN C

OMMANDS

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport mode dot1q-tunnel

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

show dot1q-tunnel (page 30-26)

switchport mode dot1q-tunnel (page 30-25)

show dot1q-tunnel

This command displays information about QinQ tunnel ports.

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console(config)#system mode qinq

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport mode dot1q-tunnel

Console(config-if)#end

Console#show dot1q-tunnel

Dot1q-Tunnel Port List

-------eth 1/1

Total 1 Dot1q-Tunnel Ports, 0 Dot1q-Tunnel Port-Channel

Console#

Related Commands

30-26

ONFIGURING

IEEE 802.1Q T

UNNELING

switchport dot1q-ethertype

This command sets the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) value of a tunnel port. Use the no form. Use the no form to restore the default setting.

Syntax switchport dot1q-ethertype tpid no switchport dot1q-ethertype tpid – Sets the ethertype value for 802.1Q encapsulation. This identifier is used to select a nonstandard 2-byte ethertype to identify 802.1Q tagged frames. The standard ethertype value is

0x8100. (Range: 0-ffff hexadecimal)

Default Setting

No dot1q-ethertype is set.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

Command Usage

• Use the switchport dot1q-ethertype command to set a custom

802.1Q ethertype value on the selected interface. This feature allows the switch to interoperate with third-party switches that do not use the standard 0x8100 ethertype to identify 802.1Q-tagged frames. For example, 0x1234 is set as the custom 802.1Q ethertype on a trunk port, incoming frames containing that ethertype are assigned to the

VLAN contained in the tag following the ethertype field, as they would be with a standard 802.1Q trunk. Frames arriving on the port containing any other ethertype are looked upon as untagged frames, and assigned to the native VLAN of that port.

• All members of a VLAN should be set to the same ethertype.

Example

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1

Console(config-if)#switchport dot1q-ethertype 9100

Console(config-if)#

Related Commands

the show queue bandwidth command. Inbound frames that do not

30-27

VLAN C

OMMANDS

30-28

HAPTER

LASS OF

ERVICE

OMMANDS

The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion. This switch supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port. Data packets in a port’s high-priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower-priority queues. You can set the default priority for each interface, the relative weight of each queue, and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch’s priority queues.

Table 31-1 Priority Commands

Command Groups Function

Priority (Layer 2) Configures default priority for untagged frames, sets queue weights, and maps class of service tags to hardware queues

Priority (Layer 3 and 4) Maps TCP ports, IP precedence tags, or IP

DSCP tags to class of service values

Page

31-2

31-11

31-1

LASS OF

ERVICE

OMMANDS

Priority Commands

(Layer 2)

This section describes commands used to configure Layer 2 traffic priority on the switch.

Table 31-2 Priority Commands (Layer 2)

Command

Global Priority Settings queue mode

Function

Sets the queue mode to strict priority or

Weighted Round-Robin (WRR) show queue mode Shows the current queue mode

Port-based Priority Settings switchport priority default queue bandwidth queue cos-map

Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames

Assigns round-robin weights to the priority queues

Assigns class-of-service values to the priority queues show queue bandwidth

Shows round-robin weights assigned to the priority queues show queue cos-map Shows the class-of-service map show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of an interface

VLAN-based Priority Settings vlan priority Modifies the priority for frames entering a

VLAN through a selected interface show vlan based priority

Displays the modified priority for frames entering a VLAN

Mode Page

31-2

RIORITY

OMMANDS

AYER

queue mode

This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted

Round-Robin (WRR) for the class of service (CoS) priority queues. Use the no form to restore the default value.

Syntax queue mode { strict | wrr } no queue mode

• strict - Services the egress queues in sequential order, transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues.

• wrr - Weighted Round-Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 for queues 0 - 7 respectively.

Default Setting

Weighted Round Robin

Command Mode

Global Configuration

Command Usage

(WRR) queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue. WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue. This prevents the head-of-line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing.

Example

The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode:

Console(config)#queue mode strict

Console(config)#

31-3

LASS OF

ERVICE

OMMANDS

Related Commands

queue bandwidth (31-6)

show queue mode (31-4)

show queue mode

This command shows the current queue mode.

Default Setting

None

Command Mode

Privileged Exec

Example

Console#sh queue mode

Wrr status: Enabled

Console#

switchport priority default

This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames. Use the no form to restore the default value.

Syntax switchport priority default default-priority-id no switchport priority default default-priority-id - The priority number for untagged ingress traffic.

The priority is a number from 0 to 7. Seven is the highest priority.

Default Setting

The priority is not set, and the default value for untagged frames received on the interface is zero.

Command Mode

Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)

31-4

RIORITY

OMMANDS

AYER

Command Usage

• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP

DSCP, and default switchport priority.

• The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types (i.e, receives both untagged and tagged frames). This priority does not apply to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frames. If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frame, the IEEE 802.1p User Priority bits will be used.

• This switch provides eight priority queues for each port. It is configured to use Weighted Round Robin, which can be viewed with

have VLAN tags are tagged with the input port’s default ingress user priority, and then placed in the appropriate priority queue at the output port. The default priority for all ingress ports is zero.

Therefore, any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will be placed in queue 0 of the output port. (Note that if the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN, these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission.)

Example

The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5:

Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3

Console(config-if)#switchport priority default 5

Related Commands